1336 PLUS II Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with 0.37-448 kW (0.5 - 600 HP) Firmware 1.xxx - 6.xxx User Manual Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of Important User Information electromechanical equipment. “Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls” (Publication SGI-1.1 available from your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office or online at www.rockwellautomation.com/literature) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable. In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment. The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams. No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual. Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc. is prohibited. Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations. ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property ! damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you: • identify a hazard • avoid the hazard • recognize the consequences Important: Identifies information that is especially important for successful application and understanding of the product. Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present. StepLogic and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc. Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies. Summary of Changes New/Updated Information The information below summarizes the changes to the 1336 PLUS II User Manual since the last release. Description of Change Page(s) TB1 info updated - D Frame 2–15, B–18 Updated Parameters: [Load Loss Level] 6–26 [Phase Loss Level] 6–35 [Heatsink Temp] 6–39 [Drive Type] 6–42 New Parameters: [Motor OL Ret] 6–35 Parameter Cross References A–8 updated Parameter Record updated A–17 soc–2 Summary of Changes Notes Table of Contents Chapter 1 Information and Precautions Manual Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2 Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2 Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2 Nameplate Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4 Chapter 2 Installation/Wiring Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1 Installation Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2 AC Supply Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3 Input Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4 Input Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5 Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9 Electrical Interference - EMI/RFI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9 RFI Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10 CE Conformity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11 Power Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14 Control and Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24 Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25 Encoder Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30 Pulse Input/Output Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31 Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31 Analog I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32 Standard Analog I/O Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33 Optional Analog I/O Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34 Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37 Cable Termination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37 Selecting/Verifying Fan Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38 Auxiliary Inputs - TB4, TB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–39 Auxiliary Output - TB9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40 Control Interface Board Installation and Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40 Adapter Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41 Chapter 3 Human Interface Module HIM Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1 HIM Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4 Handheld HIM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13 Chapter 4 Flash Memory What is Flash Memory? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1 Firmware Download Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1 toc–ii Table of Contents Chapter 5 Start-Up Start-Up Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1 Initial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2 Assisted Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2 Advanced Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5 Chapter 6 Programming Function Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1 Programming Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1 Chapter Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Fault Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9 Appendix A Specifications and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1 User Supplied Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–4 Supplemental Information Derating Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–5 Parameter Cross Reference - By Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–8 Parameter Cross Reference - By Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–9 HIM Character Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–10 Communications Data Information Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–11 Typical Programmable Controller Communications Configurations . . . . A–12 Typical Serial Communications Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–13 Encoder Interface Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–14 Read/Write Parameter Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–17 Appendix B Dimensions Appendix C CE Conformity Requirements for Conforming Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–2 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–2 Electrical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–3 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–4 Mechanical Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–4 Chapter 1 Information and Precautions Chapter 1 provides information on the general intent of this man- ual, gives an overall description of the 1336 PLUS II Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and provides a listing of key drive features. Manual Objectives This publication provides planning, installation, wiring and diag- nostic information for the 1336 PLUS II Drive. To assure success- ful installation and operation, the material presented must be thoroughly read and understood before proceeding. Particular attention must be directed to the Attention and Important state- ments contained within. For J Frame information, refer to publication 1336F-IN014. Software Compatibility 1 Three-Phase Drive Rating Compatible with Frame 200-240V 380-480V 500-600V Version . . . Reference 0.37-0.75 kW 0.37-1.2 kW – 1.0 & Up A1 0.5-1 HP 0.5-1.5 HP 1.2-1.5 kW 1.5-2.2 kW – 1.0 & Up A2 1.5-2 HP 2-3 HP 2.2-3.7 kW 3.7 kW – 1.0 & Up A3 3-5 HP 5 HP 5.5 kW 5.5-15 kW 0.75-15 kW 1.0 & Up A4 7.5 HP 7.5-20 HP 1-20 HP 5.5-11 kW 11-22 kW – 1.0 & Up B1/B2 7.5-15 HP 15-30 HP 15-22 kW 30-45 kW 18.5-45 kW 1.0 & Up C 20-30 HP 40-60 HP 25-60 HP 30-45 kW 45-112 kW 56-93 kW 1.0 & Up D 40-60 HP 60-150 HP 75-125 HP 56-93 kW 112-187 kW 112-224 kW 1.0 & Up E 75-125 HP 150-250 HP 150-300 HP – 187-336 kW 261-298 kW 1.0 & Up F 250-450 HP 350-400 HP – 187-448 kW 224-448 kW 1.0 & Up G 250-600 HP 300-600 HP 1 kW and HP are constant torque. 1–2 Information and Precautions General Precautions ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control ! precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing or repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, reference A-B publication 8000-4.5.2, “Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage” or any other applicable ESD protection handbook. ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product ! life. Wiring or application errors, such as, undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system. ATTENTION: Only personnel familiar with the 1336 PLUS II Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and associated ! machinery should plan or implement the installation, start- up and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. ATTENTION: To avoid a hazard of electric shock, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before ! performing any work on the drive. Measure the DC bus voltage at the + & - terminals of TB1. The voltage must be 0.0V DC. Conventions Used in this To help differentiate parameter names and display text from other text the following conventions will be used: Manual  Parameter Names will appear in [brackets]  Display Text will appear in “quotes” Catalog Number Explanation The diagram on the following page describes the 1336 PLUS II catalog numbering scheme. Information and Precautions 1–3 – – – 1336F BR F30 – AA EN MODS First Position Second Position Third Position Fourth Position Fifth Position Sixth Position Bulletin Number Voltage Nominal HP Rating Enclosure Type Language Group➀ Options Letter Voltages Code Type Code Language AQ 200-240V AC or Refer to table below for AA IP 20 (NEMA 1) EN English ratings and possible 310V DC AE IP 20 (NEMA 1)/EMC FR French voltage combinations. BR 380-480VAC or DE German AF IP 65 (NEMA 4)➂ 513-620V DC IT Italian AJ IP 54 (NEMA 12)➂ CW 500-600V AC or ES Spanish AN IP 00 (Open) 775V DC JP Japanese ➄ A 200-240V AC B 380-480V AC BP/BPR➃ 380-480V AC Code Description (F Frame) Human Interface Module, Snap-In, IP20 (NEMA Type 1) BX Special Rating HASB Snap-In Cradle/Blank Plate C 500-600V AC HASP Programmer Only CP/CPR➃ 500-600V AC (F Frame) HCSP Programmer Only & Upload/Download Capability Q 310V DC HAS1 Programmer/Controller w/Analog Pot R 513-620V DC HCS1 Programmer/Controller w/Analog Pot & Upload/Download Capability RX Special Rating HAS2 Programmer/Controller w/Digital Pot W 775V DC HCS2 Programmer/Controller w/Digital Pot & Upload/Download Capability Human Interface Module, IP65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12) HJP Programmer Only HJ2 Programmer/Controller w/Digital Pot Communication Options –- B Frame & Up (Adapter 6) Voltage and Nominal HP Rating Combinations GM1 Single Point Remote I/O B Frame GM2 RS-232/422/485, DF1 & DH485 B Frame BP/ CP/ GM5 DeviceNet™ Code Rating AQ BR CW A B BPR BX C CPR Q R RX W GM6 Enhanced DeviceNet™ F05 0.37 (0.5) ●● F07 0.56 (0.75) ●● Communication Options –- All Frames (Adapter 1) F10 0.75 (1) ●● ● GMS1 GM1 with Snap-In Cradle F15 1.2 (1.5) ●● GMS2 GM2 with Snap-In Cradle F20 1.5 (2) ●● ● GMS5 GM5 with Snap-In Cradle F30 2.2 (3) ●● ● GMS6 GM6 with Snap-In Cradle F50 3.7 (5) ●● ● Control Interface Options F75 5.5 (7.5) ●● ● L4 TTL Contact F100 7.5 (10) ●● L4E TTL Contact & Encoder Feedback F150 11 (15) ●● L7E TTL Contact & Encoder Fdbck. for use with Encoder Loss Detection F200 15 (20) ●● 007 5.5 (7.5) ●● L5 24V AC/DC 010 7.5 (10) ●● L5E 24V AC/DC & Encoder Feedback 015 11 (15) ●● ●● L8E 24V AC/DC & Encoder Feedback for use with Encoder Loss Detection 020 15 (20) ●● ●● L6 115V AC 025 18.5 (25) ●● ● ● ● ● L6E 115V AC & Encoder Feedback 030 22 (30) ●● ● ● ● ● L9E 115V AC & Encoder Feedback for use with Encoder Loss Detection 040 30 (40) ●● ● ● ●● ● ● Analog Interface Options – Slot A 050 37 (50) ●● ● ● ● ● • Choose No More than One – Configurable Inputs/Outputs are 10V or 20mA 060 45 (60) ●● ● ● ●● ● ● LA2 Two Isolated Configurable Inputs 075 56 (75) ●● ● ● ● ● 100 75 (100) ●● ● ● ● ● LA6 One Isolated Bi-polar Input (±10V or ±20mA) and One Isolated Thermistor Input 125 93 (125) ●● ● ● ● ● LA7 One Isolated Bi-polar Input (±10V or ±20mA) and One Isolated 150 112 (150) ●●● ●●● Configurable Input 200 149 (200) ●● ●● Analog Interface Options – Slot B 250 187 (250)➁●●●● ●●●  Choose No More than One – Configurable Inputs/Outputs are 10V or 20mA 300 224 (300)➁●●● ●● 350 261 (350)➁●●●●●● LA1 Single-ended, Non-isolated Configurable (including Pot) Input & 2 Single-ended, Non-isolated Outputs (1 - Configurable, 1 - 20mA) 400 298 (400)➁●●●●●● 450 336 (450)➁●●● ●● LA3 Two Isolated Configurable Outputs 500 373 (500)➁● ● ●● LA4 One Isolated Configurable Input & Output 600 448 (600) ●● ●● LA5 Isolated Pulse Input, Non-isolated Pulse Output & Single-ended, Non-isolated Configurable Output ➀ Language must be specified to ensure shipment of appropriate User Manual. Common Mode Choke –- F & G Frame (must be specified for F Frame) ➁ G Frame Standard Drives in enclosed construction are supplied through the Configured Drives Program and will have an “A” suffix after the HP rating. CM Internal Common Mode Choke (factory installed) ➂ D through G Frame drives in IP 65 (NEMA Type 4) and IP 54 (NEMA Type 12) configurations are NCM No Common Mode Choke supplied through the Configured Drives Program. ➃ “xPR” has a “roll-in” type chassis. ➄ Not available with v5.001 & later. 1–4 Information and Precautions Nameplate Location Figure 1.1 1336 PLUS II Nameplate Location 1 Refer to page 1-1 for frame reference classifications. ESC SEL JOG 1 1 Frames A1, A2, A3, A4 Frames B - G Nameplate Located on Nameplate Located on Bottom Portion of Mounting Plate of Chassis Behind Cover Main Control Board Chapter 2 Installation/Wiring Chapter 2 provides the information you need to properly mount and wire the 1336 PLUS II Drive. Since most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring, every precaution must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed. All items must be read and understood before the actual installation begins. ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper installation. The Allen-Bradley ! Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation. Mounting Minimum Mounting Requirements for Proper Heat Dissipation (Dimensions shown are between drives or other devices) 152.4 mm 152.4 mm (6.0 in.) (6.0 in.) 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) ESC SEL ESC JOG JOG UP 152.4 mm 152.4 mm (6.0 in.) (6.0 in.) Important: A4 Frame drives should not be mounted on a combustible surface. However, if the drive must be mounted on a combustible surface, 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) spacers must be provided under the mounting feet of the drive. F Frame drives require a minimum of 152.4 mm (6.0 in.) between the drive back and mounting wall, if drives are mounted with sides touching another device or wall. A minimum of 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) is required on the sides if the back of the drive is mounted against a wall or other device. 2–2 Installation/Wiring Installation Guidelines GND Page 2–3 AC Supply Source CAT. NO. FREQUENCY POWER RATING PRIMARY VOLTAGE Page 2–4 SECONDARY VOLTAGE INSULATION CLASS Input Power Conditioning NO. OF PHASES VENDOR PART NO. ALLEN-BRADLEY Page 2–5 Input Fusing & Circuit Breakers Page 2–9 Input Devices Page 2–10 Input Filters PE R S T GND (L1) (L2) (L3) Page 2–9 Electrical Interference ESC SEL Page 2–11 Grounding JOG Page 2–14 Power Cabling PE (T1) (T2) (T3) GND U V W Page 2–24 Control & Signal Cabling Page 2–37 Output Devices Page 2–37 Cable Termination Motor Installation/Wiring 2–3 AC Supply Source 1336 PLUS II drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of deliv- ering up to a maximum of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 600 volts. Refer to Table 2.A for actual interrupt ratings based on fuse or circuit breaker choice. ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or equipment damage caused by improper fusing, use only the ! recommended line fuses specified in Table 2.A. Unbalanced Distribution Systems This drive is designed to operate on three-phase supply systems whose line voltages are symmetrical. Surge suppression devices are included to protect the drive from lightning induced overvoltages between line and ground. Where the potential exists for abnormally high phase-to-ground voltages (in excess of 125% of nominal), or where the supply ground is tied to another system or equipment that could cause the ground potential to vary with operation, suitable iso- lation is required for the drive. Where this potential exists, an isola- tion transformer is strongly recommended. Ungrounded Distribution Systems All 1336 PLUS II drives are equipped with an MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) that provides voltage surge protection and phase-to-phase plus phase-to-ground protection which is designed to meet IEEE 587. The MOV circuit is designed for surge suppression only (transient line protection), not continuous operation. With ungrounded distribution systems, the phase-to-ground MOV connection could become a continuous current path to ground. Energy ratings are listed below. Exceeding the published phase-to- phase or phase-to-ground energy ratings may cause physical damage to the MOV. Refer to page A-1. Joules (J) R Phase-to-Phase MOV Rating Three-Phase Includes 2 Phase-Phase MOVs S Joules (J) AC Input Joules (J) T Phase-to-Ground MOV Rating Includes Phase-Phase & Phase-Ground MOVs Joules (J) Ground 12 34 Frame Reference A B-C D-G Device Rating (V AC) 240 480/600 240/480 600 240/480 600 Phase-Phase Total 160J 320J 280J 320J 280J 300J Phase-Ground Total 220J 380J 360J 410J 360J 370J 2–4 Installation/Wiring Input Power Conditioning In general, the 1336 PLUS II is suitable for direct connection to an AC line of the correct voltage. Certain conditions can exist, however, that prompt consideration of a line reactor or isolation transformer ahead of the drive. The basic rules to aid in determining whether a line reactor or isola- tion transformer should be considered are as follows: 1. If the AC source experiences frequent power outages or signifi- cant voltage transients, users should calculate the VA (see for- max mula below). If the source transformer VA exceeds the calculated VA and the drive is installed close to the source, it is an indication max that there may be enough energy behind these voltage transients to cause nuisance input fuse blowing, overvoltage faults or drive power structure damage. In these cases, a line reactor or isolation trans- former should be considered. V line-line Z (Ω/Φ) = drive √3 x Input Amps 2 (V ) x % Source Leakage (5-6% typical) line-line VA = max Z x 0.01 drive 2. If the AC source does not have a neutral or one phase referenced to ground (see Unbalanced Distribution Systems on page 2–3), an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is highly recommended. If the line-to-ground voltages on any phase can exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-line voltage, an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded, is highly recommended. 3. If the AC line supplying the drive has power factor correction capacitors that are switched in and out, an isolation transformer or 5% line reactor is recommended between the drive and capaci- tors. If the capacitors are permanently connected and not switched, the general rules above apply. Installation/Wiring 2–5 Input Fuses and Circuit The 1336 PLUS II can be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit breaker. Local/national electrical codes may determine addi- Breakers tional requirements for these installations. The tables on the following pages provide drive ratings and recom- mended AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information. Both types of short circuit protection are acceptable for UL and IEC requirements. Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40 degree C and the U.S. N.E.C. Other country, state or local codes may require different ratings. ATTENTION: The 1336 PLUS II does not provide input power short circuit protection. Specifications for the recom- ! mended fuse or circuit breaker to provide drive input power protection against short circuits are provided. Fusing If fuses are chosen as the desired protection method, refer to the recommended types listed below. If available amp ratings do not match the tables provided, the closest fuse rating that exceeds the drive rating should be chosen. 1  IEC – BS88 (British Standard) Parts 1 & 2 , EN60269-1, Parts 1 & 2, type gG or equivalent should be used.  UL – UL Class CC, T, RK1 or J must be used. Circuit Breakers The “non-fuse” listings in the following tables include both circuit breakers (inverse time or instantaneous trip) and 140M Self-Protect- ing Motor Starters. If one of these is chosen as the desired protec- tion method, the following requirements apply.  IEC and UL – Both types of devices are acceptable for IEC and UL installations 1. Typical designations include, but may not be limited to the following; Parts 1 & 2: AC, AD, BC, BD, CD, DD, ED, EFS, EF, FF, FG, GF, GG, GH. 2–6 Installation/Wiring Table 2.A 240 Volt Input Protection Devices Dual-Element Motor Drive Input Output Time Delay Non-Time Circuit Circuit Catalog 3 4,9 5, 6 Rating Rating Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker Protector 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range Number 1 2 1 2 8 8 7 1336F- HP Amps Amps Min. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Available Catalog Numbers A1 F05 0.5 2.8 2.3 4 5 4 6 15 3 140M-C2E-B40 140M-D8E-B40 – – F07 0.75 3.5 3.0 4 6 4 9 15 7 140M-C2E-B40 140M-D8E-B40 – – F10 1 5.4 4.5 6 9 6 12 15 7 140M-C2E-B63 140M-D8E-B63 – – A2 F15 1.5 7.3 6.0 8 12.5 8 15 20 15 140M-C2E-C10 140M-D8E-C10 140M-F8E-C10 – F20 2 9.7 8.0 10 15 10 20 25 15 140M-C2E-C10 140M-D8E-C10 140M-F8E-C10 – A3 F30 3 14.3 12.0 15 20 15 25 35 15 140M-C2E-C16 140M-D8E-C16 140M-F8E-C16 – F50 5 21.3 18.0 25 30 25 45 60 30 140M-C2E-C25 140M-D8E-C25 140M-F8E-C25 140M-CMN-2500 F75 7.5 22.6 22.0 30 45 30 60 80 50 140M-C2E-C25 140M-D8E-C25 140M-F8E-C25 140M-CMN-2500 B 007 7.5 28.0 27.0 40 45 40 60 80 50 – – 140M-F8E-C32 140M-CMN-4000 010 10 35.0 34.0 50 60 50 80 100 50 – – – 140M-CMN-4000 015 15 49.0 48.0 70 90 70 110 150 70 – – – 140M-CMN-6300 C 020 20 63.0 65.0 100 110 100 125 200 100 – – – 140M-CMN-9000 025 25 75.0 77.0 100 150 100 200 250 100 – – – 140M-CMN-9000 030 30 79.0 80.0 125 175 125 225 300 150 – – – 140M-CMN-9000 D 040 40 119.0 120.0 120 225 120 300 300 150 – – – – 050 50 149.0 150.0 200 250 200 350 350 250 – – – – 060 60 178.0 180.0 250 300 250 450 450 250 – – – – E 075 75 238.0 240.0 300 400 300 500 500 250 – – – – 100 100 289.0 291.0 400 500 400 700 700 400 – – – – 125 125 322.0 325.0 450 700 450 800 800 600 – – – – 1 Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. 2 Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. 3 Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. 4 Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. 5 Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. 6 Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta systems. 7 The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary. See publication 140M-SG001B-EN-P. 8 Maximum rating allowed by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installtion. 9 The Maximum Short Circuit Rating of a Cutler-Hammer Series HMCP is 100,000A at 240 volts, 65,000A at 480 volts and 25,000A at 575 volts. Frame Installation/Wiring 2–7 Table 2.A (continued) 480 Volt Input Protection Devices CT Ratings VT Ratings Motor Dual Element Circuit Circuit Drive 5, Time Delay Non-Time Breaker Protector 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range Catalog 3 4,9 6 Input Output Input Output Fuse Delay Fuse Number 1 2 1 2 8 8 7 1336F- HP HP Amps Amps Amps Amps Min. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Available Catalog Numbers - 140 . . . A1 F05 0.5 1.3 1.1 0.5 1.4 1.2 3 2.5 3 3 15 3 M-C2E-B16 – – – F07 0.75 2.0 1.6 0.75 2.1 1.7 3 3 3 6 15 3 M-C2E-B25 – – – F10 1 2.6 2.1 1 2.8 2.3 3 4.5 3 8 15 3 M-C2E-B40 M-D8E-B40 – – F15 1.5 3.3 2.8 1.5 3.5 3.0 4 6 4 12 15 7 M-C2E-B40 M-D8E-B40 – – A2 F20 2 4.6 3.8 2 4.8 4.0 5 6 5 12 15 7 M-C2E-C63 M-D8E-C63 – – F30 3 6.4 5.3 3 7.2 6.0 8 10 8 15 25 7 M-C2E-C10 M-D8E-C10 M-F8E-C10 – A3 F50 5 10.0 8.4 5 10.7 9.0 12 15 12 30 35 15 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 – A4 F75 7.5 13.6 13.3 10 15.7 15.4 20 30 20 50 50 30 M-C2E-C16 M-D8E-C16 M-F8E-C16 – F100 10 16.4 16.1 15 22.4 22.0 30 40 30 80 80 30 M-C2E-C25 M-D8E-C25 M-F8E-C25 -CMN-2500 F150 15 24.5 24.0 20 24.5 24.0 35 60 35 100 100 50 M-C2E-C25 M-D8E-C25 M-F8E-C25 -CMN-2500 F200 20 28.0 27.0 20 28.0 27.0 35 60 35 100 100 50 – – M-F8E-C32 -CMN-4000 B 015 15 25.0 24.2 20 28.0 27.0 35 60 35 100 100 50 – – M-F8E-C32 -CMN-4000 020 20 32.0 31.0 25 35.0 34.0 45 70 45 125 125 50 – – M-F8E-C45 -CMN-4000 025 25 40.0 39.0 30 43.0 42.0 60 90 60 150 150 70 – – M-F8E-C45 -CMN-6300 030 30 46.0 45.0 30 49.0 48.0 70 90 70 150 150 70 – – – -CMN-6300 C X040 40 61.0 59.0 40 61.0 59.0 80 110 80 200 200 70 – – – -CMN-6300 040 40 58.0 60.0 50 63.0 65.0 80 125 80 250 250 100 – – – -CMN-6300 050 50 73.0 75.0 60 75.0 77.0 100 150 100 300 300 100 – – – -CMN-9000 X060 60 75.0 77.0 60 75.0 77.0 100 150 100 300 300 100 – – – -CMN-9000 D 060 60 82.0 85.0 75 93.0 96.0 125 200 125 350 350 150 – – – – 075 75 105.0 106.0 100 119.0 120.0 150 250 150 450 350 250 – – – – 100 100 137.0 138.0 125 149.0 150.0 200 350 200 600 450 250 – – – – 125 125 172.0 173.0 150 178.0 180.0 250 400 250 600 500 250 – – – – X150 150 178.0 180.0 150 178.0 180.0 250 400 250 600 500 250 – – – – E 150 150 197.0 199.0 200 238.0 240.0 300 500 300 700 700 400 – – – – 200 200 261.0 263.0 250 290.0 292.0 400 600 400 800 800 400 – – – – 250 250 322.0 325.0 250 322.0 325.0 450 600 450 800 800 400 – – – – F P250 250 322.0 325.0 300 357.0 360.0 450 – P300 300 357.0 360.0 350 421.0 425.0 500 – Semiconductor fuse supplied with drive. P350 350 421.0 425.0 400 471.0 475.0 600 – Refer to the 1336 Spare Parts list (publication 1336-6.5) for replacement information. P400 400 471.0 475.0 450 527.0 532.0 600 – P450 450 527.0 532.0 700 – G X250 250 322.0 325.0 300 357.0 360.0 450 – 300 300 357.0 360.0 350 421.0 425.0 450 – 350 350 421.0 425.0 400 471.0 475.0 500 – Bussmann Type FWP, SPP, or 170M Series 400 400 471.0 475.0 450 521.0 525.0 600/630 – Ferraz Shawmut Type A-70Q, A-70QS or A070URD Series 450 450 521.0 525.0 500 585.0 590.0 800 – 500 500 585.0 590.0 600 664.0 670.0 800 – 600 600 664.0 670.0 600 664.0 670.0 900 - 1 Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. 2 Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. 3 Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. 4 Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. 5 Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. 6 Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta systems. 7 The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary. See publication 140M-SG001B-EN-P. 8 Maximum rating allowed by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installtion. 9 The Maximum Short Circuit Rating of a Cutler-Hammer Series HMCP is 100,000A at 240 volts, 65,000A at 480 volts and 25,000A at 575 volts. Frame 2–8 Installation/Wiring Table 2.A (continued) 575 Volt Input Protection Devices CT Ratings Motor Circuit Circuit Drive Dual Element Non-Time Breaker Protector Catalog 3 4,9 5, 6 Input Output Time Delay Fuse Delay Fuse 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range Number 1 2 1 2 8 8 7 1336F- HP Amps Amps Min. Max. Min. Max. Max. Max. Available Catalog Numbers A4 F10 1 2.4 2.0 3 3 3 6 15 3 140M-C2E-B25 – – – F20 2 4.8 4.0 6 6 6 10 15 7 140M-C2E-C63 140M-D8E-C63 – – F30 3 7.2 6.0 10 12 10 15 15 7 140M-C2E-C10 140M-D8E-C10 140M-F8E-C10 – F50 5 9.6 8.0 15 20 15 20 20 15 140M-C2E-C10 140M-D8E-C10 140M-F8E-C10 – F75 7.5 10.0 10.0 15 20 15 30 35 15 140M-C2E-C10 140M-D8E-C10 140M-F8E-C10 – F100 10 12.0 12.0 20 25 20 40 40 15 140M-C2E-C16 140M-D8E-C16 140M-F8E-C16 – F150 15 19.0 19.0 25 35 25 60 60 30 140M-C2E-C20 140M-D8E-C20 140M-F8E-C20 140-CMN-2500 F200 20 25.0 24.0 30 45 30 80 80 30 140M-C2E-C25 140M-D8E-C25 140M-F8E-C25 140-CMN-2500 C 025 25 31.0 30.0 40 60 40 100 100 50 – – 140M-F8E-C32 140-CMN-4000 030 30 36.0 35.0 50 70 50 125 125 50 – – 140M-F8E-C45 140-CMN-4000 040 40 44.0 45.0 60 90 60 150 150 70 – – 140M-F8E-C45 140-CMN-6300 050 50 55.0 57.0 80 110 80 200 200 70 – – – 140M-CMN-6300 060 60 60.0 62.0 90 125 90 225 225 100 – – – 140M-CMN-6300 D 075 75 84.0 85.0 110 150 110 300 300 100 – – – 140M-CMN-9000 100 100 108.0 109.0 150 200 150 350 350 150–––– 125 125 137.0 138.0 175 250 175 500 350 250–––– E 150 150 167.0 168.0 225 300 225 500 400 250–––– 200 200 251.0 252.0 350 400 350 600 500 250–––– 250 250 282.0 284.0 400 500 400 700 700 400–––– X300 300 295.0 298.0 400 600 400 800 800 400–––– F P350 350 347.0 350.0 450 Semiconductor fuse supplied with drive. Refer to the 1336 Spare Parts list (publication 1336-6.5) for replacement information. P400 400 397.0 400.0 500 G 300 300 297.0 300.0 400 350 350 347.0 350.0 450 400 400 397.0 400.0 500 Bussmann Type FWP, SPP, or 170M Series Ferraz Shawmut Type A-70Q, A-70QS or A070URD Series 450 450 446.0 450.0 600/630 500 500 496.0 500.0 800 600 600 595.0 600.0 800 1 Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. 2 Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. 3 Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. 4 Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. 5 Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. 6 Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta systems. 7 The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary. See publication 140M-SG001B-EN-P. 8 Maximum rating allowed by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installtion. 9 The Maximum Short Circuit Rating of a Cutler-Hammer Series HMCP is 100,000A at 240 volts, 65,000A at 480 volts and 25,000A at 575 volts. Table 2.B deleted Frame Installation/Wiring 2–9 Input Devices Starting and Stopping the Motor ATTENTION: The drive start/stop control circuitry in- cludes solid-state components. If hazards due to accidental ! contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop cir- cuit may be required to remove AC line power to the drive. When AC power is removed, there will be a loss of inherent regenerative braking effect & the motor will coast to a stop. An auxiliary braking method may be required. Repeated Application/Removal of Input Power ATTENTION: The drive is intended to be controlled by control input signals that will start and stop the motor. A ! device that routinely disconnects then reapplies line power to the drive for the purpose of starting and stopping the motor is not recommended. Bypass Contactors ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in ! product life. The most common causes are:  Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals.  Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen-Bradley.  Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor. Contact Allen-Bradley for assistance with application or wiring. Electrical Interference - EMI/RFI Immunity The immunity of 1336 PLUS II drives to externally generated interfer- ence is good. Usually, no special precautions are required beyond the installation practices provided in this publication. It is recommended that the coils of DC energized contactors associ- ated with drives be suppressed with a diode or similar device, since they can generate severe electrical transients. 2–10 Installation/Wiring Emission Careful attention must be given to the arrangement of power and ground connections to the drive to avoid interference with nearby sen- sitive equipment. The cable to the motor carries switched voltages and should be routed well away from sensitive equipment. The ground conductor of the motor cable should be connected to the drive ground (PE) terminal directly. Connecting this ground conduc- tor to a cabinet ground point or ground bus bar may cause high fre- quency current to circulate in the ground system of the enclosure. The motor end of this ground conductor must be solidly connected to the motor case ground. Shielded or armored cable may be used to guard against radiated emissions from the motor cable. The shield or armor should be con- nected to the drive ground (PE) terminal and the motor ground as outlined above. Common mode chokes at the drive output can help reduce common mode noise on installations that do not use shielded cable. Common mode chokes can also be used on analog or communication cables. Refer to page 2–37 for further information. An RFI filter can be used and in most situations provides an effective reduction of RFI emissions that may be conducted into the main supply lines. If the installation combines a drive with sensitive devices or circuits, it is recommended that the lowest possible drive PWM carrier fre- quency be programmed. RFI Filtering 1336 PLUS II drives can be installed with an RFI filter, which controls radio-frequency conducted emissions into the main supply lines and ground wiring. If the cabling and installation recommendation precautions described in this manual are adhered to, it is unlikely that interference problems will occur when the drive is used with conventional industrial elec- tronic circuits and systems. However, a filter may be required if there is a likelihood of sensitive devices or circuits being installed on the same AC supply. Where it is essential that very low emission levels must be achieved or if conformity with standards is required the optional RFI filter must be used. Refer to Appendix C and instructions included with the filter for installation and grounding information. CE Conformity Refer to Appendix C. Installation/Wiring 2–11 Grounding Refer to the grounding diagram on page 2–13. The drive must be con- nected to system ground at the power ground (PE) terminal provided on the power terminal block (TB1). Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations (NEC, VDE 0160, BSI, etc.) and should be inspected and tested at appropriate and regular intervals. In any cabinet, a single, low-impedance ground point or ground bus bar should be used. All circuits should be grounded independently and directly. The AC supply ground conductor should also be con- nected directly to this ground point or bus bar. Sensitive Circuits It is essential to define the paths through which the high frequency ground currents flow. This will assure that sensitive circuits do not share a path with such current. Control and signal conductors should not be run near or parallel to power conductors. Motor Cable The ground conductor of the motor cable (drive end) must be con- nected directly to the drive ground (PE) terminal, not to the enclosure bus bar. Grounding directly to the drive (and filter, if installed) can provide a direct route for high frequency current returning from the motor frame and ground conductor. At the motor end, the ground con- ductor should also be connected to the motor case ground. If shielded or armored cables are used, the shield/armor should also be grounded at both ends as described above. Encoder & Communications Cabling If encoder connections or communications cables are used, the wiring must be separated from power cabling. This can be accomplished with carefully routed, shielded cable (ground cable shield at the drive end only) or a separate steel conduit (grounded at both ends). Discrete Control and Signal Wiring The control and signal wiring must be grounded at a single point in the system, remote from the drive. This means the 0V or ground terminal should be grounded at the equipment end, not the drive end. If shielded control and signal wires are used, the shield must also be grounded at this point. If the control and signal wires are short, and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded control and signal wiring may not be necessary, but is always recommended. 2–12 Installation/Wiring Shield Termination - TE (True Earth) The TE terminal block (not available on A Frame drives) is used for all cable shields at the drive. It must be connected to an earth ground by a separate continuous lead. TE connections may exist on power and/or control terminal blocks to terminate shield cables for both power and control. Refer to Figure 2.1 for locations. Safety Ground - PE (Potential Earth) This is the safety ground required by code. This point must be con- nected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist) or a floor ground rod, provided grounding points comply with national or local electric code regulations. If a cabinet ground bus is used, refer to Grounding on page 2–11. RFI Filter Important: Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents. Surge suppression devices are also incorporated in the filter. Therefore, the filter must be permanently installed and solidly grounded to the supply neutral. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. The integrity of this connection should be periodically checked. Installation/Wiring 2–13 General Grounding Common Conduit/4-Wire Cable Mode R (L1) Core* U (T1) ESC SEL V (T2) S (L2) JOG W (T3) PE/Gnd. T (L3) Shield Motor Frame PE PE Ground per Local Codes RIO/DH+ Motor or Analog Terminator* Common Mode Core* * Options that can be Nearest installed as needed. Building Structure Steel To Computer/Position Controller (for TE shield ground, see "Control and Signal Wiring") Single-Point Grounding/Panel Layout R (L1) S (L2) To Nearest Building Structure Steel T (L3) For Programmable Controller grounding recommendations, refer to publication 1770-4.1 TE – Zero Volt Potential Bus (Isolated from Panel) 1336 FORCE 1336 PLUS Nearest Building Structure Steel ESC SEL JOG Nearest Building Structure Steel Logic Logic PE TE PE PE Ground Bus (Grounded to Panel) Important: Grounding requirements will vary with the drives being used. Drives with True Earth (TE) terminals must have a zero potential bus, separate from potential earth (PE) ground bus. Note that buses can be tied together at one point in the control cabinet or brought back separately to the building ground grid (tied within 3 meters (10 feet)). 2–14 Installation/Wiring Power Cabling Input and output power connections are performed through terminal block, TB1 (see Figure 2.1 for location). Important: For maintenance and setup procedures, the drive may be operated without a motor connected. Table 2.C TB1 Signals Terminal Description PE Potential Earth Ground TE True Earth Ground R (L1), S (L2), T (L3) AC Line Input Terminals +DC, -DC DC Bus Terminals U (T1), V (T2), W (T3) Motor Connection ATTENTION: The National Codes and standards (NEC, VDE, BSI etc.) and local codes outline provisions for safely ! installing electrical equipment. Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection and disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in personal injury and/or equipment dam- age. Figure 2.1 Terminal Block Locations TB1 Power Terminal Block TB2 Control & Signal Wiring TB3 Control Interface Option TB4 24V DC Auxiliary Input R, S, T TB6 High Voltage DC Auxiliary Input TB9 480 or 600V Auxiliary Output (F Frame Only) TE Control & Signal Shield Terminals TB9 TB3 TB3 TB4 TB2 TB2 TB3 TB6 TB3 TE TE Control Interface TB4 TB1 Location Option TB2 TB1 U, V, W TB1 & Brake Location TE Terminals TB3 Control Interface TB6 TB1 Option TB2 TB2 Location Brake PE TB1 TB1 TB1 Terminals TB1 Ground TB1 1 Frames A1-A4 1 1 1 1 Frames B, C Frames D, E Frame F Frame G 1 Refer to page 1–1 for frame reference classifications and Figure 2.2 for TB1 details. Control Interface Option Installation/Wiring 2–15 Table 2.D TB1 Specifications 1 Drive Frame Max./Min. Wire Size Maximum Torque Size mm2 (AWG) N-m (lb.-in.) A1-A4 (page 2–21) 5.3/0.8 (10/18) 1.81 (16) B1 (page 2–21) 8.4/0.8 (8/18) 1.81 (16) B2 (page 2–21) 13.3/0.5 (6/20) 1.70 (15) C (page 2–21) 26.7/0.8 (3/18) 5.65 (50) 3, 4 D (page 2–22) 120.0/2.1 (4/0 /14) 6.00 (52) 2 67.4/2.1 (00/14) 6.00 (52) 3, 5 E (page 2–22) 253.0/2.1 (500 MCM/14) 10.00 (87) 3 F (page 2–23) 303.6/2.1 (600 MCM/14) 23.00 (200) 3 G (page 2–23) 303.6/2.1 (600 MCM/14) 23.00 (200) 1 Wire sizes given are maximum/minimum sizes that TB1 will accept - these are not recommendations.Use Copper wire only. Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 degree C. Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire. 2 Applies to 30 kW (40 HP) 200-240V, 45 & 56 kW (60 & 75 HP) 380-480V, 56 kW (75 HP) 500-600V drives only. 3 These configurations of TB1 are stud type terminations and require the use of lug type connectors to terminate field installed conductors. Lug kits are available for use with these configurations. Wire size used is determined by selecting the proper lug based on the drive catalog number. Refer to Table 2.E. 4 One TE terminal is present – Max./Min. Wire Size is the same as other terminals. 5 Two TE terminals are present – Max./Min. Wire Size is the same as the D Frame terminal block. Lug Kits D, E, F and G Frame drives have stud type terminals and/or bus bars/ bolts that require standard “crimp type” connectors for cable termina-  tion. Connectors such as T & B Color-Keyed connectors (or equiva- lent) are recommended. The following table shows the lug selection for one possible cable choice. Connectors for each installation should be chosen based on desired cable sizes, the application requirements and all applicable national, state and local codes. See the minimum/ maximum values for wire size per Table 2.D 2–16 Installation/Wiring Table 2.E Lug Selection 2 AC Input R, S, T/Output U, V, W and PE DC+/DC– TE 3 3 3 Cable (per Phase) Cable (per Phase) Cable (per Phase) Drive Catalog T&B Part No. T&B Part No. T&B Part No. 2 2 2 Number Qty. mm (AWG) Qty. Number Qty. mm (AWG) Qty. Number Qty. mm (AWG) Qty. Number 1 1 1 1336F-A040 (1) 53.5 (1/0) (8) 54153 (1) 13.3 (6) (2) 54135 (1) 13.3 (6) (1) 54135 1 1 1 1336F-A050 (1) 85.0 (3/0) (8) 54163 (1) 13.3 (6) (2) 54135 (1) 13.3 (6) (1) 54135 1 1 1 1336F-A060 (1) 107.2 (4/0) (8) 54168 (1) 13.3 (6) (2) 54135 (1) 21.2 (4) (1) 54139 1 1336F-A075 (2) 53.5 (1/0) (8) 54109T (1) 33.6 (2) (2) 54109 (1) 21.2 (4) (1) 54139 (8) 54109B 1 1336F-A100 (2) 85.0 (3/0) (8) 54111T (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 (1) 33.6 (2) (1) 54142 (8) 54111B 1 1336F-A125 (2) 107.2 (4/0) (8) 54112T (1) 67.4 (2/0) (2) 54110 (1) 33.6 (2) (1) 54142 (8) 54112B 1 1 1 1336F-B060 (1) 42.4 (1) (8) 54147 (1) 8.4 (8) (2) 54131 (1) 13.3 (6) (1) 54135 1 1 1 1336F-B075 (1) 53.5 (1/0) (8) 54153 (1) 13.3 (6) (2) 54135 (1) 13.3 (6) (1) 54135 1 1 1 1336F-B100 (1) 85.0 (3/0) (8) 54163 (1) 13.3 (6) (2) 54135 (1) 13.3 (6) (1) 54135 1 1 1 1336F-B125 (1) 107.2 (4/0) (8) 54168 (1) 26.7 (3) (2) 54147 (1) 21.2 (4) (1) 54139 1 1 1 1336F-BX150 (1) 107.2 (4/0) (8) 54168 (1) 26.7 (3) (2) 54147 (1) 21.2 (4) (1) 54139 1 1336F-B150 (2) 53.5 (1/0) (8) 54109T (1) 33.6 (2) (2) 54110 (1) 21.2 (4) (1) 54139 (8) 54109B 1 1336F-B200 (2) 85.0 (3/0) (8) 54111T (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 (1) 26.7 (3) (1) 54142 (8) 54111B 1 1336F-B250 (2) 107.2 (4/0) (8) 54112T (1) 67.4 (2/0) (2) 54110 (1) 33.6 (2) (1) 54142 (8) 54112B 1336F-BX250 (3) 53.5 (1/0) (24) 54109 (1) 67.4 (2/0) (2) 54110 NA NA 1336F-BP/BPR250 (3) 53.5 (1/0) (24) 54109 (1) 67.4 (2/0) (2) 54110 NA NA 1336F-B300 (3) 67.4 (2/0) (24) 54110 (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 NA NA 1336F-BP/BPR300 (3) 67.4 (2/0) (24) 54110 (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 NA NA 1336F-B350 (3) 85.0 (3/0) (24) 54111 (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 NA NA 1336F-BP/BPR350 (3) 85.0 (3/0) (24) 54111 (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 NA NA 1336F-B400 (3) 107.2 (4/0) (24) 54112 (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 NA NA 1336F-BP/BPR400 (3) 107.2 (4/0) (24) 54112 (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 NA NA 1336F-B450 (3) 127.0 (250 MCM) (24) 54174 (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 NA NA 1336F-BP/BPR450 (3) 127.0 (250 MCM) (24) 54174 (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 NA NA 1336F-B500 (3) 152.0 (300 MCM) (24) 54179 (1) 53.5 (1/0) (2) 54109 NA NA 1336F-B600 (3) 152.0 (300 MCM) (24) 54179 (1) 53.5 (1/0) (2) 54109 NA NA 1 1 1 1336F-C075 (1) 33.6 (2) (8) 54142 (1) 13.3 (6) (2) 54135 (1) 8.4 (8) (1) 54131 1 1 1 1336F-C100 (1) 53.5 (1/0) (8) 54153 (1) 13.3 (6) (2) 54135 (1) 13.3 (6) (1) 54135 1 1 1 1336F-C125 (1) 67.4 (2/0) (8) 54158 (1) 26.7 (3) (2) 54147 (1) 13.3 (6) (1) 54135 1 1336F-C150 (1) 107.2 (4/0) (8) 54111 (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 (1) 13.3 (6) (1) 54135 1 1336F-C200 (2) 67.4 (2/0) (8) 54110T (1) 42.4 (1) (2) 54148 (1) 26.7 (3) (1) 54142 (8) 54110B 1 1336F-C250 (2) 85.0 (3/0) (8) 54111T (1) 67.4 (2/0) (2) 54110 (1) 26.7 (3) (1) 54142 (8) 54111B 1336F-CX300 (3) 85.0 (3/0) (16) 54111 NA NA 1336F-C300 (3) 85.0 (3/0) (16) 54111 NA NA 1336F-C350 (3) 53.5 (1/0) (24) 54109 NA NA 1336F-C400 (3) 67.4 (2/0) (24) 54110 Consult Factory NA NA 1336F-C450 (3) 85.0 (3/0) (24) 54111 NA NA 1336F-C500 (3) 107.2 (4/0) (24) 54112 NA NA 1336F-C600 (3) 127.0 (250 MCM) (24) 54174 NA NA 1 5/16” Stud. All other studs are 3/8”. 2 Lugs shown for DC+/– are based on dynamic brake sizing of 50% of (motor rating X 1.25). Select proper lugs based on required braking torque. Refer to 1336-5.64 or 1336-5.65 for additional information. 3  T & B COLOR-KEYED Connectors require T & B WT117 or TBM-6 Crimper tool or equivalent. Lugs should be crimped according to manufacturer’s tool instructions. If required, Rockwell Automation can supply lug kits for lugs shown above. Kits do not include crimping tools. Consult factory for kit information. Installation/Wiring 2–17 Motor Cables A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For many installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of 0.3 meters (1 ft.) for every 10 meters (32.8 ft.) of length. In all cases, long parallel runs must be avoided. Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils (0.4 mm/0.015 in.). The cable should be 4-conductor with the ground lead being con- nected directly to the drive ground terminal (PE) and the motor frame ground terminal. See table below. Unshielded THHN, THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and/or conduit fill rates limits are provided. Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas. Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity. Shielded/Armored Cable Shielded cable is recommended if sensitive circuits or devices are connected or mounted to the machinery driven by the motor (see table). Recommended Shielded Wire Location Rating/Type Description Standard 600V, 90°C (194°F)  Four tinned copper conductors with XLP insulation. (Option 1) XHHW2/RHW-2  Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and Anixter B209500- tinned copper drain wire. B209507, Belden 29501-  PVC jacket. 29507, or equivalent Standard Tray rated 600V, 90° C  Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation. (Option 2) (194° F) RHH/RHW-2  5 mil single helical copper tape (25% overlap min.) Anixter OLF-7xxxxx or with three bare copper grounds in contact with shield. equivalent  PVC jacket. Class I & II; Tray rated 600V, 90° C  Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation Division I & II (194° F) RHH/RHW-2 and impervious corrugated continuously welded alu- Anixter 7V-7xxxx-3G or minum armor. equivalent  Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall.  Three copper grounds on #10 AWG and smaller. Conduit If metal conduit is preferred for cable distribution, the following guidelines must be followed.  Drives are normally mounted in cabinets and ground connections are made at a common ground point in the cabinet. Normal installa- tion of conduit provides grounded connections to both the motor frame ground (junction box) and drive cabinet ground. These ground connections help minimize interference. This is a noise reduction recommendation only, and does not affect the require- ments for safety grounding (refer to pages 2–11 and 2–12). 2–18 Installation/Wiring  No more than three sets of motor leads can be routed through a sin- gle conduit. This will minimize “cross talk” that could reduce the effectiveness of the noise reduction methods described. If more than three drive/motor connections per conduit are required, shielded cable as described above must be used. If practical, each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads. ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages, unused wires in the conduit must be ! grounded at both ends. For the same reason, if a drive shar- ing a conduit is being serviced or installed, all drives using this conduit should be disabled. This will eliminate the pos- sible shock hazard from “cross coupled” drive motor leads. Motor Lead Lengths Installations with long cables to the motor may require the addition of output reactors or cable terminators to limit voltage reflections at the motor. Excessive cable charging current can also reduce the amount of current available to produce rated motor torque. Refer to Tables 2.F and 2.G for the maximum cable length allowed for various installa- tion techniques. Shaded distances are restricted by cable capacitance charging current. The figure below demonstrates how total cable length is calculated. Failure to follow these guidelines can result in poor motor performance and nuisance drive overcurrent or overload tripping. For installations that exceed the recommended maximum lengths listed, contact the factory. Please note that the cable lengths shown are guidelines. Your applica- tion may be restricted to a shorter cable length due to wire type, wire placement, line reactor and type of motor. How to Measure Motor Cable Lengths Limited by Capacitance ESC SEL ESC SEL ESC SEL ESC SEL JOG JOG JOG JOG 15.2 (50) 91.4 (300) 152.4 (500) 167.6 (550) 182.9 (600) 91.4 (300) 15.2 (50) 15.2 (50) All examples represent motor cable length of 189.2 meters (600 feet). Installation/Wiring 2–19 Table 2.F 1 Maximum Motor Cable Length Restrictions in meters (feet) - 380V-480V Drives 2 No External Devices w/1204-TFB2 Term. w/1204-TFA1 Terminator Reactor at Drive Motor Motor Motor Motor 1600V or A B 1329 1329R/L (1850V) A or B 1329 A B 1329 A B or 1329 Cable Type Cable Type Cable Type Drive Drive kW Motor kW Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any 6 3 3 3 Frame (HP) (HP) Cable Cable Cable Cable Shld. Unshld. Cable Shld. Unshld. Shld. Unshld. Cable Cable Cable A1 0.37 (0.5) 0.37 (0.5) 12.2 33.5 91.4 91.4 30.5 61.0 30.5 61.0 91.4 22.9 182.9 (40) (110) (300) (300) (100) (200) (100) (200) (300) (75) (600) 0.75 (1) 0.75 (1) 12.2 33.5 91.4 91.4 30.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 91.4 22.9 182.9 (40) (110) (300) (300) (100) (100) (100) (100) (300) (75) (600) 0.37 (0.5) 12.2 33.5 91.4 91.4 Use 1204-TFA1 30.5 61.0 30.5 61.0 91.4 22.9 182.9 (40) (110) (300) (300) (100) (200) (100) (200) (300) (75) (600) 1.2 (1.5) 1.2 (1.5) 12.2 33.5 91.4 91.4 30.5 30.5 61.0 61.0 91.4 22.9 182.9 (40) (110) (300) (300) (100) (100) (200) (200) (300) (75) (600) 0.75 (1) 12.2 33.5 91.4 91.4 30.5 30.5 61.0 61.0 91.4 22.9 182.9 (40) (110) (300) (300) (100) (100) (200) (200) (300) (75) (600) 0.37 (0.5) 12.2 33.5 114.3 121.9 30.5 30.5 61.0 61.0 121.9 22.9 182.9 (40) (110) (375) (400) (100) (100) (200) (200) (400) (75) (600) A2 1.5 (2) 1.5 (2) 7.6 12.2 91.4 91.4 91.4 91.4 91.4 30.5 30.5 91.4 61.0 91.4 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (300) (300) (300) (300) (300) (100) (100) (300) (200) (300) (75) (600) 1.2 (1.5) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 91.4 182.9 182.9 30.5 30.5 91.4 61.0 182.9 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (375) (600) (300) (600) (600) (100) (100) (300) (200) (600) (75) (600) 0.75 (1) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 30.5 30.5 91.4 61.0 182.9 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (600) (100) (100) (300) (200) (600) (75) (600) 0.37 (0.5) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 30.5 30.5 91.4 61.0 182.9 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (600) (100) (100) (300) (200) (600) (75) (600) 2.2 (3) 2.2 (3) 7.6 12.2 91.4 91.4 182.9 182.9 182.9 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (300) (300) (600) (600) (600) (75) (600) 1.5 (2) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (600) (75) (600) 0.75 (1) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (600) (75) (600) 0.37 (0.5) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (600) (75) (600) A3 3.7 (5) 3.7 (5) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (600) (75) (600) 2.2 (3) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 22.9 182.9 Contact factory for (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (75) (600) advice on cable 1.5 (2) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 22.9 182.9 lengths over 182.9 (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (75) (600) (600). 0.75 (1) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (75) (600) Use 1204-TFB2 0.37 (0.5) 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 22.9 182.9 (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (75) (600) A4 5.5-15 5.5-15 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 24.4 182.9 (7.5-20) (7.5-20) (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (80) (600) B 11-22 11-22 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 24.4 182.9 (15-30) (15-30) (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (80) (600) C 30-45 30-45 7.6 12.2 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 76.2 182.9 (X40-X60) (40-60) (25) (40) (375) (600) (600) (600) (250) (600) D 45-112 45-112 12.2 30.5 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 61.0 182.9 (60-X150) (60-150) (40) (100) (375) (600) (600) (600) (200) (600) E 112-187 112-187 12.2 53.3 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 (150-250) (150-250) (40) (175) (375) (600) (600) (600) (600) (600) F 187-336 187-336 18.3 53.3 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 (250-450) (250-450) (60) (175) (375) (600) (600) (600) (600) (600) G 187-448 187-448 18.3 53.3 114.3 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 (X250-600) (250-600) (60) (175) (375) (600) (600) (600) (600) (600) Type A Motor Characteristics: No phase paper or misplaced phase paper, lower quality insulation systems, corona inception voltages between 850 and 1000 volts. Type B Motor Characteristics: Properly placed phase paper, medium quality insulation systems, corona inception voltages between 1000 and 1200 volts. 1329R/L Motors: These AC variable speed motors are “Control-Matched” for use with Allen-Bradley Drives. Each motor is designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the Federal Energy Act of 1992. All 1329R/L motors are optimized for variable speed operation and include premium inverter grade insulation systems which meet or exceed NEMA MG1. Part 31.40.4.2. 2–20 Installation/Wiring Table 2.G 4 Maximum Motor Cable Length Restrictions in meters (feet) - 500V-600V Drives 2 No External Devices w/1204-TFB2 Terminator w/1204-TFA1 Terminator Reactor at Drive Motor Motor Motor Motor 1600V or 1600V or 1600V or 1329R/L 1329R/L 1329R/L 1329R/L 5 5 5 5 AB MotorsAB (1850V) AB (1850V) AB (1850V) Drive Drive kW Motor kW Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Frame (HP) (HP) Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable A4 0.75 (1) 0.75 (1) NR NR NA NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (1100) (200) (600) 0.37 (0.5) NR NR NA NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (1100) (200) (600) 1.5 (2) 1.5 (2) NR NR NA NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (1100) (200) (600) 1.2 (1.5) NR NR NA NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (1100) (200) (600) 0.75 (1) NR NR 182.9 NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (600) (1100) (200) (600) 0.37 (0.5) NR NR 182.9 NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (600) (1100) (200) (600) 2.2 (3) 2.2 (3) NR NR NA NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (1100) (200) (600) 1.5 (2) NR NR NA NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 Not (600) (1100) (200) (600) Recommended 0.75 (1) NR NR 182.9 NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (600) (1100) (200) (600) 0.37 (0.5) NR NR 182.9 NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (600) (1100) (200) (600) 3.7 (5) 3.7 (5) NR NR NA NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (1100) (200) (600) 2.2 (3) NR NR NA NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (1100) (200) (600) 1.5 (2) NR NR 182.9 NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (600) (1100) (200) (600) 0.75 (1) NR NR 182.9 NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (600) (1100) (200) (600) 0.37 (0.5) NR NR 182.9 NR 182.9 335.3 NR 61.0 182.9 (600) (600) (1100) (200) (600) 5.5-15 5.5-15 NR 9.1 182.9 91.4 182.9 182.9 NR 61.0 182.9 30.5 91.4 182.9 (7.5-20) (7.5-20) (30) (600) (300) (600) (600) (200) (600) (100) (300) (600) C 18.5-45 18.5-45 NR 9.1 182.9 91.4 182.9 182.9 NR 61.0 182.9 30.5 91.4 182.9 (25-60) (25-60) (30) (600) (300) (600) (600) (200) (600) (100) (300) (600) D 56-93 56-93 NR 9.1 182.9 91.4 182.9 182.9 NR 61.0 182.9 61.0 91.4 182.9 (75-125) (75-125) (30) (600) (300) (600) (600) (200) (600) (200) (300) (600) E 112-224 112-224 NR 9.1 182.9 91.4 182.9 182.9 NR 61.0 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 (150-X300) (150-X300) (30) (600) (300) (600) (600) (200) (600) (600) (600) (600) F 261-298 261-298 NR 9.1 182.9 91.4 182.9 182.9 NR 61.0 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 (350-400) (350-400) (30) (600) (300) (600) (600) (200) (600) (600) (600) (600) G 224-448 224-448 NR 9.1 182.9 91.4 182.9 182.9 NR 61.0 182.9 182.9 182.9 182.9 (300-600) (300-600) (30) (600) (300) (600) (600) (200) (600) (600) (600) (600) NR = Not Recommended NA = Not Available at time of printing 1 Values shown are for 480V nominal input voltage, drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz and ambient temperature at the motor of 40 degrees C. Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz. Multiply values by 0.85 for high line conditions. For input voltages of 380, 400 or 415V AC, multiply the table values by 1.25, 1.20 or 1.15, respectively. 2 A 3% reactor reduces motor and cable stress but may cause a degradation of motor waveform quality. Reactors must have a turn-turn insulation rating of 2100 volts or higher. 3 Includes wire in conduit. 4 Values shown are for nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz. Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz. Multiply values by 0.85 for high line conditions. 5 When used on 600V systems, 1329R/L motors have a corona inception voltage rating of approximately 1850V. 6 These distance restrictions are due to charging of cable capacitance and may vary from application to application. Installation/Wiring 2–21 Figure 2.2 Terminal Block TB1 A1-A3 Frame A4 Frame 380-480V, 5.5-15 kW (7.5-20 HP) Terminal Designations 200-240V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) Terminal Designations 380-480V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) Terminal Designations 500-600V, 0.75-15 kW (1-20 HP) Terminal Designations 2 GRD GRD R S T DC DC U V W GRD GRD R S T DC DC BRK U V W (L1) (L2) (L3) + – – (T1) (T2) (T3) (L1) (L2) (L3) + – (T1) (T2) (T3) COM Dynamic Brake Option To Motor To Motor To Motor To Motor DC Input Line 1 1 1 1 Required Branch Required Branch Required Required Circuit Disconnect Circuit Disconnect Input Fusing Input Fusing AC Input Line AC Input Line Dynamic Brake Important: A brake malfunction will occur if the Dynamic Brake is connected to "DC – COM" B1 Frame B2 Frame 200-240V, 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) Terminal Designations 200-240V, 7.5-11 kW (10-15 HP) Terminal Designations 380-480V, 11 kW (15 HP) Terminal Designations 380-480V, 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) Terminal Designations PE PE DC DC R S T U V W (L1) (L2) (L3) + – (T1) (T2) (T3) Dynamic Brake R S T PE PE DC DC U V W To Motor To Motor + – (L1) (L2) (L3) (T1) (T2) (T3) 1 Dynamic Brake 1 Required Required Branch Input Fusing Circuit Disconnect 1 Required To Motor Input Fusing AC Input Line To Motor 1 Required Branch Circuit Disconnect 200-240V, 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) Terminal Designations AC Input Line 380-480V, 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) Terminal Designations 500-600V, 18.5-45 kW (25-60 HP) Terminal Designations C Frame PE PE DC DC R S T U V W GRD GRD + – (L1) (L2) (L3) (T1) (T2) (T3) Dynamic Brake 1 Required Input Fusing To Motor 1 Required Branch To Motor 1 User supplied. Circuit Disconnect 2 Terminal located separately on Series A Drives. AC Input Line 2–22 Installation/Wiring 200-240V, 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) Terminal Designations 380-480V, 45-112 kW (60-150 HP) Terminal Designations 500-600V, 56-93 kW (75-125 HP) Terminal Designations D Frame DC – DC + PE PE TE Brake Brake To Motor U R S T V W (L2) (L3) (T1) (T3) (L1) (T2) To Motor 1 Required Input Fusing 1 Required Branch Circuit Disconnect See Appendix B for detailed Dimensions. AC Input Line 200-240V, 56-93 kW (75-125 HP) Terminal Designations 380-480V, 112-187 kW (150-250 HP) Terminal Designations 500-600V, 112-224 kW (150-300 HP) Terminal Designations E Frame TE +DC –DC PE PE R-L1 S-L2 T-L3 U-M1 V-M2 W-M3 BUS INPUT OUTPUT To Motor To Motor 1 1 Required Required Branch See Appendix B for detailed Dimensions. Input Fusing Circuit Disconnect AC Input Line 1 User supplied. U V W Installation/Wiring 2–23 TB1 F-G 380-480V, 187-336 kW (250-450 HP) Terminal Designations 500-600V, 261-336 kW (350-450 HP) Terminal Designations R-L1 S-L2 T-L3 PE U-M1 V-M2 W-M3 F Frame Input Fusing (Supplied) To Motor 1 Required Branch Circuit Disconnect AC Input Line 1336F-BPR and CPR Drives are supplied with a separately mounted, pre-wired DC Bus Inductor (see Appendix B). If the cable length between the choke and drive is not sufficient, longer cables (same size & type) can be used. Cable routing must also be considered when mounting the choke. typical terminal DC – DC + Brake Brake 380-480V, 187-448 kW (250-600 HP) Terminal Designations 500-600V, 224-448 kW (300-600 HP) Terminal Designations Brake terminals are located on the DC Bus Inductor behind the "U" terminal (access from the right side of the chassis) G Frame T S R (L2) (L3) (L1) 1 Required to +DC Terminal Input Fusing on Brake U V W 1 Required Branch (M1) (M2) (M3) Circuit Disconnect to –DC Terminal on Brake AC Input Line 1 User supplied. To Motor typical terminal layout (located at top of drive) (located at bottom of drive) T S R 2–24 Installation/Wiring Control and Signal Wiring General Wiring Information General requirements for analog signal wire include: stranded copper 2 0.750-0.283 mm (18-22 AWG), twisted-pair, 100% shield with drain wire, 300V minimum insulation rating and a temperature rating suitable for the application (not less than 60 degrees C.) The recom- mended signal (analog I/O) wire is: 2  Belden 8760/9460(or equiv.) – 0.750 mm (18AWG), twisted pair, shielded. 2  Belden8770(or equiv.) – 0.750 mm (18AWG), 3 conductor, shielded for remote pot only. The recommended wire for encoder or pulse inputs/outputs is:  Lengths less than or equal to 30 meters (98 feet) 2 Belden 9730(or equiv.) – 0.196 mm (24AWG), individually shielded.  Lengths greater than 30 meters (98 feet) 2 Belden 9773(or equiv.) – 0.750 mm (18AWG), twisted pair, shielded. Signal Connections If the drive control connections are to be linked to an electronic circuit or device, the common or 0V line should, if possible, be grounded at the device (source) end only. Important: Signal Common - User speed reference signals are terminated to logic common at TB2, terminal 5. This puts the negative (or common) side of these signals at earth ground potential. Control schemes must be examined for possible conflicts with this type of grounding scheme. Shield Termination - TE (True Earth) The TE terminal block (not available on A Frame drives) provides a terminating point for signal wiring shields. A Frame drives can use TB2, terminal 5 for signal wiring shield termination. Refer to Figure 2.1 for location. The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by this block is 2.1 2 and 0.30 mm (14 and 22 AWG). Maximum torque is 1.36 N-m (12 lb.-in.). Use Copper wire Only and always separate control and power cabling. Cable Routing If unshielded cable is used, signal circuits should not run parallel to motor cables or unfiltered supply cables with a spacing less than 0.3 meters (1 foot). Cable tray metal dividers or separate conduit should be used. Important: When user installed control and signal wiring with an insulation rating of less than 600V is used, this wiring must be routed inside the drive enclosure and separated from any other wiring and/or uninsulated live parts. Installation/Wiring 2–25 Terminal Block TB2 TB2 is located at the bottom of the Main Control Board. A Frame drives have 18 positions. Remaining frame sizes have 22 positions. The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB2 is 2.1 and 2 0.30 mm (14 and 22 AWG). Maximum torque for all terminals is 1.36 N-m (12 lb.-in.). Use Copper wire only. See Figure 2.1. Terminal Block TB3 The Control Interface Option provides a means of interfacing various signals and commands to the 1336 PLUS II by using contact closures. Several different versions of the option are available: 1  L4 Contact Closure Interface . 1  L4E Contact Closure Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs. 1  L7E Contact Closure Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs for use with encoder loss detection.  L5 +24VAC/DC Interface.  L5E +24VAC/DC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs.  L8E +24VAC/DC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs for use with encoder loss detection.  L6 115VAC Interface.  L6E 115VAC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs.  L9E 115VAC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs for use with encoder loss detection. 1 Uses internal +5V DC supply. The user inputs are connected to the option board through TB3 (see Figure 2.1 for location). The L4, L5 and L6 options each have nine control inputs. The function of each input must be selected through programming as explained later in this section. The L4E through L9E options are similar to L4, L5 and L6 with the addition of encoder feedback inputs. In addition, the L7E, L8E and L9E options allow encoder loss detection. Refer to Appendix A for further information. The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB3 is 2.1 and 2 0.30 mm (14 and 22 AWG). Recommended torque for all terminals is 0.90-1.13 N-m (8-10 lb.-in.). Use Copper wire only. Digital Inputs Digital inputs are connected at TB3. Input Mode Select A number of combinations are available by first programming [Input Mode] to the desired control scheme (i.e. 2 wire, 3 wire or Status). The remaining inputs can then be configured by program- ming [TB3 Term 22 Sel] through [TB3 Term 28 Sel]. Refer to the Digital I/O parameter group in Chapter 6 for programming information. 2–26 Installation/Wiring Figure 2.3 Digital I/O Default Settings – TB3 Input Mode (Start/Stop Functions Only) 2 Status 2-Wire Control 3-Wire Control (Factory Default) Single-Source Control Single-Source Reversing 19 Status Run Forward Start Input 1 3 3 3 Stop/Fault Reset Stop/Fault Reset Stop/Fault Reset Input 2 20 Factory Default Inputs Common 21 Common Status Only 4 Input 3 22 Rev/For (Programmable) Default Mode Input 4 23 shown at right Jog (Programmable) is not active 3 Input 5 24 when Auxiliary (Programmable) [Input Mode] is set to "Status" Common 25 Common 1 Input 6 26 Speed Select 3 (Programmable) 1 Speed Select 2 (Programmable) Input 7 27 1 Input 8 28 Speed Select 1 (Programmable) Common 29 Common 3 3 Input 9 30 Enable Enable (Not Programmable) 1 See Speed Select Table. Encoder B 31 2 If this mode is selected, the status of all inputs can be read at the [Input Status] parameter. However, Encoder NOT A 32 only “Stop/Fault Reset” and “Enable” will have control function. Included on Encoder NOT B 33 3 These inputs must be present (reprogram if L4E through L9E necessary) before drive will start. Only Encoder A 34 4 Bit 0 of [Direction Mask] must = 1 to allow TB3 direction change/bipolar operation. +12V (200mA max.) 35 5 Requires "2 Wire" control selection for [Input Mode]. Encoder Common 36 6 [TB3 Term 22] must be programmed to "Run Reverse." 2-Wire Control Example 3-Wire Control Example 19 19 5 Run Forward Start 20 3 20 Stop/Fault Reset Stop 21 21 Common Common 22 22 6 Run Reverse Rev/For (Default) A hazard of personal injury from automatic restart exists with 2-wire control. 2-wire control uses maintained Run contacts that act as both Run (closed) ! and Stop (open) devices. Opening the Stop contact (terminal 20) will stop the drive. If this contact is reclosed, any fault will be reset. If a valid Start command is still present, the drive will restart. Only use 2-wire control for applications outlined in NFPA79, "Under Voltage Protection." If a 3-wire device (i.e. HIM) is also used, pressing the HIM Stop key will also stop the drive. Releasing the Stop key will clear any faults that are present, but the drive will not restart without cycling the Start contact. Installation/Wiring 2–27 Available Functions for Inputs 3 through 8 A variety of combinations made up of the following inputs are available. Input Description st nd 1 and 2 Accel Closing these inputs will command the corresponding accel or decel rate. If both inputs are open or both st nd 1 and 2 Decel are closed, the current rate is maintained. st nd Input 1 2 No Command 0 0 Accel/Decel 1 0 1 Accel/Decel 2 1 0 st nd 1 /2 Accel/Decel Allows selection of the accel or decel time used by the drive. 1=2nd, 0=1st Auxiliary Faults the drive via external devices (i.e. motor thermoswitch, O.L. relays, etc.). Opening this contact will fault (F02 - Aux Fault) the drive and shut the output off, ignoring the programmed stop mode. Clear Fault If drive has faulted, closing this input will clear the fault. Digital Pot (MOP) Up/ These inputs increase (up) or decrease (down) the drive commanded frequency when MOP (Motor Oper- Down ated Potentiometer) is chosen as the frequency command source. The rate of increase/decrease is pro- grammable. Forward Closing these inputs (Forward or Reverse) commands the corresponding direction. If both inputs are open or both are closed, the current direction is maintained. Jog Closing this input starts the drive and causes it to run at programmed jog frequency. Opening this input stops the drive using the programmed stop mode. Local Control Closing this input gives exclusive control of drive logic to the inputs at terminal block TB3. No other devices may issue logic commands (excluding Stop) to the drive. Rev/For Available only with three-wire control - Closing this input commands reverse direction and opening this input commands forward direction. Reverse See “Forward” above. PI Enable Enables the output of the process PI loop. PI Reset Opening this input clamps the process PI integrator value at zero. Closing this input allows the integrator to continue to operate. Run Reverse Available Only with two-wire control - Closing this input issues both a start command and a reverse com- mand to the drive. Opening the input issues a stop command to the drive. Speed Select 1, 2, 3 These inputs choose the frequency command source for the drive. See following pages for details. Stop Type Closing this input selects the stop mode in [Stop Select 2] as the method of stopping when a stop com- mand is issued. Opening this input selects the stop mode in [Stop Select 1] as the method of stopping. Sync Normally wired to multiple drives – When the Sync input is low, the drive operates normally. When the input is high, the speed of the drive will be held constant and the speed command will have no effect. Dur- ing this period the speed input of the drive will normally be changed to a different source and/or value. Allows synchronized change of frequency command to multiple drives. Traverse Setting this input low disables the traverse function. When the input is high, the traverse function will be active. [Speed Control] must also be set to “P Jump” for the function to be active. Important: If a Control Interface Option is not installed, the [Input Mode] parameter must be set to “Status” (default) and jumpers must be installed as shown in Figure 2.7. If the drive was shipped from the factory without the option, these jumpers will have been installed. Important: The [Input Mode] parameter can be changed at any time, but the change will not affect drive operation until power to the drive has been removed and bus voltage has decayed completely. When changing this parameter, it is important to note that the functions of the Start and Stop inputs will change when power is reapplied to the drive. 2–28 Installation/Wiring The programming options of the Control Interface Option allow the user to select an input combination to meet the needs of a specific installation. The firmware will verify programming, to assure an appropriate combination has been selected. Speed Select/Frequency Reference The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources. The source is determined by drive programming and the con- dition of the Speed Select Inputs on TB3 (or reference select bits of command word if PLC controlled - see Appendix A). The default source for a command reference (all speed select inputs open) is the selection programmed in [Freq Select 1]. If any of the speed select inputs are closed, the drive will use other parameters as the speed command source. See Table 2.H and the examples that follow. Table 2.H Speed Select Input State vs. Frequency Source Speed Select 3 Speed Select 2 Speed Select 1 Frequency Source Open Open Open [Freq Select 1] Open Open Closed [Freq Select 2] Accessed through [Freq Select 2] parameter [Preset Freq 1] Open Closed Open [Preset Freq 2] Open Closed Closed [Preset Freq 3] Closed Open Open [Preset Freq 4] Closed Open Closed [Preset Freq 5] Closed Closed Open [Preset Freq 6] Closed Closed Closed [Preset Freq 7] Important: The final speed command may be affected by the type of modulation selected with [Speed Control], parameter 77. See [Speed Control] in Chapter 6 for further information. Important: If a bi-polar input option (LA6 or LA7) is installed, the signal is designated “Analog Input 0.” Note the following: 3 Wire Control – If [Input Mode] is set to “3 Wire” and the bi-polar input is selected as the active frequency ref- erence [Freq Select 1 or 2], it is assumed that direction control is desired via analog polarity. If another source has control of direction, a “Bipolar Direction” fault (F16) will occur. If direction control via polarity is not required, bit 7 of [Direction Mask] should be set to “0.” This causes the input to be treated as a 0-10V frequency reference only. Negative analog signals are treated as zero and di- rection control must come from another source. 2 Wire Control – If [Input Mode] is set to “2 Wire,” it is assumed that direction control is provided via the 2 wire inputs (Run Forward and Run Reverse). Bit 7 of [Direction Mask] must be set to “0.” This causes the input to be treat- ed as a 0-10V frequency reference only. Negative analog signals are treated as zero. Failure to set the Mask will generate a “Bipolar Direction” (F16) fault. Installation/Wiring 2–29 Example 1 3 Wire Control - Application calls for a local Human Interface Module (HIM) speed command or remote 4-20mA from a PLC. The drive is programmed as follows:  [Freq Select 1] = Adapter 1  [Freq Select 2] = Analog Input 0 With Speed Select inputs 2 & 3 open and the selector switch set to “Remote” (Speed Select 1 closed), the drive will follow [Freq Select 2] (Analog Input 0). With the switch set to “Local” (Speed Select 1 open) all speed select inputs are open and the drive will follow the local HIM (Adapter 1) as selected with [Freq Select 1]. 26 Speed Select 3 (Open) 27 Speed Select 2 (Open) Remote 28 Speed Select 1 Local Example 2 Application is to follow a local HIM unless a preset speed is selected. The drive is programmed as follows:  [Freq Select 1] = Adapter 1  [Freq Select 2] = Preset Freq 1  [Preset Freq 1] = 10 Hz.  [Preset Freq 2] = 20 Hz.  [Preset Freq 3] = 30 Hz. Contact operation for the speed select switch is described in the table below. If the user does not select an input as Speed Select 3, [Preset Freq 4-7] would not be available. 1 26 Local 2 3 27 Speed Select 2 See Table 28 Speed Select 1 Speed Select Input Switch Parameter Used for Programmed Position 1 (#28) 2 (#27) Speed Ref. Setting Local Open Open [Freq Select 1] Adapter 1 1 Closed Open [Freq Select 2] Preset Freq 1 2 Open Closed [Preset Freq 2] 20 Hz. 3 Closed Closed [Preset Freq 3] 30 Hz. 2–30 Installation/Wiring Encoder Inputs Encoders must be line driver type, quadrature (dual channel) or pulse (single channel), 5VDC or 8-15VDC output, single-ended or differ- ential and capable of supplying a minimum of 10mA per channel. Maximum input frequency is 250 kHz. Encoder inputs are available at TB3. The interface board is jumper selectable to accept a 5V TTL or 12V DC square-wave with a minimum high state voltage of 3.0V DC (TTL) or 7.0V DC (12 volt encoder). Maximum high state voltage is 18.5V DC (board damage could result if voltage is exceeded). Maximum low state voltage is 0.4V DC. See Encoder & Communications Cabling on page 2–11. Figure 2.4a Encoder Signal Wiring 1 1 Single-Ended, Dual-Channel Differential, Dual Channel 31 32 33 34 35 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 TB3 TB3 to Power Supply Common (Terminal 36 or External) to TE to TE Single-Ended Differential Encoder Output Encoder Output Connections Connections 1 For Single-Channel applications, eliminate the B and B (NOT) connections. Some encoders may label the "A" connection as "Signal." Single-channel provides speed indication Only, Not direction. Important: Correct direction of motor rotation as determined during start-up (see Chapter 5) may require that the A or B channel wiring be reversed. Figure 2.4b Encoder Power Wiring Internal External 31 32 33 34 35 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 TB3 TB3 + External Power Common Supply to TE to TE Encoder Power Encoder Power Connections Connections using using 12V DC Internal External DC (Drive) Power Source Power Source Minimum On Volts = 7V DC Minimum On Volts = 3V DC Minimum Current = 10mA Minimum Current = 10mA Important: Control Interface Board jumpers JP3 & JP4 must be set for the voltage level of the encoder output. B A NOT B NOT A +12V DC (200 mA) Common B A NOT B NOT A Installation/Wiring 2–31 Pulse Input/Output Option Pulse Input ATTENTION: If input voltages are maintained at levels above ±12V DC, signals may be degraded and component ! damage may result. The pulse input signal must be an externally powered square-wave pulse at a 5V TTL logic level. As measured at the terminal block, circuits in the high state must generate a voltage between 3.6 and 5.5V DC at 8 mA. Circuits in the low state must generate a voltage between 0.0 and 0.8V DC. Maximum input frequency is 250kHz. Scale factor [Pulse/Enc Scale] must be set. Pulse Output Provides a TTL pulse train suitable for driving up to three 1336 PLUS II pulse inputs or a separate 125 ohm load at TTL levels (4V at 32 mA source, 0.8V at 3.2 mA sink). Digital Outputs The digital outputs are at terminals 10 through 18 of TB2. Figure 2.5 Digital Outputs – TB2 Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize (pick up) when power is applied to drive and deenergize (drop out) when a fault or alarm exists. Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will deenergize when condition is removed. CR1 CR2 CR3 CR3 CR4 CR4 Only Present on B Frame & Up Drives 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 A1 A2 Terminal Signal TE True Earth - Shield Termination Reserved for 10, 11 CR1 Programmable Contact Future Use 11, 12 CR2 Programmable Contact Resistive Rating = 115V AC/30V DC, 5.0A 13, 14 CR3 Programmable Contact Inductive Rating = 115V AC/30V DC, 2.0A 14, 15 16, 17 CR4 Programmable Contact 17, 18 A1, A2 Reserved for Future Use Important: On A Frame drives, the power supply used for relay contact outputs requires a field installation at the supply source of transient voltage surge suppression with maximum clamping voltage of 2.5 kV. Common 2–32 Installation/Wiring Analog I/O The 1336 PLUS II analog I/O configuration provides a standard set of inputs and outputs with the capability to install up to 2 option boards, thus replacing the standard I/O with a variety of options. All connec- tions are performed at TB2. Installing an option board in the slot A or B location will change the function of those terminals on TB2 from standard. Only one option board can be installed in each slot. Figure 2.6 shows the standard and optional I/O configurations. Figure 2.6 Analog I/O – TB2 Only Present on B Frame Signal & Up Drives Common TE TE 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pot. Single-Ended Single-Ended Signal Single-Ended Single Ended Single Ended Signal Std. Reference Input 0 Input 1 Common Std. Input 2 Output 0 Output 1 Common 1, 3 +5V Pot., 10V or 20mA Pot., 10V or 20mA Pot., 10V or 20mA 0-10V Only 0-10V Only or (select 1) or (select 1) Isolated Isolated Isolated Isolated Single-Ended Single-Ended Single-Ended 0-20mA S 2 Input 0 (+) Input 0 (–) Input 1 (+) Input 1 (–) Input 2 LA2 LA1 Output 0 Output 1 Output i 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA Pot., 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA 20mA Only Return g n Isolated Isolated Thermistor Thermistor Isolated Isolated Isolated Isolated a Input 0 (+) Input 0 (–) Isolated Isolated Output 0 (+) LA6 LA3 Output 0 (–) Output 1 (+) Output 1 (–) l ±10V, ±20mA ±10V, ±20mA Input (+) Input (–) 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA C Isolated Isolated Isolated Isolated Isolated o Isolated Isolated Isolated Input 0 (+) Input 0 (–) Input 1 (+) Input 1 (–) m Input 2 (+) LA7 LA4 Input 2 (–) Output 1 (+) Output 1 (–) m ±10V, ±20mA ±10V, ±20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA 10V or 20mA o 1 If an Option Board is installed in Slot A, the +5V pot. reference will not be n Single-Ended Non-Isolated Isolated Isolated available. If a 5V source is required, it must be user supplied. Output 0 LA5 250 kHz 250 kHz 250 kHz 2 Standard Analog Input 2 is maintained at this terminal – configure with J11. 10V or 20mA Pulse Output Pulse In (+) Pulse In (–) 3 10k Ohm potentiometer required. Analog I/O Option Slot A Analog I/O Option Slot B Analog 0-10V, 4-20 mA and Pulse I/O Examples Standard I/O Optional I/O Standard Analog Pulse with Standard Analog Input 2 Standard Analog Output 0 Isolated Pulse Train Input Pulse Train Output from LA5 LA5 Option (Non-Isolated) (0-10V Non-Isolated) to LA5 Option Board Option Board (Non-Isolated) Refer to page 2–36 56 7 8 9 8 56 7 9 for Analog I/O specifications –– ++ +– 0-10V Pulse Jumper J11 Set to "0-10V" Source Analog I/O Isolated Input to Isolated Output from with LA2/LA3 LA2 Option Board LA3 Option Board Options 1 8 2 9 +– +– ANALOG I/O ANALOG I/O SLOT B SLOT A 7 53 1 7 53 1 J9 86 J10 8 64 2 ANALOG I/O ANALOG I/O SLOT A 7 5 3 1 SLOT B 7 5 31 J9 86 4 2 J10 8 64 2 Pot Pot Pot ESC SEL JOG Installation/Wiring 2–33 Remote Potentiometer Examples to Standard I/O with Optional I/O 10k Ohm Remote 10k Ohm Remote 1 2 Input 0 Shown - See Table below for other Inputs 1 23 4 5 6 1 23 4 5 6 Potentiometer to Potentiometer Standard Analog when LA2, LA6 or Input LA7 Option Board Common User 5V Ref. Common is Installed Signal Supplied Refer to page 2–36 Common 5V for Analog I/O Signal Jumper J11 must be set to "Pot." specifications Common 1 If an Option Board is installed in Slot A, the +5V pot. reference will not be available at terminal 1. If a 5V source is required, it TB2 Jumper . . . must be user supplied. Terminal Input (Set to "Pot") 2 Input to Terminal 6 is only valid for standard I/O or with an LA1 2 0 J8 option installed. If an LA1 option is installed, Standard Analog 3 1 J13 Input 2 is maintained at this terminal – configure with J11. A pot 6 2 J11 cannot be connected to an isolated input. See table below for further jumper info. Standard Analog I/O Setup The 1336 PLUS II has a series of jumpers to connect the standard I/O to TB2 when no analog options (LA1, LA2, etc.) are present. Connec- tors J9 and J10 (see below) each have four jumpers connecting pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6 and 7-8. These jumpers must be in place for the inputs and outputs to be active at TB2. Connector J9 Connector J10 TB2-4 Common TB2-9 Common TB2-3 Input 1 TB2-8 Output 1 TB2-7 Output 0 TB2-2 Input 0 TB2-1 Pot Ref. (5V) TB2-6 Input 2 Analog Option Board Text Does Not Appear on Board Text Does Not Appear on Board (Slot A) (for explanation purposes only) (for explanation purposes only) Remaining Pins Remaining Pins Not Shown Not Shown Analog Option Board J8, J11, J13 (Slot A) J9, J10 Slot B J8, J11, J13 J9, J10 Slot B 1 1 Frames A1 - A4 Frames B - G 1 Refer to page 1–1 for frame reference classifications. In addition, each input can be configured 0-10V for 0-10V, 0-20 mA or potentiometer. J13 (TB2-3, Input 1) (Pot Configuration Shown) Placing a jumper across the top of the con- 0-20 mA nector (J8, J11, J13) configures that input 0-10V for 0-10V operation. The bottom provides J8 (TB2-2, Input 0) (0-10V Configuration Shown) 0-20 mA and the right-side provides 0-20 mA potentiometer operation. Please note that 0-10V all three are factory set at 0-10V. J11 (TB2-6, Input 2) (0-20 mA Configuration Shown) Important: Inputs 0, 1 & 2 are not located 0-20 mA in logical order on the board. 2–34 Installation/Wiring Optional Analog I/O If your drive was received with Analog Options (LA1, LA2, etc.) factory installed, the boards must be setup before use. Proceed to Configurations “Option Board Setup” below. Option Board Installation/Removal If the drive is not factory configured with Analog Options, the desired option boards can be user installed. Prior to installation, the jumpers at J9 and/or J10 must be removed. If a board is removed at a later time, the jumpers must be reinstalled. Refer to the detailed instruc- tions supplied with the option boards. Important: Drive power must be removed prior to jumper installation/ removal. Option Board Setup Before operation, each installed option board must configured. The board will have one or two DIP switches depending on the option selected. The first function (input or output) is configured with the S1 DIP switch – the second function (if present) is configured with S51. Using the table below, set the switch(es) for correct operation. Important: Due to different switch manufacturers, the individual switches will be designated “A or 1” and “B or 2.” In addition, switch positions will be indicated as “Off or 0” and “On or 1.” S1 and S51 Configuration Settings Switches S1 and S51 Off / 0 = On / 1 = DIP Switch S1 DIP Switch S51 Switch Setting Switch Setting Option Function Mode A/1 B/2 Function Mode A/1 B/2 LA1 Output 0 10V Off/“0” Off/“0” Configure Standard Analog Input 2 with J11. See page 2–33 for further information. 20mA On/“1” On/“1” LA2 Input 0 10V Off/“0” On/“1” Input 1 10V Off/“0” On/“1” 20mA On/“1” Off/“0” 20mA On/“1” Off/“0” LA3 Output 0 10V Off/“0” Off/“0” Output 1 10V Off/“0” Off/“0” 20mA On/“1” On/“1” 20mA On/“1” On/“1” LA4 Input 2 10V Off/“0” On/“1” Output 1 10V Off/“0” Off/“0” 20mA On/“1” Off/“0” 20mA On/“1” On/“1” LA5 Output 0 10V Off/“0” Off/“0” 20mA On/“1” On/“1” LA6 Input 0 10V Off/“0” On/“1” 20mA On/“1” Off/“0” LA7 Input 0 10V Off/“0” On/“1” Input 1 10V Off/“0” On/“1” 20mA On/“1” Off/“0” 20mA On/“1” Off/“0” 2 1 Installation/Wiring 2–35 All isolated I/O is designed with full galvanic (greater than 10 meg ohms, less than 50 pf) isolation. This results in an insulation with- stand capability of 200VAC from each channel to True Earth (TE) ground and between channels. The Analog I/O Option Boards are summarized below. Option Board Type Slot Description LA1 Dual Analog Output B This option replaces both standard analog outputs with two single-ended high resolution analog outputs. Analog Output 0 is configurable to 0-10V or 0-20 mA operation while Analog Output 1 is for 0-20 mA oper- ation only. This option maintains access to the stan- dard (non-isolated) Analog Input 2 through TB2-6 – Configuration remains with jumper J11. LA2 Dual Isolated Input A This option replaces the two standard analog inputs with two galvanically isolated analog inputs. Both analog input channels are configurable for 0-10V or 0-20 mA operation. LA3 Dual Isolated Output B Replaces Analog Input 2 and both standard analog outputs with two galvanically isolated high resolution analog outputs. Both analog output channels are configurable for 0-10V or 0-20 mA operation. LA4 Isolated Input/ B This option replaces Analog Input 2 and both stan- Isolated Output dard analog outputs with a galvanically isolated ana- log input and a galvanically isolated high resolution analog output. Both analog channels are config- urable for 0-10V or 0-20 mA operation. LA5 Analog Output/Pulse B This option replaces Analog Input 2 and both stan- Output/Pulse Input dard analog outputs with a single-ended high resolu- tion analog output, a single-ended 5V pulse output, and galvanically isolated 5V pulse input. The analog output channel is configurable for 0-10V or 0-20 mA operation. 1 LA6 Isolated Bipolar/ A This option replaces the two standard analog inputs Isolated Thermistor with a galvanically isolated analog input and a gal- Input vanically isolated thermistor input. Analog Input 0 is configurable for ±10V or ±20 mA operation, with polarity determining forward or reverse operation Analog Input 1 is suitable for use with PTC sensor chains with a maximum total resistance at normal operating temperature of 1.8k ohms. An indication occurs in short circuit or over-temperature conditions. A short circuit condition is when the total resistance of the sensor chain is less than 60 ohms with reset from the short circuit condition occurring when the resistance exceeds 70 ohms. An over-temperature condition is when the total resistance of the sensor chain exceeds 3.3k ohms with reset from the over- temperature condition occurring when the resistance is less than 2.2k ohms. 1 LA7 Isolated Bipolar A This option replaces the two standard analog inputs Input/Isolated Input with two galvanically isolated analog inputs. Analog Input 0 is configurable for ±10V or ±20mA operation, with polarity determining forward or reverse opera- tion, while Analog Input 1 is configurable for 0-10V or 0-20 mA operation. 1 Refer to the Important statement on page 2–28 concerning "bi-polar input option." 2–36 Installation/Wiring Specifications for the various inputs and outputs are provided below. I/O Type Configuration Specification Ref. 1 Standard 0-10V Input 100k ohm input impedance. TB2-4 1 0-10V Output Can drive a 10k ohm load (60 mA short circuit TB2-9 current limit). 1 0-20 mA Input 200 ohm input impedance. TB2-4 1 10k Ohm Pot. Input 760k ohm input impedance. TB2-4 Pot. source = 5V through 2.67k ohms to TB2-1. Option 0-10V Input 100k ohm input impedance. TB2-5 2 Board 0-10V Output Can drive 3.3k ohms (3 - parallel 10k ohm loads). TB2-5 0-20 mA Input 100 ohm input impedance. TB2-5 0-20 mA Output Can drive 400 ohms (3 - series 0-20 mA inputs). TB2-5 Pulse Input 250 ohms in series with an opto LED. TB2-9 Pulse high is greater than 8 mA or 3.6V, while pulse low is less than 0.8V or 0.2 mA. Absolute maximum continuous input level is 12V or 50 mA. Pulse Output Provides a current limited 4.5V square wave. TB2-5 This output can drive one PLUS or three PLUS II pulse inputs. Thermistor Input 5V across 3.3k ohms in series with the TB2-4 thermistor. This arrangement limits the measuring voltage to less than 2.5V (no self-heating). 1 Use TB2-5 for shield connection. 2 Refer to Typical Isolation diagram below. Typical Isolation True Galvanic Isolation to 200V AC (greater than 10 M ohm, less than 50 pf). Power User Signal I/O Conditioning Signal Option Board ATTENTION: Configuring an analog input for 0-20mA operation and driving it from a voltage source could cause ! component damage. Verify proper configuration prior to applying input signals. Installation/Wiring 2–37 Output Devices Drive Output Disconnection ATTENTION: Any disconnecting means wired to the drive output terminals U, V and W must be capable of disabling ! the drive if opened during drive operation. If opened during drive operation, the drive will continue to produce output voltage between U, V, W. An auxiliary contact must be used to simultaneously disable the drive. Common Mode Cores Common Mode Cores will help reduce the common mode noise at the drive output and guard against interference with other electrical equipment (programmable controllers, sensors, analog circuits, etc.). In addition, reducing the PWM carrier frequency will reduce the effects and lower the risk of common mode noise interference. Refer to the table below. Table 2.I 1336 PLUS II Common Mode Chokes Catalog Number Used with . . . Description 1321-M001 Communications Cables, Analog Open Style - Signal Level Signal Cables, etc. 1321-M009 All 1336 PLUS II Drives Rated: Open Style with Terminal Block, 9A 480V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) 1321-M048 All 1336 PLUS II Drives Rated: Open Style, 48A 480V, 5.5-22 kW (7.5-30 HP) 600V, 5.5-30 kW (7.5-40 HP) 1321-M180 All 1336 PLUS II Drives Rated: Open Style, 180A 480V, 30-112 kW (40-X150 HP) 600V, 37-93 kW (50-125 HP) 1321-M670 All 1336 PLUS II Drives Rated: Open Style, 670A 480V, 112-448 kW (150-600 HP) 600V, 149-448 kW (200-600 HP) Cable Termination Optional Cable Terminator Voltage doubling at motor terminals, known as reflected wave phe- nomenon, standing wave or transmission line effect, can occur when using drives with long motor cables. Inverter duty motors with phase-to-phase insulation ratings of 1200 volts or higher should be used to minimize effects of reflected wave on motor insulation life. Applications with non-inverter duty motors or any motor with excep- tionally long leads may require an output filter or cable terminator. A filter or terminator will help limit reflection to the motor, to levels which are less than the motor insulation rating. 2–38 Installation/Wiring Table 2.F lists the maximum recommended cable length for untermi- nated cables, since the voltage doubling phenomenon occurs at differ- ent lengths for different drive ratings. If your installation requires longer motor cable lengths, a reactor or cable terminator is recom- mended. Refer to Table 2.F for frequency, cable length and voltage restrictions of 1204-TFA1 or 1204-TFB2 terminators. Optional Output Reactor Bulletin 1321 Reactors listed in the 1336 PLUS-3.0 Price Sheet can be used for drive input and output. These reactors are specifically constructed to accommodate IGBT inverter applications with switch- ing frequencies up to 20 kHz. They have a UL approved dielectric strength of 4000 volts, opposed to a normal rating of 2500 volts. The first two and last two turns of each coil are triple insulated to guard against insulation breakdown resulting from high dv/dt. When using motor line reactors, it is recommended that the drive PWM frequency be set to its lowest value to minimize losses in the reactors. Important: By using an output reactor the effective motor voltage will be lower because of the voltage drop across the reactor - this may also mean a reduction of motor torque. Selecting/Verifying Fan Voltage 1336 PLUS II D-G Frame drives have cooling fans that utilize a trans- former to match the input line voltage to the proper fan voltage. If an input voltage other than the standard 240, 480 or 600V AC is used, the transformer tap may have to be changed (see below). ATTENTION: To avoid a shock hazard, assure that all power to the drive has been removed before proceeding. ! 1. Ensure that all power has been removed to the drive. 2. Locate the transformer in the lower left corner of the drive chassis. Note lead placement (tap being used). 3. Determine the correct tap from the following figure and verify. 4. If present tap is incorrect, remove the insulating sleeve from the correct tap. 5. Remove the wire lead presently connected and place on the selected tap. Replace the insulating sleeve on the unused tap. 200-240V AC Input Voltage 380-480V AC Input Voltage 500-600V AC Input Voltage 200 Volt Tap 380 Volt Tap 500 Volt Tap (use for 200-220V) (use for 380-400V) (use for 500V) 415 Volt Tap (use for 415V) 240 Volt Tap 460 Volt Tap 575 Volt Tap (use for 230-240V) (use for 460-480V) (use for 575-600V) Installation/Wiring 2–39 Auxiliary Inputs - TB4, TB6 Terminal blocks TB4 and TB6 (B Frame drives & up) allow the drive power supplies to be operated from an external voltage source. Both terminal blocks are located on the Base Driver Board and are accessi- ble from the front of the drive. See Figure 2.1 for locations. TB4 can be used to externally power the low voltage power supply, allowing operation of drive control functions in the absence of bus voltage. Applying proper voltage to TB4 (see Table 2.J) provides +5V, ±15V and isolated 12V outputs for:  Main Control Board (Control Interface Boards, RIO Board, etc.)  SCANport™ (HIM, etc.)  Encoder(s)  LEMS  Precharge  Any DC fans in the drive TB6 can be used to externally power the high voltage power supply which provides inverter IGBT drive voltage and the low voltage nec- essary to power the low voltage power supply. This allows operation of the drive in the absence of bus voltage. The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB4 is 2.1 and 2 0.06 mm (14 and 30 AWG). Wire sizes for TB6 are 5.3 and 0.06 2 mm (10 and 30 AWG). Use Copper wire Only with a minimum tem- perature rating of 75 degrees C. Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire. Maximum torque for both terminal blocks is 0.57 N-m (5 lb.-in.). Table 2.J 1 Power Supply Input Requirements Terminal Average Peak Block Drive Type Input Voltage Current Current 2 TB4-1 (+) All 22-28V DC 2.25A 5.00A TB4-2 (–) 3 TB6 230V AC 200-375V DC 0.50A 1.00A 3 380-480V AC 400-750V DC 0.25A 0.50A 3 500-600V AC 400-925V DC 0.25A 0.50A 1 The power source used to drive a power supply must be capable of providing the peak current at startup. A “flat“ current or power limit is acceptable, but a foldback current limit may trip at startup, never allowing the supply to start. 2 Must be supplied from a Class 2 Limited Power Source. 3 Must be supplied from a source that is provided with transient voltage surge suppression such that transients are suppressed to 6000V peak maximum or less. ESC SEL J13 J8 JOG J11 J2 J2 ESC SEL J13 J8 JOG J11 2–40 Installation/Wiring Auxiliary Output - TB9 The 480V or 600V (depending on the input voltage to the drive) output terminal block (TB9) is only available on F Frame Drives. This terminal block provides a three-phase, high voltage connection from the load side of the AC input line fuses. Normally this connection is used to power an external control transformer (user supplied) or other auxiliary circuit. Refer to Figure 2.1 for location. Important: Depending on the circuitry connected, additional fusing may be required. ATTENTION: The installation of auxiliary circuits must comply with the national codes and standards (NEC, VDE, ! BSA, etc.) and local codes regarding wire type, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection and disconnect devices. Fail- ure to do so may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. The auxiliary circuit can be utilized to a maximum current capacity of 8 amperes RMS. The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB9 is 4.0 and 0.8 2 mm (12 and 18 AWG). Use Copper wire Only with a minimum tem- perature rating of 75 degrees C. Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire. Maximum torque is 0.90-1.81 N-m (8-16 lb.-in.). Control Interface Board Important: If the Control Interface Board is being installed, Main Control Board jumpers at pins 3 & 4 and 17 & 18 of J2 Installation and Removal must be removed and the proper [Input Mode] selected. If this board is removed, these jumpers must be reinstalled and the [Input Mode] parameter must be programmed to “Status (1).” Figure 2.7 Jumper Locations 1 1 Frames A1 - A4 Frames B - G 1 Refer to page 1–1 for frame reference classifications. ESC SEL JOG ESC SEL JOG Installation/Wiring 2–41 Adapter Definitions Serial communication devices such as the Human Interface Module that are connected to the drive are identified by SCANport serial com- munications as Adapters. Depending on the drive and options ordered, a number of different adapters are available as shown in Figure 2.8. Figure 2.9 shows the maximum distance allowed between devices. Figure 2.8 Adapter Locations 1203-SG2 23 1203-SG4 2345 Internal Communication (Adapter 6) 2 Expansion Options Control Interface Option (TB3 Adapter 0) Main Control Board Drive Mounted Snap-In HIM, Main Drive Mounted Snap-In HIM, Internal Communications Module Control Board Internal Communications Module or Flash Interface Board or Flash Interface Board (Adapter 1) (Adapter 1) 1 1 Frames A1 - A4 Frames B - G 1 Refer to page 1–1 for frame reference classifications. 2 Communications Port for remote HIM/communication options (Adapter 2) or Expansion Options (Adapters 2, 3, 4, 5) is located on the bottom of the enclosure (bottom of Main Control Board Mounting Plate for frames F-G). Figure 2.9 Remote Device Distances RIO SCANport ESC SEL Comm HIM or Other Status JOG Remote Device 120/240V AC Input Communication Module ESC SEL JOG Cable Length in Cable Length in Meters = 10 – X Meters = 10 – X Port Expansion Option Length = X Meters (1203-SG2) Adapter 2 or Total cable distance between each device and drive must ESC SEL HIM or Other be 10 meters (33 feet) or less. Maximum Cable Length = 10 Meters Remote Device JOG 2–42 Installation/Wiring End of Chapter Chapter 3 Human Interface Module Chapter 3 describes the various controls and indicators found on the optional Human Interface Modules (HIMs). The material presented in this chapter must be understood to perform the start-up procedure in Chapter 5. HIM Description When a drive mounted “snap-in” HIM is supplied, it will be connected as Adapter 1 (see Adapter Definitions in Chapter 2) and visible from the front of the drive. This HIM should not be removed while drive power is applied. A handheld HIM can be connected to the drive (using a 1202-Cxx Option Cable) as Adapter 2, 3, 4 or 5 (see Adapter Definitions in Chapter 2). This type of HIM can be removed while drive power is applied. Refer to “Control Status” on page 3–6 and “Handheld HIM Operation” on page 3–13 for further information. The HIM can be divided into two sections; Display Panel and Control Panel. The Display Panel provides a means of programming the drive and viewing the various operating parameters. The Control Panel allows different drive functions to be controlled. Refer to Figure 3.1, Figure 3.2 and the sections that follow for a description of the panels. ATTENTION: When a drive mounted “snap-in” HIM is not supplied on enclosed NEMA Type 1 (IP 20) drives, the ! blank cover plate (option HASB) must be installed to close the opening in the front cover of the enclosure. Failure to install the blank cover plate allows access to electrically live parts which may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. When a drive mounted “snap-in” HIM is supplied with enclosed NEMA Type 1 (IP 20) drives, but has been removed, the blank cover plate must be installed in place of the HIM. Important: The operation of some HIM functions will depend upon drive parameter settings. The default parameter values allow full HIM functionality. 3–2 Human Interface Module Figure 3.1 HIM Display Panel LCD Display Display Panel Key Descriptions Escape When pressed, the ESCape key will cause the programming system to go back one level in the menu tree. Select Pressing the SELect key alternately causes the top or bottom line of the display to become active. The flashing first character indicates which line is active. Increment/Decrement or These keys are used to increment and decrement a value or scroll through different groups or parameters. Pressing both keys simultaneously while the Process or Password Display is shown, will save that display as the startup display. Enter When pressed, a group or parameter will be selected or a parameter value will be entered into memory. After a parameter has been entered into memory, the top line of the display will automatically become active, allowing another parameter (or group) to be chosen. Human Interface Module 3–3 Figure 3.2 HIM Control Panel Digital Speed Control and Indicator (also available with Analog Speed Pot.) Control Panel Key Descriptions Start The Start key will initiate drive operation if no other control devices are sending a Stop command. This key can be disabled by the [Logic Mask] or [Start Mask]. Stop If the drive is running, pressing the Stop key will cause the drive to stop, using the selected stop mode. Refer to the [Stop Select 1] and [Stop Select 2] parameters in Chapter 6. If the drive has stopped due to a fault, pressing this key will clear the fault and reset the drive. Refer to the [Flt Clear Mode], [Logic Mask] and [Fault Mask] param- eters. Jog When pressed, jog will be initiated at the frequency set by the [Jog Frequency] parameter, if no other control devices are sending a Stop command. Releasing the key will cause the drive to stop, using the selected stop mode. Refer to [Stop Select 1], [Stop Select 2], [Logic Mask] and [Jog Mask]. 3–4 Human Interface Module Control Panel Key Descriptions (Continued) Change Direction Pressing this key will cause the drive to ramp down to zero Hertz and then ramp up to set speed in the opposite direction. The appropriate Direction Indicator will illuminate to indicate the direction of motor rotation. Refer to [Logic Mask] and [Direction Mask]. Direction LEDs (Indicators) The appropriate LED will illuminate continuously to indicate the commanded direction of rotation. If the second LED is flashing, the drive has been commanded to change direction, but is still decelerating. Up/Down Arrows (only available with digital speed control) Pressing these keys will increase or decrease the HIM frequency command. An indication of this command will be shown on the visual Speed Indicator. The drive will run at this command if the HIM is the selected frequency reference. See [Freq Select 1] and [Freq Select 2]. Pressing both keys simultaneously stores the current HIM frequency command in HIM memory. Cycling power or removing the HIM from the drive will set the frequency command to the value stored in HIM memory. If the Analog Speed Potentiometer option has been ordered, the Up/Down keys and Speed Indicator will be replaced by the pot. Speed Indicator (only available with digital speed control) Illuminates in steps to give an approximate visual indication of the commanded speed. If the Analog Speed Potentiometer option has been ordered, the Up/Down keys and Speed Indicator will be replaced by the pot. HIM Operation When power is first applied to the drive, the HIM will cycle through a series of displays. These displays will show drive name, HIM ID number and communication status. Upon completion, the Status Display (see Figure 3.3) will be shown. This display shows the current status of the drive (i.e. “Stopped,” “Running,” etc.) or any faults that may be present (refer to Chapter 7 for fault information). The Status Display can be replaced by the Process Display or Password Login menu on all HIMS, except Series A below version 3.0. See appropriate sections on the following pages for more infor- mation. Human Interface Module 3–5 Figure 3.3 Status Display From this display, pressing any one of the 5 Display Panel keys will cause “Choose Mode” to be displayed. Pressing the Increment or Decrement keys will allow different modes to be selected as described below and shown in Figure 3.4. Refer to the pages that follow for operation examples. Display When selected, the Display mode allows any of the parameters to be viewed. However, parameter modifications are not allowed. Process The Process mode displays two user-selected parameters with text and scaling programmed by the user. Refer to Chapter 6 for further information. Program Program mode provides access to the complete listing of parameters available for programming. Refer to Chapter 6 for further parameter programming information. StartUp Performs an assisted start-up, prompting the user through major start- up steps. For further information, refer to Chapter 5. EEProm This mode allows all parameters to be reset to the factory default settings. In addition, certain HIMs (see table below) will allow parameter upload/download (Drive->HIM/HIM->Drive) between the HIM and drive. If your HIM does not have this capability, the option will not be displayed. Table 3.A HIMs with Upload/Download Capability HIM Catalog Number Upload/Download Capability ● HAP (Series B) ● HA1 (Series B) ● HA2 (Series B) ● HCSP ● HCS1 ● HCS2 Search (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0) This mode will search for parameters that are not at their default values. 3–6 Human Interface Module Control Status (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0) Permits the drive logic mask to be disabled/enabled allowing handheld HIM removal while drive power is applied. Disabling the logic mask with a Series A HIM below version 3.0 can be accom- plished with [Logic Mask] as explained on page 3–13. This menu also provides access to a fault queue which will list the last four faults that have occurred. “Trip” displayed with a fault indicates the actual fault that tripped the drive. A clear function clears the queue - it will not clear an active fault. Password The Password mode protects the drive parameters against programming changes by unauthorized personnel. When a password has been assigned, access to the Program/EEProm modes and the Control Logic/ Clear Fault Queue menus can only be gained when the correct password has been entered. The password can be any five digit number between 00000 and 65535. Refer to the example on page 3–12. Figure 3.4 HIM Programming Steps OPERATOR LEVEL Power-Up Mode & Status Display ESC SEL or or or or MODE LEVEL (Read Only) (Read/Write) (Read Only) Choose Mode Choose Mode Choose Mode Choose Mode Choose Mode Choose Mode Choose Mode Choose Mode 1 1 1 Display Process Program Start Up EEPROM Search Control Status Password 3 Process Display Save Values Control Logic, Login, Logout 3 Recall Values Fault Queue Modify Reset Defaults 2 HIM -> Drive 2 Drive -> HIM GROUP LEVEL Parameter Groups (See Chapter 6) PARAMETER LEVEL Parameters (See Chapter 6) 1 2 3 Not available on Series A HIMs (below version 3.0). Not available on all HIMs – Refer to Table 3.A. Reserved for future use. Human Interface Module 3–7 Program and Display Modes Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 1. The Display and Program modes allow access to the parameters for viewing or programming. A. From the Status Display, press Enter (or any key). “Choose Mode” will be Choose Mode shown. Display B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to show “Program” (or “Display”). Choose Mode or Program C. Press Enter. Choose Group Metering D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until the desired group is displayed. or E. Press Enter. F. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to scroll to the desired parameter. Output Current or 0.00 Amps Bit ENUMs (16 character text strings) will be displayed (except Series A HIMs below software version 3.0) to aid interpretation of bit parameters. G. Select a bit parameter with the Increment (or Decrement) keys. Masks or Logic Mask H. Press the SELect key to view the ENUM of the first bit. Pressing this key again will move the cursor to the left one bit. TB3 X1111111 A blinking underline cursor will indicate that you are in the Display mode or that a Read Only parameter as been accessed. A flashing character will indicate that the value can be changed. Individual bits of a Read/Write parameter can be changed in the same man- ner. Pressing the SELect key will move the cursor (flashing character) one bit to the left. That bit can then be changed by pressing the Increment/ Decrement keys. When the cursor is in the far right position, pressing the Increment/Decrement keys will increment or decrement the entire value. Process Mode Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 1. When selected, the Process mode will show a custom display consisting of Process Mode information programmed with the Process Display group of parameters. A. Follow steps A-C on the preceding page to access the Program mode. Choose Mode Program B. Press the Increment/Decrement key until “Process Display” is shown. Press Choose Group or & Enter. Process Display C. Using the Increment/Decrement keys, select [Process 1 Par] and enter the Process 1 Par or & number of the parameter you wish to monitor. Press Enter. 1 3–8 Human Interface Module Process Mode (continued) Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . D. Select [Process 1 Scale] using the Increment/Decrement keys. Enter the Process 1 Scale or & desired scaling factor. Press Enter. 1.00 E. Select [Process 1 Txt 1] using the Increment/Decrement keys. Enter the Process 1 Txt 1 or & desired text character. Press Enter and repeat for the remaining characters. V F. If desired, a second display line can also be programmed by repeating steps A-E for [Process 2 xxx] parameters. G. When process programming is complete, press ESCape until “Choose Choose Mode & or Mode” is displayed. Press Increment/Decrement until “Process” is displayed. Process H. Press Enter. This selects which custom display will be on line 1 and line 2. Process Var 1=1 & or Use the Increment/Decrement keys to select process 1 or 2 parameters for Process Var 2=2 line 1. Sets Process Display I. Press SELect to move to line 2. Select the desired process parameters. A as Power-Up Display zero can be entered (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0) to disable line 2. In addition, the Process Display can be set to appear when drive power is applied by simultaneously pressing the Increment and Decrement or keys while the Process Display active. EEProm Mode Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . The EEProm mode is used to restore all settings to factory default values Reset Defaults or upload/download parameters between the HIM and drive (compatible HIMs only, see Table 3.A). 1. To restore factory defaults: A. From the Status Display, press Enter (or any key). “Choose Mode” Choose Mode will be displayed. Display B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “EEProm” is dis- Choose Mode or played. If EEProm is not in the menu, programming is password EEProm protected. Refer to Password Mode later in this section. C. Press Enter. D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Reset Defaults” is EEProm or displayed. Reset Defaults E. Press Enter to restore all parameters to their original factory settings. F. Press ESC. “Reprogram Fault” will display. Reprogram Fault F 48 G. Press the Stop key to reset the fault. Stopped +0.00 Hz Important: If [Input Mode] was previously set to a value other than “1,” cycle drive power to reset. Human Interface Module 3–9 EEProm Mode (continued) Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 2. To upload a parameter profile from the drive to the HIM, you must have Drive -> HIM a compatible HIM (see Table 3.A). A. From the EEProm menu (see steps A-C above), press the Incre- EEProm or ment/Decrement keys until “Drive -> HIM” is displayed. Drive -> HIM B. Press Enter. A profile name (up to 14 characters) will be displayed Drive -> HIM on line 2 of the HIM. This name can be changed or a new name 1 A entered. Use the SEL key to move the cursor left. The Increment/ & or Decrement keys will change the character. C. Press Enter. An informational display will be shown, indicating the Master Type drive type and firmware version. Version 2.01 D. Press Enter to start the upload. The parameter number currently Drive -> HIM 60 being uploaded will be displayed on line 1 of the HIM. Line 2 will ||||| indicate total progress. Press ESC to stop the upload. E. “COMPLETE” displayed on line 2 will indicate successful upload. Drive -> HIM 210 Press Enter. If “ERROR” is displayed, see Chapter 7. COMPLETE 3. To download a parameter profile from the HIM to a drive, you must HIM -> Drive have a compatible HIM (see Table 3.A). Important: The download function will only be available when there is a valid profile stored in the HIM. A. From the EEProm menu (see steps 1A-1C), press the Increment/ EEprom or Decrement keys until “HIM -> Drive” is displayed. HIM -> Drive B. Press the Enter key. A profile name will be displayed on line 2 of HIM -> Drive & or the HIM. Pressing the Increment/Decrement keys will scroll the dis- 1 A play to a second profile (if available). C. Once the desired profile name is displayed, press the Enter key. An Master Type informational display will be shown, indicating the version numbers 2.01 -> 2.03 of the profile and drive. D. Press Enter to start the download. The parameter number currently HIM -> Drive 60 being downloaded will be displayed on line 1 of the HIM. Line 2 will ||||| indicate total progress. Press ESC to stop the download. E. A successful download will be indicated by “COMPLETE” displayed Drive -> HIM 210 on line 2 of the HIM. Press Enter. If “ERROR” is displayed, see COMPLETE Chapter 7. 3–10 Human Interface Module Search Mode Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 1. The Search Mode is not available with a Series A HIM below version 3.0. This mode allows you to search through the parameter list and display all parameters that are not at the factory default values. A. From the Status Display, press Enter (or any key). “Choose Mode” Choose Mode will be shown. Display B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Search” is displayed. or Choose Mode Search C. Press Enter. The HIM will search through all parameters and display any parameters that are not at their factory default values. D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to scroll through the list. or Control Status Mode Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 1. The Control Status mode is not available with a Series A HIM below Control Logic version 3.0. This mode allows the drive logic mask to be disabled, thus preventing a Serial Fault when the HIM is removed while drive power is applied. The logic mask can be disabled with Series A HIMs (versions below 3.0) by using [Logic Mask] as explained on page 3–13. A. From the Status Display, press Enter (or any key). “Choose Mode” Choose Mode will be shown. Display B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Control Status” is Choose Mode or & displayed. Press Enter. Control Status C. Select “Control Logic” using the Increment/Decrement keys. Press or & Control Status Enter. Control Logic D. Press the SELect key, then use the Increment (or Decrement) key Control Logic & or to select “Disabled” (or “Enable”). Disabled E. Press Enter. The logic mask is now disabled (or enabled). Human Interface Module 3–11 Control Status Mode (continued) Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 2. This menu provides a means to view the fault queue and clear it when Fault Queue/Clear Faults desired. A. From the Control Status menu, press the Increment (or Decrement) Control Status or key until “Fault Queue” is displayed. Fault Queue B. Press Enter. C. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “View Faults” is Fault Queue or displayed. View Faults D. Press Enter. The fault queue will be displayed. “Trip” displayed with Serial Fault a fault will indicate the fault that tripped the drive. F 10 Trip 1 E. Use the Increment (or Decrement) key to scroll through the list. Reprogram Fault or F 48 2 F. To clear the fault queue, press ESCape. Then use the Increment/ & or Decrement keys to select “Clear Queue.” Press Enter. Please note Fault Queue that “Clear Queue” will not clear active faults. Clear Queue 3–12 Human Interface Module Password Mode Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 1. The factory default password is 0 (which disables password protec- Modify Password tion). To change the password and enable password protection, per- form the following steps. A. From the Status Display, press Enter (or any key). “Choose Mode” Choose Mode will be shown. Display B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Password” is Choose Mode or displayed. Password C. Press Enter. D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Modify” is displayed. Password or Modify E. Press Enter. “Enter Password” will be displayed. Enter Password < 0> F. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to scroll to your desired Enter Password or new password. The SELect key will move the cursor (except Series < 123> A HIMs below version 3.0). G. Press Enter to save your new password. Choose Mode Password H. Press Enter again to return to the Password Mode. Password Login I. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Logout” is displayed. Password or Logout J. Press Enter to log out of the Password mode. Choose Mode Password K. The Password mode can be programmed to appear when drive or power is applied (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Simul- taneously press the Increment and Decrement keys while the Sets Password Display Password display is shown. as Power-Up Display Human Interface Module 3–13 Password Mode (continued) Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 2. The Program/EEProm modes and the Control Logic/Clear Queue Login to Drive menus are now password protected and will not appear in the menu. To access these modes, perform the following steps. A. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Password” is Choose Mode or displayed. Password B. Press Enter. “Login” will be displayed. Password Login C. Press Enter, “Enter Password” will be displayed. Enter Password < 0> D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until your correct password Enter Password or is displayed. The SELect key will move the cursor (except Series A < 123> HIMs below version 3.0). E. Press Enter. Choose Mode Password F. The Program and EEProm modes will now be accessible. To pre- vent future access to program changes, logout as described below. Logout from Drive 3. To prevent unauthorized changes to parameters, Logout must be per- formed as described below. A. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Password” is Choose Mode or displayed. Password B. Press Enter. Password Login C. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Logout” is displayed. Password or Logout D. Press Enter to log out of the Password mode. Choose Mode Password Handheld HIM Operation If remote programming is desired, a handheld HIM can be connected to the drive. Refer to Adapter Definitions in Chapter 2 for details. Important: Disconnecting a handheld HIM (or other SCANport device) from a drive while power is applied will cause a “Serial Fault,” unless the [Logic Mask] parameter has been set to disable this fault or Control Logic (Control Status menu) has been disabled (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Setting any bit of the [Logic Mask] parameter to “0” will disable “Serial Fault” from a HIM on the corresponding adapter. Note that this also disables all HIM control functions except Stop. 3–14 Human Interface Module End of Chapter Chapter 4 Flash Memory The 1336 PLUS II stores its operating firmware in state-of-the-art Flash Memory. Chapter 4 will briefly describe flash memory and the method available to upgrade the drive firmware in the event that soft- ware enhancements become available. What is Flash Memory? The firmware (including parameter layout and operating algorithms) resides in a form of programmable read-only memory called “Flash Memory.” Flash memory allows the user to easily upgrade the drive firmware locally using a standard computer and a Firmware Down- load Module (1336F-FDM). The latest firmware files are available on the Internet or from your local sales office. Firmware Download The necessary file can be downloaded from the Internet with a com-  puter (IBM compatible recommended) having the following: Requirements  Disk drive (hard or floppy)  Standard communications program capable of XMODEM protocol  Standard serial “COM” port and connecting cable  Internet access with browser software In addition, the following is recommended:   Windows 95 Operating System A Firmware Download Module must be installed in the Adapter 1 location of the drive to allow access to drive memory. Detailed instructions are included with the board. 4–2 Flash Memory End of Chapter Chapter 5 Start-Up This chapter describes how you start-up the 1336 PLUS II Drive. Included are typical adjustments and checks to assure proper opera- tion. The information contained in previous chapters of this manual must be read and understood before proceeding. Important: The 1336 PLUS II is designed so that start-up is simple and efficient. Two start-up methods are provided. A self prompting “assisted” procedure utilizing the 1336 PLUS II Startup mode. As an aid, this mode asks questions about the most used basic parameters. The second method, if required, provides a more complex start-up utilizing the “Program” mode and complete parameter access. Advanced features and adjustments are grouped separately from basic parameters for ease of use. Start-Up Requirements The following procedures are written for users who have a Human Interface Module (HIM) installed and who are not using a 2-wire drive control scheme. For users without a HIM, respective external commands and signals must be substituted to simulate their operation. ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to per- form the following start-up procedure. Some of the voltages ! present are at incoming line potential. To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment, only qualified ser- vice personnel should perform the following procedure. Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before be- ginning. If an event does not occur while performing this procedure, Do Not Proceed. Remove Power by opening the branch circuit disconnect device and correct the mal- function before continuing. Important:  Power must be applied to the drive when viewing or changing 1336 PLUS II parameters. Previous programming may affect the drive status when power is applied.  If the Control Interface option is installed, remote start circuits may be connected to TB3 on the interface board. Confirm that all cir- cuits are in a de-energized state before applying power. User sup- plied voltages may exist at TB3 even when power is not applied to the drive.  Refer to Chapter 7 for fault code information. 5–2 Start-Up Initial Operation 1. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive. If a Control Interface option (L4, L5, L6, L4E through L9E) is installed, verify that the control power to this board matches the board rating. 2. Remove and lock-out all incoming power to the drive including incoming AC power to terminals R, S and T (L1, L2 and L3) plus any separate control power for remote interface devices. 3. If a Control Interface option is installed, verify that the Stop and Enable interlock inputs are present. Important: The Stop and Enable inputs must be present before the drive will start. If this option is not installed, verify that two jumpers are installed at pins 3 & 4 and 17 & 18 of J2. In addition, the [Input Mode] must be set to “Status.” 4. Confirm that all other optional inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure. 5. The remainder of this procedure requires that a HIM be installed. If the HIM has a Control Panel, use the local controls to complete the start-up procedure. If a Control Panel is not present, remote devices must be used to operate the drive. 6. Proceed to “Assisted Start-Up”. If a more detailed start-up is required, go to “Advanced Start-Up” on page 5. Assisted Start-Up The following procedure provides a prompted start-up. Steps are outlined below. ATTENTION: To guard against possible machine damage ! and/or personal injury caused by unintended motor rotation, Do Not press the Start key (HIM) or issue a Start command (TB3) during the Start-Up procedure until instructed to do so. Pressing the Start key or issuing a Start command will cause the drive to start. Assisted Start-Up Keys Description The HIM Display will show . . . 1. For proper operation of the Autotune function, assure that the load is discon- Disconnect Load from nected from the motor. Motor 2. Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive. The LCD Display should Stopped Apply Power light and display a drive status of “Stopped” and an output frequency of “+0.00 +0.00 Hz Hz.” If the drive detects a fault, a brief statement relating to the fault will be shown on the display. Record this information, remove all power and correct the fault source before proceeding. Refer to Chapter 7 for fault descriptions. Start-Up 5–3 Assisted Start-Up Keys Description The HIM Display will show . . . 3. Important: The remaining steps in this procedure are based on factory default parameter settings. If the drive has been previously operated, parameter settings may have been changed and may not be compatible with this start-up procedure or application. Drive status and fault conditions may be unpredict- Reset Factory Defaults able when power is first applied. To obtain proper results, the parameters must be restored to factory default settings. A. From the Status Display, press Enter (or any key). “Choose Mode” will be Choose Mode displayed. Display B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “EEPROM” is displayed. If Choose Mode or EEProm is not in the menu, programming is password protected. Refer to EEProm Chapter 3 for Password information. C. Press Enter. D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Reset Defaults” is displayed. EEProm or Reset Defaults E. Press Enter to restore all parameters to their original factory settings. Choose Mode EEProm F. Press ESC. “Reprogram Fault” will display, indicating successful reset. Reprogram Fault F48 G. Press the Stop key to reset the fault. Cycle power. Stopped +0.00 Hz 4. From the Status Display, press the Enter key (or any key). “Choose Mode” will Choose Mode be displayed. Display or A. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Startup” is displayed. Choose Mode Startup B. Press Enter. Important: All questions can be answered Yes or No. Pressing Enter will select the default (“Y” or “N”). Pressing the Increment (or Decrement) key will change the selection – press Enter to select. Choosing “Y” allows you to pro- ceed through the step, “No” will advance you to the next step. In addition, the following should be noted:  The “Startup” mode can be exited at any time by pressing ESCape until the Status Display is shown. If you wish to re-enter the “Startup” mode, simply select “Reset Sequence” to start from the beginning. Selecting “Continue” allows you to resume from the point where you left off.  Completing the last action in any step will automatically take you to the next step.  Pressing SELect will activate line 2 of the display – this must be done for all values.  Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to adjust a value (skip if value is or correct). Press Enter to store the value or retain the existing value. Pressing Enter again will cause you to move to the next step (parameter). 5–4 Start-Up Assisted Start-Up Keys Description The HIM Display will show . . . 5. Using the following diagram as a guide, perform the desired steps. ATTENTION: Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure. To guard against possible injury and/or ! equipment damage, it is recommended that the motor be discon- nected from the load before proceeding. Configure Configure Input Enter Motor Enter Check Rotation Configure Configure Basic Setup Voltage/Frequency Data Encoder Data Verify Direction Digital I/O Analog I/O Autotune Enter Basic Modify Input Enter Nameplate Is an Encoder Perform Motor Autotune the Enter Digital Enter Analog Setup? Volt/Freq? Motor Data? Present? Rotation Test? Motor? I/O Config? I/O Config? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes [Accel Time 1] [Base Frequency] [Motor NP Volts] [Encoder Type] Rotate Motor Compute Flux Configure Inputs Configure Inputs Check Direction Current & [Decel Time 1] [Maximum Freq] [Motor NP Amps] [Encoder PPR] [Input Mode] [Anlg In 0-2 Lo] Check Encoder Direction IR Drop [Overload Amps] [Base Voltage] [Motor NP Hertz] [TB3 Term Sel] [Anlg In 0-2 Hi ] [Stop Select 1] [Maximum Voltage] [Motor NP RPM] (if present) [Anlg Signal Loss] See Important Configure Outputs [Freq Select 1] statement below [CR1-4 Out Select] Configure Outputs [Dig Out Freq] [Anlg Out 0-1 Sel] [Dig Out Current] [Anlg Out 0-1 Offset] [Dig Out Torque] [Anlg Out 0-1 Abs] [Dig At Temp] [Anlg Out 0-1 Lo] Important: The Autotune routine is designed for use with standard induction motors only. It should not be used with synchronous motors. [Anlg Out 0-1 Hi] 6. Start-up is complete. Remove all power, then reconnect load to motor. Check for proper operation. Start-Up 5–5 Advanced Start-Up This procedure is designed for complex applications requiring a more detailed start-up. Advanced Start-Up Procedure Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 1. Remove the drive cover and disconnect the motor leads from TB1, terminals Disconnect Motor U, V, W (T1, T2 and T3). 2. Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive. The LCD Display should Stopped Apply Power light and display a drive status of “Stopped” and an output frequency of “+0.00 +0.00 Hz Hz.” If the drive detects a fault, a brief statement relating to the fault will be shown on the display. Record this information, remove all power and correct the fault source before proceeding. Refer to Chapter 7 for fault descriptions. 3. Important: The remaining steps in this procedure are based on factory default parameter settings. If the drive has been previously operated, parameter settings may have been changed and may not be compatible with this start-up procedure or application. Drive status and fault conditions may be unpredict- Reset Factory Defaults able when power is first applied. To obtain proper results, the parameters must be restored to factory default settings. A. From the Status Display, press Enter (or any key). “Choose Mode” will be Choose Mode displayed. Display B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “EEPROM” is displayed. If Choose Mode or EEProm is not in the menu, programming is password protected. Refer to EEProm Chapter 3 for Password information. C. Press Enter. D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Reset Defaults” is displayed. EEProm or Reset Defaults E. Press Enter to restore all parameters to their original factory settings. Choose Mode EEProm F. Press ESC. “Reprogram Fault” will display, indicating successful reset. Reprogram Fault F48 G. Press the Stop key to reset the fault. Cycle power. Stopped +0.00 Hz 5–6 Start-Up Advanced Start-Up Procedure Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 4. If a Control Interface option is installed, it is important that the Input Mode selected in Chapter 2 be programmed into the drive. Since the control inputs to this option are programmable, incorrect operation can occur if an improper Program Input Mode mode is selected. The factory default mode (”Status”) disables all inputs except Stop and Enable. Verify your control scheme against the information provided in Chapter 2 and program the [Input Mode] parameter as follows: A. From the Status Display, press the Enter key (or any key). “Choose Mode” Choose Mode will be displayed. EEProm B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Program” is displayed. If Choose Mode or Program is not available, programming is password protected. Refer to Program Chapter 3 for Password mode information. C. Press Enter. Metering D. Press the Increment key until “Setup” is displayed. Setup E. Press Enter. Input Mode Status F. Press SELect. The first character of line 2 will now flash. G. Press the Increment or Decrement keys until the desired mode is displayed, Input Mode or then press Enter. 3 Wire In addition to the mode, Inputs 3-8 can also be programmed (if defaults are not desired). See Chapter 6 for parameter information. Use the steps above as a guide if input programming is desired. H. Press the ESCape key (3 times) to return to the Status Display. Stopped +0.00 Hz I. Remove power to the drive. When the HIM Display is no longer illuminated, reapply power. Cycle Input Power Important: Display must go blank for input mode programming changes to take effect. Start-Up 5–7 Advanced Start-Up Procedure Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 5. Set [Maximum Freq] and [Maximum Voltage] parameters to correct values (typically line voltage/frequency). Set [Base Voltage] and [Base Frequency] parameters to the motor nameplate values. A. From the Status Display, press the Enter key (or any key). “Choose Mode” Choose Mode will be displayed. EEProm B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Program” is displayed. Choose Mode or Program C. Press Enter. Metering or D. Press the Increment key until “Setup” is displayed. Setup E. Press Enter. Input Mode 3 Wire F. Press the Increment or Decrement keys until “Maximum Freq” is displayed. Maximum Freq or & Press SELect. The first character of line 2 will now flash. 60 G. Use the Increment/Decrement keys to display the first digit, then press Enter. or & Repeat for remaining digits. H. Repeat the above steps to program the remaining parameters located in the Motor Control group. I. Press the ESCape key (3 times) to return to the Status Display. Stopped +0.00 Hz 6. Sensorless Vector or V/Hz operation. Choose Sensorless Sensorless Vector or Volts/Hertz operation is selectable via [Control Select]. Vector or V/Hz Vector operation is the default. If V/Hz operation is desired, reprogram [Control Select] using the steps above as a programming guide. Refer to Chapter 6. 5–8 Start-Up Advanced Start-Up Procedure Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 7. Setting Frequency Command. A. From the Status Display, press the Enter key (or any key). “Choose Mode” Choose Mode will be displayed. EEProm B. Press the Increment key until “Display” is shown. Choose Mode Display C. Press Enter. Setup D. Press the Decrement key until “Metering” is displayed. Metering E. Press Enter. Output Voltage 0 Vlts F. Press the Increment key until “Freq Command” is displayed. Freq Command +0.00 Hz G. If the frequency command is a value other than zero, use the speed source or (digital, analog pot, etc.) to set the command to zero. H. After the command has been set to zero, press the ESCape key until the Stopped Status Display is shown. +0.00 Hz 8. Verifying Minimum and Maximum Frequency Settings. A. Press the Start key. The drive should output zero Hz. which is the factory At Speed default value for the [Minimum Freq] parameter. The Status Display should +0.00 Hz indicate “At Speed” and the actual frequency (+0.00 Hz.). If the drive does not start, check bit 12 (Voltage Check) of the [Drive Alarm Accelerating 1] parameter. If the bit is “1,” the drive terminal voltage is preventing the +29.62 Hz drive from starting. Normally this is caused by IGBT leakage current. To bypass this alarm, program [Flying Start En] to “Track Volts,” then start the At Speed drive. +60.00 Hz or B. With the drive still running, use the speed source to command maximum speed. The drive should ramp to [Maximum Freq]. 9. Checking Direction. A. Initiate a Reverse command. Important: With [Direction Mask] set to the default value, the reverse command must be issued from the HIM or other adapter. If the reverse command is to be issued from TB3, [Direction Mask] must first be programmed to allow direction control from TB3. The drive will ramp to zero speed, then ramp to [Maximum Freq] in the opposite direction. The output frequency shown on the Display Panel will indicate speed with a “+” for forward or a “–” for reverse. As the drive At Speed decelerates, the Forward Direction LED will flash, indicating actual –60.00 Hz direction. During this time the Reverse Direction LED will illuminate contin- uously, indicating the commanded direction. Once zero Hertz is reached and the drive begins to accelerate in the reverse direction, the Forward LED will extinguish and the Reverse LED will illuminate continuously. Start-Up 5–9 Advanced Start-Up Procedure Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . not installed, stop the drive and go to step 11. 10. If the Control Interface option is The following steps will check for correct drive when the Enable input is Open Enable Signal removed. A. With the drive still running, open the Enable signal. The drive should stop Not Enabled Restore Enable Signal and indicate “Not Enabled” on the display. Restore the Enable signal. –0.00 Hz B. Reset the drive by pressing the Stop key. 11. Jog Control & Stop Mode Check. Press & Hold Jog Key A. With the drive reset, but not running, press and hold the Jog key on the At Speed Control Panel. The motor should accelerate to the frequency programmed –10.00 Hz by the [Jog Frequency] parameter and remain there until the Jog key is Stopped released. When released, the drive should execute a stop function using Release Jog Key –0.00 Hz the programmed stop mode. Verify that the correct stop mode was initiated. 12. Checking Accel and Decel Times. Set to Maximum Frequency A. Verify that the frequency command is at maximum frequency. B. Start the drive and observe the amount of time the drive takes to accelerate to maximum frequency. This should equal 10 seconds, which is the factory default value for the [Accel Time 1] parameter. C. Press the Reverse key and observe the amount of time the drive takes to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero. This time should equal the time set in the [Decel Time 1] parameter (default is 10 seconds). If these times are not correct for your application, refer to Chapter 6 for instructions on programming changes. Important: With [Direction Mask] set to the default value, the reverse command must be issued from the HIM or other adapter. If the reverse command is to be issued from TB3, [Direction Mask] must first be programmed to allow direction control from TB3. Stopped +0.00 Hz D. Stop the drive. 13. Reconnect the Motor. A. Remove and lock-out the input and control power to the drive. When the Remove ALL Power HIM Display is no longer illuminated, remove the drive cover. ATTENTION: To avoid a hazard of electric shock, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged. Measure the DC bus ! voltage at the + & – terminals of TB1. The voltage must be zero. B. Reconnect motor leads and replace cover. Reconnect Motor 5–10 Start-Up Advanced Start-Up Procedure Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 14. Check for Correct Motor Rotation. ATTENTION: In the following steps, rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur. To guard against possible injury and/ ! or equipment damage, it is recommended that the motor be discon- nected from the load before proceeding. Apply Power to Drive A. Reapply power to the drive. Verify Frequency B. Verify that the frequency command is at zero Hz. For further information, Command = 0 refer to step 7. Verify Forward C. Using the Direction LEDs, verify that forward direction is selected. Rotation D. Start the drive and slowly increase the speed until the motor begins to turn. Note the direction of motor rotation. If the direction of rotation is as desired, Slowly Increase Speed proceed to Step E. If the direction of motor rotation is incorrect, stop the drive and remove all power. When the HIM Display is no longer illuminated, remove the drive or cover. Verify that the bus voltage measured at “DC +” & “DC –” of TB1 is zero (see Attention on page 5–9). Interchange any two of the three motor leads at TB1 - U, V or W. Repeat Steps A through D. Verify Direction of Rotation E. If encoder feedback is being used, verify that the polarity (“+” or “–”) of At Speed [Encoder Freq] equals the polarity of the actual drive output as shown on +5.00 Hz the Status Display. If the polarities are the same, go to step F. If polarities are different, stop the drive, remove all power. Reverse the “A” & “A NOT” OR “B” & “B NOT” wiring. Repeat Steps A through D. F. Stop the drive and replace drive cover. 15. Low Speed Operation. (Speed range greater than 20:1) If Volts/Hertz operation was selected in step 6, proceed to step 20. Slip @ F.L.A. Adjustment. To increase the steady state torque performance of the motor at low speeds, the default Speed Control method is Slip Compensation. The factory default value for [Slip @ F.L.A.] is “1.0 Hz.” Optimum motor performance depends on accurate setting of [Slip @ F.L.A.]. Estimate your motor slip value using the following: Motor Sync. RPM - Motor Rated RPM x Motor Rated Freq. (Hz) Motor Sync. RPM Example: 1800 – 1778 x 60 = 0.7 Hz Slip @ F.L.A. 1800 Continued on next page Start-Up 5–11 Advanced Start-Up Procedure Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . This will provide a starting point for slip compensation adjustment. If neces- sary, further adjustment can be made while the motor is under load. A. From the Status Display, press the Enter key (or any key). “Choose Mode” Choose Mode will be displayed. EEProm B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Program” is displayed. Choose Mode Program C. Press Enter. Metering D. Press the Increment key until “Feature Select” is displayed. Feature Select E. Press Enter. Dwell Frequency F. Press the Increment or Decrement keys until “Slip @ F.L.A.” is displayed. Slip @ F.L.A. or & Press SELect. The first character of line 2 will now flash. G. Use the Increment/Decrement keys to program the value calculated above, Slip @ F.L.A. or & then press Enter. 0.7 Hz Program NP Data 16. Tuning Sensorless Vector operation. To further improve drive performance in Sensorless Vector mode, the actual motor nameplate data can be entered directly. Refer to the motor nameplate and program the following Setup group parame- ters: [Motor NP Amps] [Motor NP Volts] [Motor NP Hertz] [Motor NP RPM]. For the typical steps involved when programming, refer to step 15. Speed Control Selection No Control Slip Comp. Speed Droop + Speed Encoder Frequency Command ∑ Adder Feedback [Speed Control] Parameter 77 + Speed Droop + Reference Regulator see Chapter 2 P Jump Process PI 5–12 Start-Up Advanced Start-Up Procedure Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . 17. Optimum tuning requires motor rotation and can be achieved by running the Remove ALL Power drive/motor under a “no-load” condition. Disconnect Load A. Remove all power to the drive. Disconnect the load from the system by Apply Power to Drive decoupling the motor shaft. Reapply drive power. B. While monitoring [Freq Command] in the Metering group, adjust the speed Freq Command or source for the drive (digital, analog pot, etc.) to 3/4 base speed. xx Hz Flux Current C. Press the Increment/Decrement keys until “Flux Current” is displayed. Start or & 1 Amp the drive and record this value. Flux Current= Amps D. Stop the drive. Freq Command E. Press the Increment/Decrement keys to display “Freq Command.” Adjust or 0 Hz the speed source for the drive to zero Hz. F. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to display “Output Voltage.” Start Output Voltage or & 0 Vlts the drive and record the value. G. Stop the drive. Output Volts at 0 Hz = V H. Program the values recorded above into the following parameters. [Flux Amps Ref] = [Flux Current] at 45 Hz. [IR Drop Volts] = [Output Voltage] at zero Hz. Important: Some motors (i.e. 6 pole, special, etc.) may be particularly sensi- tive to the adjustment of [IR Drop Volts]. If this tuning procedure does not give the desired performance, adjust [IR Drop Volts] up/down, 1 or 2 volts until desired response is achieved. 18. On larger motors (37 kW/50 HP, typical) additional acceleration performance Adjusting Flux Up Time can be gained by adjusting [Flux Up Time]. This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will inject current at [Current Limit] levels before acceleration begins. This pre-acceleration time builds flux in the motor to allow for optimum acceleration, and may result in shorter overall acceleration. If better performance is required, adjust [Flux Up Time]. Begin with 0.2 seconds (default is zero) and increase as necessary. For the typical steps involved when programming, refer to step 15. 19. To adjust the recovery response to load changes [Slip Comp Gain] can be Slip Comp Gain Tuning Slip Comp Gain increased. However, increasing the gain value too high may cause system 1 instability. The factory default value is set to minimum. Fine adjustment will require operation with a load. Set Power-Up Display 20. With HIM software versions 2.02 & up, the power-up display (Status, Process or Password) can be programmed to appear when drive power is applied. or Simply access the desired display and simultaneously press the Increment and Decrement keys. Start-Up 5–13 Advanced Start-Up Procedure Press these keys . . . while following these steps . . . The HIM Display will show . . . Set Electronic 21. Electronic overload protection is factory set to drive maximum. Overload A. To properly set the electronic overload protection, program [Overload Amps] (Setup group) to the actual nameplate F.L.A. B. If the motor speed range is greater than 2:1, program [Overload Mode] to the proper derate. For the typical steps involved when programming, refer to step 15. 22. This completes the basic start-up procedure. Depending on your application, further parameter programming may be required. Refer to Chapter 6 for information. 23. If password protection is enabled, log out as described in Chapter 3. 5–14 Start-Up End of Chapter Chapter 6 Programming Chapter 6 describes parameter information for the 1336 PLUS II. Parameters are divided into groups for ease of programming and operator access. Grouping replaces a sequentially numbered parameter list with functional parameter groups that increases operator efficiency and helps to reduce programming time. For most applications, this means simplicity at startup with minimum drive tuning. Function Index The Function Index shown below provides a directory of the parameters required for each drive function. The Page Number locates within a group all parameters associated with that specific function. Function Page Number Analog Input Config 6–30 At Temperature 6–28 Auto Restart 6–20 Bus Regulation 6–40 Custom Volts-per-Hertz 6–57 DC Brake-to-Stop 6–13 DC Hold Brake 6–13 Dwell 6–19 Economize 6–57 Electronic Shear Pin 6–32 Encoder Feedback 6–50 Fault Buffer History 6–32 Frequency Select 6–16 Inertia Ride-Thru 6–25 I/O Configuration 6–27 Last Speed 6–16 Line Loss Detect 6–22 Line Loss Recovery 6–22 Load Loss Detect 6–26 Minimum/Maximum Frequency 6–9 Overload Protection 6–11 Power Loss Ride-Thru 6–23 Preset Frequencies 6–16 Process Control 6–53 Process Display 6–49 Remote I/O 6–48 S-Curve Acceleration 6–21 Skip Frequencies 6–17 Slip Compensation 6–20 Step Logic 6–61 Stop Modes 6–9 Traverse Function 6–25 Programming Flow Chart The flow chart provided on pages 6-2 and 6-3 highlight the steps required to access each group of parameters and lists all parameters for each group. 6–2 Programming OPERATOR LEVEL Power-Up Mode & Status Display ESC SEL or or or or MODE LEVEL Not Available on Series A Read Only HIMs (below Version 3.0) GROUP LEVEL Process Display Wraps to Linear List Advanced Frequency Feature Digital Analog Metering Setup Faults Diagnostics Setup Set Select I/O I/O Page 6–5 Page 6–8 Page 6–12 Page 6–16 Page 6–19 Page 6–27 Page 6–30 Page 6–32 Page 6–36 Output Current (54) Input Mode (241) Minimum Freq (16) Freq Select 1 (5) Dwell Frequency (43) Input Mode (241) Anlg In 0 Lo (237) Fault Buffer 0 (86) Drive Status 1 (59) Dwell Time (44) Fault Buffer 1 (87) Output Voltage (1) Freq Select 1 (5) Maximum Freq (19) Freq Select 2 (6) TB3 Term 22 Sel (242) Anlg In 0 Hi (238) Drive Status 2 (236) Speed Control (77) Fault Buffer 2 (88) Output Power (23) Accel Time 1 (7) PWM Frequency (45) Jog Frequency (24) TB3 Term 23 Sel (243) Analog Trim En (90) Application Sts (316) Slip @ F.L.A. (42) Fault Buffer 3 (89) DC Bus Voltage (53) Decel Time 1 (8) Accel Time 2 (30) Preset Freq 1 (27) TB3 Term 24 Sel (244) Anlg In 1 Lo (239) Drive Alarm 1 (60) Slip Comp Gain (195) Clear Fault (51) Output Freq (66) Minimum Freq (16) Decel Time 2 (31) Preset Freq 2 (28) TB3 Term 26 Sel (245) Anlg In 1 Hi (240) Drive Alarm 2 (269) Run On Power Up (14) Cur Lim Trip En (82) Freq Command (65) Maximum Freq (19) Sync Time (307) Preset Freq 3 (29) TB3 Term 27 Sel (246) Anlg In 2 Lo (248) Latched Alarms 1 (205) Reset/Run Tries (85) Shear Pin Fault (226) Anlg In 0 Freq (138) Stop Select 1 (10) Stop Select 1 (10) Preset Freq 4 (73) TB3 Term 28 Sel (247) Anlg In 2 Hi (249) Latched Alarms 2 (270) Reset/Run Time (15) Motor OL Fault (201) Anlg In 1 Freq (139) Current Limit (36) DC Hold Time (12) Anlg Signal Loss (250) Input Status (55) Preset Freq 5 (74) Input Status (55) S Curve Enable (57) Motor Therm Flt (268) Anlg In 2 Freq (140) 4-20mA Loss Sel (150) Freq Source (62) Current Lmt Sel (232) DC Hold Level (13) Preset Freq 6 (75) CR1 Out Select (158) S Curve Time (56) Line Loss Fault (40) Encoder Freq (63) Anlg Out 0 Sel (25) Freq Command (65) Adaptive I Lim (227) Hold Level Sel (231) Preset Freq 7 (76) CR2 Out Select (174) Language (47) Blwn Fuse Flt (81) Pulse Freq (254) Anlg Out 0 Offst (154) Drive Direction (69) Current Lmt En (303) Bus Limit En (11) Skip Freq 1 (32) CR3 Out Select (175) Flying Start En (155) Low Bus Fault (91) MOP Freq (137) Overload Mode (37) Braking Chopper (314) Skip Freq 2 (33) CR4 Out Select (176) Anlg Out 0 Abs (233) Stop Mode Used (26) FStart Forward (156) Fault Data (207) Heatsink Temp (70) Overload Amps (38) Motor Type (41) Skip Freq 3 (34) Dig Out Freq (159) Anlg Out 0 Lo (234) Motor Mode (141) FStart Reverse (157) Flt Motor Mode (143) Power OL Count (84) VT Scaling (203) Stop Select 2 (52) Skip Freq Band (35) Dig Out Current (160) Anlg Out 0 Hi (235) Power Mode (142) LLoss Restart (228) Flt Power Mode (144) Motor OL Count (202) Motor NP RPM (177) KP Amps (193) MOP Increment (22) Line Loss Mode (256) Dig Out Torque (161) Anlg Out 1 Sel (274) Output Pulses (67) Fault Frequency (145) 3 Last Fault (4) Motor NP Hertz (178) Speed Brake En (319) Save MOP Ref (230) Line Loss Volts (320) Dig At Temp (267) Anlg Out 1 Abs (277) Current Angle (72) Fault Status 1 (146) 3 Loss Recover (321) Torque Current (162) Motor NP Volts (190) Common Bus (58) Freq Ref SqRoot (229) PI Max Error (293) Anlg Out 1 Offst (278) Heatsink Temp (70) Fault Status 2 (286) Ride Thru Volts (322) Flux Current (163) Motor NP Amps (191) Pulse In Scale (264) Pulse Out Select (280) Anlg Out 1 Lo (275) Fault Alarms 1 (173) Set Defaults (64) Min Bus Volts (323) % Output Power (3) Encoder PPR (46) Pulse Out Scale (281) Anlg Out 1 Hi (276) Fault Alarms 2 (287) DC Bus Memory (212) Traverse Inc (78) Flt Clear Mode (39) % Output Curr (2) Pulse In Scale (264) Slot A Option (252) Meas. Volts (272) Traverse Dec (304) 3 Ground Warning (204) Elapsed Run Time (279) At Time (327) Slot B Option (253) EEPROM Cksum (172) Max Traverse (79) 3 3 Phase Loss Mode (330) Remote CR Output (326) P Jump (80) 3 Phase Loss Level (331) Bus Regulation (288) 3 Precharge Fault (332) Load Loss Detect (290) 6 Motor OL Ret Load Loss Level (291) Load Loss Time (292) 4 3 PARAMETER LEVEL Bus Reg Level /Max Bus Volts (325) Programming 6–3 Not Available on Series A Not Available on Series A HIMs (below Version 3.0) HIMs (below Version 3.0) Read Only 2 Save Values Control Logic Login, Logout, 2 Recall Values Fault Queue Modify Reset Defaults 1 HIM -> Drive 1 Drive -> HIM to Linear List & Metering Process Encoder Motor Step Logic Ratings Masks Owners Adapter I/O Process PI Control Display Feedback Page 6–41 Page 6–43 Page 6–46 Page 6–48 Page 6–49 Page 6–50 Page 6–53 Page 6–57 Page 6–61 5 Rated Volts (147) Direction Mask (94) Stop Owner (102) Data In A1 (111) Process 1 Par (127) Speed Control (77) Speed Control (77) Control Select (9) SL0-6 Logic Step 5 Rated Amps (170) Start Mask (95) Direction Owner (103) Data In A2 (112) Process 1 Scale (128) Encoder Type (152) PI Config (213) Flux Amps Ref (192) SL0-6 Logic Jump 5 Rated kW (171) Jog Mask (96) Start Owner (104) Data In B1 (113) Process 1 Txt 1 (129) Encoder PPR (46) PI Status (214) IR Drop Volts (194) SL0-6 Step Setting 5 Firmware Ver. (71) Reference Mask (97) Jog Owner (105) Data In B2 (114) Process 1 Txt 2 (130) Maximum Speed (151) PI Ref Select (215) Flux Up Time (200) SL0-6 Time 5 Cntrl Board Rev (251) Accel Mask (98) Reference Owner (106) Data In C1 (115) Process 1 Txt 3 (131) Motor Poles (153) PI Fdbk Select (216) Start Boost (48) SL0-6 Encoder Cnts 5 Rated CT Amps (148) Decel Mask (99) Accel Owner (107) Data In C2 (116) Process 1 Txt 4 (132) Speed KI (165) PI Reference (217) Run Boost (83) Current Step Rated CT kW (149) Fault Mask (100) Decel Owner (108) Data In D1 (117) Process 1 Txt 5 (133) Boost Slope (169) Speed KP* (164) PI Feedback (218) Rated VT Amps (198) MOP Mask (101) Fault Owner (109) Data In D2 (118) Process 1 Txt 6 (134) Break Voltage (50) Speed Error (166) PI Error (219) Rated VT kW (199) Traverse Mask (305) MOP Owner (110) Data Out A1 (119) Process 1 Txt 7 (135) Break Frequency (49) Speed Integral (167) PI Output (220) Drive Type (61) Sync Mask (308) Traverse Owner (306) Data Out A2 (120) Process 1 Txt 8 (136) Base Voltage (18) Speed Adder (168) KI Process (221) Logic Mask (92) Sync Owner (309) Data Out B1 (121) Process 2 Par (180) Base Frequency (17) Slip Adder (255) KP Process (222) Local Mask (93) Local Owner (179) Data Out B2 (122) Process 2 Scale (181) Motor NP RPM (177) PI Neg Limit (223) Maximum Voltage (20) Alarm Mask 1 (206) Data Out C1 (123) Process 2 Txt 1 (182) Motor NP Hertz (178) PI Pos Limit (224) Run/Accel Volts (317) Alarm Mask 2 (271) Data Out C2 (124) Process 2 Txt 2 (183) Encoder Counts (283) PI Preload (225) Sync Loss Sel (310) Data Out D1 (125) Process 2 Txt 3 (184) Enc Count Scale (282) Sync Loss Gain (311) Data Out D2 (126) Process 2 Txt 4 (185) Encoder Loss Sel (284) Sync Loss Comp (313) Alt Type 2 Cmd (315) Process 2 Txt 5 (186) Encoder Freq (63) Sync Loss Time (312) 3 4 Process 2 Txt 6 (187) Max Enc Counts (328) PWM Comp Time (333) 1 . Series B & Up Handheld HIM Only 4 Process 2 Txt 7 (188) Break Freq (334) 2 Reserved for Future Use 5 Process 2 Txt 8 (189) PWM Break Freq (334) 3 Firmware Version 3.001 & later 4 Stability Gain (324) 4 Firmware Version 4.001 & later 5 Firmware Version 5.001 & later 6 Firmware Version 6.001 & later Note: Parameters that appear in more than one group are shown in Bold – Parameter Numbers are shown in (parenthesis). An asterisk (*) indicates that the parameter was not functional at time of printing. 6–4 Programming Chapter Conventions Parameter descriptions adhere to the following conventions. 1. All parameters required for any given drive function will be con- tained within a group, eliminating the need to change groups to complete a function. 2. All parameters are documented as either having ENUMS or Engi- neering Units. ENUMS Parameter Number ➀ # [Parameter Name] Parameter Type ➁ Read Only or Read/Write Parameter description. Factory Default ➂ Drive Factory Setting Units Display / Drive ENUM Text / Internal Drive Units ➃ / ➄ Engineering Units Parameter Number ➀ # [Parameter Name] Parameter Type ➁ Read Only or Read/Write Parameter description. Display Units / Drive Units ➃,➄ User Units / Internal Drive Units Factory Default ➂ Drive Factory Setting Minimum Value ➅ Min Value Acceptable Maximum Value ➆ Max Value Acceptable ➀ Parameter Number Each parameter is assigned a number. The number can be used for process display setup, fault buffer interpretation or serial communication. ➁ Parameter Type 2 types of parameters are available: Read Only The value is changed only by the drive and is used to monitor values. Read/Write The value is changed through programming. This type can also be used to monitor a value. ➂ Factory Default This is the value assigned to each parameter at the factory. ➃ Display Units The units that appear on the HIM display. 2 types exist: ENUMS A language statement pertaining to the selection made or language description of bit function. Engineering Standard units such as; Hz, sec, volts, etc. ➄ Drive Units These are internal units used to communicate through the serial port, and to scale values properly when reading or writing to the drive. ➅ Minimum Value This is the lowest setting possible for parameters that do not use ENUMS. ➆ Maximum Value This is the highest setting possible for parameters that do not use ENUMS. 3. To help differentiate parameter names and display text from other text in this manual, the following conventions will be used:  Parameter Names will appear in [brackets]  Display Text will appear in “quotes”. Programming 6–5 This group of parameters consists of commonly viewed drive operating conditions such as motor speed, drive output voltage, current and command frequency. All parameters in this Metering group are Read Only and can only be viewed. Parameter Number 54 [Output Current] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the output current present at TB1, Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Amp / 4096 = 100% Drive Rated Amps terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Factory Default None Minimum Value 0.0 Maximum Value 200% Rated Drive Output Current Parameter Number 1 [Output Voltage] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the output voltage present at TB1, Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = 100% Drive Rated Volts terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 200% Rated Drive Output Voltage Parameter Number 23 [Output Power] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the output power present at TB1, Display Units / Drive Units 1 kilowatt / 4096 = 100% Drive Rated kW terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Factory Default None Minimum Value –200% Rated Drive Output Power Maximum Value +200% Rated Drive Output Power Parameter Number 53 [DC Bus Voltage] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the DC bus voltage level. Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = 100% Drive Rated Volts Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 200% DC Bus Voltage Max Parameter Number 66 [Output Freq] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the output frequency present at Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward TB1, terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Factory Default None Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value +400.00 Hz Parameter Number 65 [Freq Command] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency that the drive is Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward commanded to output. This command may come from any Factory Default None one of the frequency sources selected by [Freq Select 1] Minimum Value –400.00 Hz or [Freq Select 2]. Maximum Value +400.00 Hz Parameter Number 138-140 [Anlg In 0 Freq] Parameter Type Read Only [Anlg In 1 Freq] Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Factory Default None [Anlg In 2 Freq] Minimum Value 0.00 Hz These parameters displays the frequency command Maximum Value 400.00 Hz present at the specified analog input terminals. This value is displayed whether or not this is the active frequency command. 6–6 Programming Metering Parameter Number 63 [Encoder Freq] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency command present Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq at encoder input terminals of TB3. This value is displayed Factory Default None whether or not this is the active frequency command. Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value +400.00 Hz Frequency Incoming Encoder Pulse Rate = Displayed [Encoder PPR] Parameter Number 254 [Pulse Freq] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency command present Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq at pulse input terminals of TB2. This value is displayed Factory Default None whether or not this is the active frequency command. Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value +400.00 Hz Frequency Incoming Pulse Rate (Hz) = Displayed [Pulse Scale] Parameter Number 137 [MOP Freq] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency command from the Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq MOP. The MOP frequency command can be adjusted by Factory Default None TB3 (if present) and appropriate inputs are selected (see Minimum Value 0.00 Hz Maximum Value 400.00 Hz page 2–27). Some SCANport adapters, including the RIO Adapter, can also adjust the MOP frequency command. This value is displayed whether or not this is the active frequency command. Parameter Number 70 [Heatsink Temp] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the heatsink temperature of the Display Units / Drive Units 1° C / Deg. C drive. Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255° C Parameter Number 84 [Power OL Count] Parameter Type Read Only 2 Displays the percentage of accumulated I t for the drive Display Units / Drive Units 1 % / 4096 = 100% thermal overload protection. Running continuously above Factory Default None 115% of drive rated amps will accumulate a value of 100% and Minimum Value 0% generate a Power Overload Fault (F64). Maximum Value 200% Parameter Number 202 [Motor OL Count] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the percentage of accumulated Display Units / Drive Units 1 % / 4096 = 100% 2 I t for the motor overload protection. Running continuously at Factory Default None programmed [Overload Amps] will accumulate approximately Minimum Value 0% Maximum Value 200% 70%. Reduction of load will reduce the OL count. 100% value will generate an Overload Fault (F07). Parameter Number 4 [Last Fault] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the last drive fault. It is updated Display Units / Drive Units Fault Number / Fault Number whenever a new fault occurs. Factory Default None Minimum Value None Maximum Value None Programming 6–7 Metering Parameter Number 162 [Torque Current] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the amount of current that is in Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Amp / 4096 = 100% Drive Rated Amps phase with the fundamental voltage component. It is the Factory Default None current that is actually producing torque. Minimum Value –200% Drive Rating Maximum Value +200% Drive Rating Parameter Number 163 [Flux Current] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the amount of current that is out Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Amp / 4096 = 100% Drive Rated Amps of phase with the fundamental voltage component. It is the Factory Default None current that is producing motor flux. Minimum Value – 200% Drive Rating Maximum Value +200% Drive Rating Parameter Number 3 [% Output Power] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the % of drive rated output power Display Units / Drive Units 1 % / ±4096 = ±100% (kw). Refer to the Ratings Group or drive data nameplate. Factory Default None Minimum Value 200% Drive Rated Output Power Maximum Value +200% Drive Rated Output Power Parameter Number 2 [% Output Curr] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the % of drive rated output current. Display Units / Drive Units 1 % / 4096 = 100% Refer to the Ratings Group or drive data nameplate. Factory Default None Minimum Value 0% Maximum Value 200% Rated Drive Output Current Parameter Number 279 [Elapsed Run Time] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter displays the elapsed running time of the Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Hr / Hours x 10 drive. The meter is resettable to any value by Factory Default 0 reprogramming. Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 6553.5 Deceleration 6–8 Programming This group of parameters defines basic operation and should be programmed before initial use of the drive. For advanced programming and information on specific parameters, refer Setup to the flow chart on pages 6–2 & 6–3. Parameter Number 241 [Input Mode] Parameter Type Read and Write Selects the functions of inputs 1 & 2 at TB3 when an op- Display Units / Drive Units Mode Number / Selection tional interface card is installed. Refer to Input Mode Factory Default “Status” Selection in Chapter 2. This parameter cannot be changed Units Display Drive while the drive is running. Power to the drive must be cycled “Status” 1 before any changes will affect drive operation. “2WR-PWR “3 Wire” 2 DIP” provides a delay to the Start command. Drive will then “2 Wire” 3 start if Run & Stop commands are applied at the same time. “2WR-PWR DIP” 4 Parameter Number 5 [Freq Select 1] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which of the frequency sources is Factory Default “Adapter 1” currently supplying the [Freq Command] to the drive unless Units Display Drive [Freq Select 2] or [Preset Freq 1-7] is selected. “Use Last” 0 “Analog In 0” 1 “Analog In 1” 2 “Analog In 2” 3 “Pulse Ref” 4 Refer to [Pulse In Scale] Value “MOP” 5 “Adapter 1-6” 6-11 “Preset 1-7” 12-18 “Encoder” 19 Refer to [Encoder PPR] Value Firmware 5.001 & later “Step Logic” 20 Parameter Number 7 [Accel Time 1] Parameter Type Read and Write This value determines the time it will take the drive to ramp Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 from 0 Hz to [Maximum Freq]. The rate determined by this Factory Default 10.0 Sec value and [Maximum Freq] is linear unless [S Curve En- Minimum Value 0.0 Sec Maximum Value 3600.0 Sec able] is “Enabled.” It applies to any increase in command frequency unless [Accel Time 2] is selected. Parameter Number 8 [Decel Time 1] Parameter Type Read and Write This value determines the time it will take the drive to ramp Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 from [Maximum Freq] to 0 Hz. The rate determined by this Factory Default 10.0 Sec value and [Maximum Freq] is linear unless [S Curve En- Minimum Value 0.0 Sec able] is “Enabled.” It applies to any decrease in command Maximum Value 3600.0 Sec frequency unless [Decel Time 2] is selected. Accel/Decel Time Constant Speed Speed 0 Time Accel Time Decel Time 0 Acceleration Programming 6–9 Setup Parameter Number 16 [Minimum Freq] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the lowest frequency the drive will Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 Factory Default 0 Hz output. Minimum Value 0 Hz Maximum Value 120 Hz Parameter Number 19 [Maximum Freq] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the highest frequency the drive will output. Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 Factory Default 60 Hz This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Minimum Value 10 Hz running. Maximum Value 400 Hz Parameter Number 10 [Stop Select 1] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the stopping mode when the drive Factory Default “Coast” receives a valid stop command unless Units Display Drive [Stop Select 2] is selected. “Coast” 0 Causes the drive to turn off immediately. “DC Brake” 1 Drive defluxes the motor and then injects DC braking voltage into the motor. Requires a value in both [DC Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level]. “Ramp” 2 Drive decelerates to 0 Hz., then if [DC Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level] are greater than zero the holding brake is applied. If the values equal zero, then the drive turns off. Requires a value in [Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2]. “S-Curve” 3 Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in [Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2] x 2. “Ramp to Hold” 4 Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then injects holding brake per [DC Hold Level] (limited to 70% of drive rated amps) until a) a Start command is issued or b) the Enable input is opened. Parameter Number 36 [Current Limit] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the maximum drive output current that Display Units / Drive Units 1% of Max Drive Output Current / 4096 = 100% is allowed before current limiting occurs (the drive is limited Factory Default 150% to 160% internally). 150.0% Firmware 5.001 & later Minimum Value 20% of [Rated Amps] 0.0% Firmware 5.001 & later Maximum Value 300% of [Rated Amps] 300.0% Firmware 5.001 & later Parameter Number 232 [Current Lmt Sel] Parameter Type Read and Write Selects the source of the [Current Limit] setting for the Factory Default “Current Lmt” drive. When an external input is selected (0-10V or 4-20 Units Display Drive mA), the minimum signal (0V or 4 mA) sets 20% current “Current Lmt” 0 Use [Current Limit], param. 36. limit and the maximum signal (10V or 20mA) sets the value “Analog In 0” 1 programmed in [Current Limit]. “Analog In 1” 2 This parameter cannot be changed while drive is running. 6–10 Programming Setup Parameter Number 227 [Adaptive I Lim] Parameter Type Read and Write When ENABLED, this parameter maintains normal current Factory Default “Enabled” limit control to provide normal acceleration into medium to Units Display Drive high system inertia. “Disabled” 0 When DISABLED, this parameter applies a feed forward “Enabled” 1 command to acceleration, allowing quicker accel times from stopped to commanded speed with low system inertia. Parameter Number 303 [Current Limit En] Parameter Type Read and Write Enables or disables the software current limiting function Factory Default “Enabled” (does not disable voltage limiting). Units Display Drive “Disabled” 0 “Enabled” 1 Parameter Number 37 [Overload Mode] Parameter Type Read and Write 2 Factory Default “No Derate” This parameter selects the derating factor for the I T elec- tronic overload function. Motors designed to operate with wider Units Display Drive speed ranges need less overload derating. “Max Derate” 2 2:1 Speed Range Derate below 50% of Base Speed “Min Derate” 1 4:1 Speed Range. Derate below 25% of Base Speed “No Derate” 0 10:1 Speed Range. No Derating Overload Patterns No Derate Time to Trip vs. Current 1000 100 80 60 40 20 0 Min Derate 100 100 80 60 Cold 40 20 0 10 Max Derate Hot 100 80 60 40 20 115% 0 1 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 1 10 % of Base Speed Multiple of [Overload Amps] % of Load % of Load % of Load Time to Trip - Seconds Programming 6–11 Setup Parameter Number 38 [Overload Amps] Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate Full Load Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Amps / 4096 = Rated Amps Amps (FLA) for 1.15 SF motors. For 1.0 SF motors the Factory Default 115% of Drive Rating value should be set to 0.9 x nameplate FLA. 115.0% of Drive Rating Firmware 5.001 & later Minimum Value 20% of Drive Rated Amps 0.0% of Drive Rated Amps Firmware 5.001 & later Maximum Value 115% of Drive Rated Amps 115.0% of Drive Rated Amps Firmware 5.001 & later Parameter Number 203 [VT Scaling] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter scales the drive for VT ampere ratings. Factory Default “Disabled” Units Display Drive Important: This parameter must be set to “Disabled” when drive is used in a fibers application. “Disabled” 0 Disables Variable Torque Scaling “Enabled” 1 Enables Variable Torque Scaling This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running. Parameter Number 177 [Motor NP RPM] Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units / Drive Units 1 RPM / 1 RPM RPM. Factory Default 1750 RPM Minimum Value 60 RPM This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Maximum Value 24000 RPM running. Parameter Number 178 [Motor NP Hertz] Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 frequency. Factory Default 60 Hz Minimum Value 1 Hz This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Maximum Value 400 Hz running. Parameter Number 190 [Motor NP Volts] Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rated Volts volts. Factory Default Drive Rated Volts Minimum Value 0 Volts This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Maximum Value 2 x Drive Rated Volts running. Parameter Number 191 [Motor NP Amps] Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units / Drive Units 1 Amp / 4096 = Drive Rated Amps current. Factory Default Drive Rated Amps Minimum Value 0 Amps This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Maximum Value 2 x Drive Rated Amps running. 6–12 Programming This group contains parameters that are required to setup advanced functions of the drive Advanced for complex applications. Setup Parameter Number 16 [Minimum Freq] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the lowest frequency the drive will Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 output. Factory Default 0 Hz Minimum Value 0 Hz Maximum Value 120 Hz Parameter Number 19 [Maximum Freq] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the highest frequency the drive will Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 output. Factory Default 60 Hz Minimum Value 10 Hz This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running. Maximum Value 400 Hz Parameter Number 45 [PWM Frequency] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the carrier frequency for the sine cod- Display Units / Drive Units 2 KHz / KHz/2 ed PWM output waveform. Factory Default 2 KHz Minimum Value 2 KHz This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running. Maximum Value A & B Frame Drives = 8 kHz Refer to the Derating Guidelines in Appendix A. C Frame Drives & Up = 6 kHz Parameter Number 30 [Accel Time 2] Parameter Type Read and Write This value determines the time it will take the drive to ramp Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 from 0 Hz to [Maximum Freq]. The rate determined by this Factory Default 10.0 Sec value and [Maximum Freq] is linear unless [S Curve En- Minimum Value 0.0 Sec able] is “Enabled.” It applies to any increase in command Maximum Value 3600.0 Sec frequency unless [Accel Time 1] is selected. Parameter Number 31 [Decel Time 2] Parameter Type Read and Write This value determines the time it will take the drive to ramp Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 from [Maximum Freq] to 0 Hz. The rate determined by this Factory Default 10.0 Sec value and [Maximum Freq] is linear unless [S Curve En- Minimum Value 0.0 Sec able] is “Enabled.” It applies to any decrease in command Maximum Value 3600.0 Sec frequency unless [Decel Time 1] is selected. Synchronized Speed Change Function New Drive #2 Reference This function is typically used in an application where multiple drives, drive different functions on one machine and the line speed must be changed. New Drive #1 Reference To initiate the speed sync function: - The drive must be running. [Sync Time] - [Sync Time] must be set to a non-zero value. - [Freq Source] must be set to “Adapter 1-6” or “Preset 1-7.” Change Ref's Drive #1 & #2 - A SYNC input must be energized. Sync In Speed Sync Bit [Application Sts] The SYNC input can come from any of the programmable input terminals. Time Example: [TB3 Term 22 Sel] = “Sync” Important: The accel/decel/s-curve control is active during speed sync and will limit the rate of change of Important: Do not select more than one input terminal as the SYNC input. frequency if set “slower.” The sync input can also come through SCANport from one of the communication options, either as a “Type 1” or “Type 2” message. For further information, refer to the instructions supplied with the option. Also, see the section titled “Communications Data Information Format” in Appendix A. The usual sequence of events: - Energize the SYNC input. - The “Speed Sync” bit in [Application Sts] is set to “1”. - The drive “holds” the last frequency reference value. - The frequency command is changed and/or a different source is selected. - De-energize the SYNC input. - The drive will linearly ramp from the “held” reference to the new reference in a time set by [Sync Time]. - The “Speed Sync” bit in [Application Sts] is set to “0”. Speed Programming 6–13 Advanced Setup Parameter Number 307 [Sync Time] Parameter Type Read and Write The time it takes for the drive to ramp from the “held Factory Default 0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 frequency reference” to the “current frequency reference” Factory Default 0.0 Sec after the Sync input is de-energized. Refer to Minimum Value 0.0 Sec Synchronized Speed Change Function on page 6–12. Maximum Value 6000.0 Sec Parameter Number 10 [Stop Select 1] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the stopping mode when the drive Factory Default “Coast” receives a valid stop command unless [Stop Select 2] is Units Display Drive selected. “Coast” 0 Causes the drive to turn off immediately. “DC Brake” 1 Drive defluxes the motor and then injects DC braking voltage into the motor. Requires a value in both [DC Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level]. “Ramp” 2 Drive decelerates to 0 Hz., then if [DC Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level] are greater than zero the holding brake is applied. If the values equal zero, then the drive turns off. Requires a value in [Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2]. “S-Curve” 3 Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in [Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2] x 2. “Ramp to Hold” 4 Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then injects holding brake per [DC Hold Level] (limited to 70% of drive rated amps) until a) a Start command is issued or b) the Enable input is opened. Parameter Number 12 [DC Hold Time] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the amount of time that the Display Units / Drive Units 1 Second / Seconds x 10 [DC Hold Level] voltage will be applied to the motor when Factory Default 0.0 Sec the stop mode is set to either “DC Brake” or “Ramp.” [DC Minimum Value 0.0 Sec Maximum Value 90.0 Sec Hold Time] is ignored when the stop mode ([Stop Select 1], [Stop Select 2]) is set to “Ramp to Hold.” Parameter Number 13 [DC Hold Level] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the DC voltage applied to the motor to Display Units / Drive Units 1 % of [Rated Amps] / 4096 = 100% produce the selected current during braking, when the stop Factory Default 0 % mode is set to either “DC Brake,” “Ramp” or “Ramp to Minimum Value 0 % Hold.” If “Ramp to Hold” is the active stop mode, [DC Hold Maximum Value 150 % Level] will be clamped at 70%, even if higher values are ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material programmed. exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used to stop the motor. ! ATTENTION: This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking. Voltage Voltage Speed Speed 6–14 Programming Advanced Setup Brake-to-Stop Ramp-to-Stop Voltage Volts/Speed Volts/Speed Speed DC Hold DC Hold Time Time DC Hold Level DC Hold Level Stop Command Stop Command Time Time Ramp-to-Hold Reissuing a Start Command at this point will cause the drive to Restart and Ramp as Volts/Speed shown DC Hold Level Opening Enable Input instead of Stop Command Time reissuing a Start Command will cause drive to Stop Parameter Number 231 [Hold Level Sel] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the hold level source for [DC Hold Factory Default “DC Hold Lvl” Level]. The minimum signal level sets no DC hold, while Units Display Drive the maximum signal sets the value programmed in [DC “DC Hold Lvl” 0 Use [DC Hold Level], param. 13. Hold Level]. “Analog In 0” 1 This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is “Analog In 1” 2 running. Parameter Number 11 [Bus Limit En] Parameter Type Read and Write Enables the function that attempts to limit the drive DC bus Factory Default “Disabled” voltage to 110% of nominal voltage during rapid decel. If Units Display Drive bus voltage rises above the 110% level, [Bus Limit En] “Disabled” 0 Allow bus voltage to rise above reduces or stops the drive decel rate until bus voltage falls 110%. below the 110% level. “Enabled” 1 Limit bus voltage/decel ramp. Parameter Number 314 [Braking Chopper] Parameter Type Read and Write Not functional in the 1336 PLUS II Drive. Factory Default “Disabled” Units Display Drive “Disabled” 0 “Enabled” 1 Programming 6–15 Advanced Setup Parameter Number 41 [Motor Type] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter should be set to match the type of motor Factory Default “Induction” connected to the drive. Units Display Drive “Induction” 0 Requires no additional setting. “Sync Reluc” 1 [Slip @ F.L.A.] & [DC Hold Level] must be set to zero. [Stop Select 1 & 2] must be set to a selection other than “DC Brake.” “Sync PM” 2 [Slip @ F.L.A.] & [DC Hold Level] must be set to zero. [Stop Select 1 & 2] must be set to a selection other than “DC Brake.” Parameter Number 52 [Stop Select 2] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the stopping mode when the drive Factory Default “Coast” receives a valid stop command unless Units Display Drive [Stop Select 1] is selected. “Coast” 0 Causes the drive to turn off immediately. “DC Brake” 1 Drive defluxes the motor and then injects DC braking voltage into the motor. Requires a value in both [DC Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level]. “Ramp” 2 Drive decelerates to 0 Hz., then if [DC Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level] are greater than zero the holding brake is applied. If the values equal zero, then the drive turns off. Requires a value in [Decel Time 1/2]. “S Curve” 3 Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in [Decel Time 1/2] x 2. “Ramp to Hold” 4 Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then injects holding brake per [DC Hold Level] (limited to 70% of drive rated amps) until a) a Start command is issued or b) the Enable input is opened. Parameter Number 193 [KP Amps] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the proportional gain for the current limiting function Display Units / Drive Units NA / NA of the drive. Default values are chosen for high inertia Factory Default 100 loads. If faster accel is required, raising the gain will allow Minimum Value 25 Maximum Value 400 additional current to the motor. Excess gain settings may create unstable operation. Parameter Number 319 [Speed Brake En] Parameter Type Read and Write Enabling this feature allows faster deceleration by raising Factory Default “Disabled” the flux in the motor and increasing the losses. Speed Units Display Drive change braking is used in sensorless vector mode only “Disabled” 0 and is effective for motors up to 20 HP. “Enabled” 1 DC injection braking during decel Parameter Number 58 [Common Bus] Parameter Type Read and Write When enabled, internal precharge is disabled, allowing Factory Default “Disabled” common bus operation. “CB Precharge” must be selected Units Display Drive in [TB3 Term xx Sel]. “Disabled” 0 “Enabled” 1 6–16 Programming This group of parameters contains internally stored frequency settings. Frequency Set Parameter Number 5 [Freq Select 1] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which of the frequency sources Factory Default “Adapter 1” is currently supplying the [Freq Command] to the drive Units Display Drive unless [Freq Select 2] or [Preset Freq 1-7] is selected. “Use Last” 0 Refer to the Speed Select Input table in Chapter 2. “Analog In 0” 1 “Analog In 1” 2 “Analog In 2” 3 “Pulse Ref” 4 Refer to [Pulse In Scale] Value “MOP” 5 “Adapter 1-6” 6-11 “Preset 1-7” 12-18 “Encoder” 19 Refer to [Encoder PPR] Value Firmware 5.001 & later “Step Logic” 20 Parameter Number 6 [Freq Select 2] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which of the frequency sources Factory Default “Preset 1” is currently supplying the [Freq Command] to the drive Units Display Drive unless [Freq Select 1] or [Preset Freq 1-7] is selected. “Use Last” 0 Refer to the Speed Select Input table in Chapter 2. “Analog In 0” 1 “Analog In 1” 2 “Analog In 2” 3 “Pulse Ref” 4 Refer to [Pulse In Scale] Value “MOP” 5 “Adapter 1-6” 6-11 “Preset 1-7” 12-18 “Encoder” 19 Refer to [Encoder PPR] Value Firmware 5.001 & later “Step Logic” 20 Parameter Number 24 [Jog Frequency] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the frequency the drive will output Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 100 when it receives a valid jog command. Factory Default 10.0 Hz Minimum Value 0.0 Hz Maximum Value 400.0 Hz Parameter Number(s) 27-29 & 73-76 [Preset Freq 1] Parameter Type Read and Write [Preset Freq 2] Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 100 Factory Default 0.0 Hz [Preset Freq 3] Minimum Value 0.0 Hz [Preset Freq 4] Maximum Value 400.0 Hz [Preset Freq 5] [Preset Freq 6] [Preset Freq 7] These values set the frequencies that the drive will output when selected. Refer to Speed Select Input table in Chapter 2. Programming 6–17 Frequency Set Parameter Number(s) 32-34 [Skip Freq 1] Parameter Type Read and Write [Skip Freq 2] Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz Factory Default 400 Hz [Skip Freq 3] Minimum Value 0 Hz These values, in conjunction with [Skip Freq Band], create Maximum Value 400 Hz a range of frequencies at which the drive will not continu- ously operate. Parameter Number 35 [Skip Freq Band] Parameter Type Read and Write Determines the bandwidth around a skip frequency. The Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz actual bandwidth is 2 x [Skip Freq Band] –– one band Factory Default 0 Hz above and one band below the skip frequency. Minimum Value 0 Hz Maximum Value 15 Hz Example: [Skip Freq] = 20 Hz and [Skip Freq Band] = 4 Hz Bandwidth = 8 Hz (16-24 Hz) The output frequency will remain outside the total “band.” When the actual command crosses the actual skip fre- quency, the output will ramp through the entire band. Skip Frequency Band Frequency Command Frequency Skip + Band Skip Frequency Skip – Band Actual Drive Frequency Time Parameter Number 22 [MOP Increment] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the rate of increase or decrease to the [Freq Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Hertz/Second / 255=(78% of [Maximum Freq])/Sec Command] for each input at TB3 (if programmed). Factory Default 1.1 Hz/Sec Minimum Value 0 Hz/Sec Maximum Value (78% of [Maximum Freq]) / Sec Parameter Number 230 [Save MOP Ref] Parameter Type Read and Write If this parameter is enabled, the frequency command is- Factory Default “Disabled” sued by the MOP inputs will be saved to EEPROM (in the Units Display Drive event of power loss) and reused on power up. When dis- “Disabled” 0 abled, no value is saved and the MOP reference is reset “Enabled” 1 to zero on power up. Parameter Number 229 [Freq Ref SqRoot] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter activates the square root function for Factory Default “Disabled” 0-10V/4-20 mA inputs or signals sent through Adapters 1- Units Display Drive 6 when used as a frequency reference. If the input signal “Disabled” 0 varies with the square of speed, the parameter should be “Enabled” 1 set to “Enabled.” 6–18 Programming Frequency Set Parameter Number 264 [Pulse In Scale] Parameter Type Read and Write Provides a scaling factor for the pulse input. Display Units / Drive Units Factor / Pulses per Rev Factory Default 64 PPR Scale Incoming Pulse Rate (Hz) Minimum Value 1 = Factor Desired Command Freq. Maximum Value 4096 Example: 4 Pole Motor, 60 Hz = Max. Speed. The 1336-MOD-N1 option outputs 64 Hz/Hz. At full analog reference, the pulse input to the drive will be 60 Hz x 64 Hz/Hz = 3840 pulses/sec. 3840 Hz Scale Factor = = 64 60 Hz Parameter Number 46 [Encoder PPR] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the scaling for encoder feedback Display Units / Drive Units Factor / Pulses per Rev speed regulation. Enter the actual encoder pulses per Factory Default 1024 PPR revolution Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 4096 Programming 6–19 This group contains the necessary parameters to activate and program advanced features Feature of the drive. Select Parameter Number 43 [Dwell Frequency] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the frequency that the drive will immedi- Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 ately output (no Accel Ramp) upon a start command. This Factory Default 0.0 Hz parameter requires a programmed [Dwell Time]. Minimum Value 0.0 Hz Maximum Value 7.0 Hz Parameter Number 44 [Dwell Time] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the time the drive will continue to output Display Units / Units 1 Second / Seconds [Dwell Frequency] before ramping to [Freq Command]. Factory Default 0 Sec Minimum Value 0 Sec Maximum Value 10 Sec Dwell Time Maximum Frequency of Applied Voltage Dwell Time Dwell Frequency 0 0 Time Start Command Parameter Number 77 [Speed Control] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the type of speed modulation active Factory Default “Slip Comp” in the drive. Units Display Drive This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is “No Control” 0 Frequency regulation running. “Slip Comp” 1 Slip compensation “Speed Droop” 2 Negative slip compensation Important: “No Control” and “Phase Lock” are the only “Phase Lock” 3 Enable phase lock to pulse input available options for synchronous motors. “Encoder Fdbk” 4 Encoder feedback-closed loop If encoder feedback closed loop speed regulation is re- “Droop + Reg” 5 Enc. fdbk.-closed loop w/ active quired, “Encoder Fdbk” must be selected. droop “P Jump” 6 Traverse function “Process PI” 7 Closed loop PI control Parameter Number 42 [Slip @ F.L.A.] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the amount of automatic increase or de- Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 crease to the drive output to compensate for motor slip. Factory Default 1.0 Hz When [Speed Control] is set to “Slip Comp”, a percentage Minimum Value 0.0 Hz of this value proportional to output current is added to the Maximum Value 10.0 Hz drive output frequency. When [Speed Control] is set to “Droop”, a percentage of this value proportional to output current is subtracted from the drive output frequency. Sync RPM – Rated RPM x Rated Hz. Sync RPM 6–20 Programming Feature Select Parameter Number 195 [Slip Comp Gain] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter is the gain for the slip compensation and Display Units / Drive Units None adjusts the recovery rate after a load change. Factory Default 1 Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 40 Parameter Number 14 [Run On Power Up] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables the function that allows the drive Factory Default “Disabled” to automatically restart on Power Up. This parameter re- Units Display Drive quires that a two wire control scheme be installed at TB3 “Disabled” 0 and that a valid start contact be present. Refer to Input “Enabled” 1 Mode Selection in Chapter 2. ATTENTION: This parameter may only be used as outlined in NFPA79, “Under Voltage Protection.” Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this ! parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Parameter Number 85 [Reset/Run Tries] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the maximum number of times the drive Display Units / Drive Units 1 Try / Tries attempts to reset a fault and restart before the drive issues Factory Default 0 a “Max Retries Fault”. See Chapter 7 for a list of resettable Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 faults. Parameter Number 15 [Reset/Run Time] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the time between restart attempts when Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Second / Seconds x 100 [Reset/Run Tries] is set to a value other than zero. Factory Default 1.0 Sec Minimum Value 0.5 Sec Maximum Value 30.0 Sec Parameter Number 57 [S Curve Enable] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables the fixed shape S curve accel/ Factory Default “Disabled” decel ramp. Programmed accel/decel times are doubled if Units Display Drive [S Curve Time] is set to “0”. An adjustable S curve will be “Disabled” 0 created if [S Curve Time] is greater than zero. “Enabled” 1 Parameter Number 56 [S Curve Time] Parameter Type Read and Write This creates an adjustable s curve ramp. If S Curve Time Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 is < the programmed accel/decel time, the actual ramp will Factory Default 0.0 Sec be the sum of the two. If S Curve Time is ≥ the programmed Minimum Value 0.0 Sec accel/decel times, a fixed S curve will be created whose time Maximum Value 1800.0 Sec is double the programmed accel/decel time. Programming 6–21 Feature Select Fixed S Curve S Curve Time + Accel Time 1 or 2 S Curve Time + Decel Time 1 or 2 Accel Time = 2 x [Accel Time 1 or 2] Case 1 Decel Time = 2 x [Decel Time 1 or 2] Adjustable S Curve Speed Case 1 (see adjacent diagram) [S Curve Time] < [Accel Time 1 or 2], and [S Curve Time] < [Decel Time 1 or 2], then Accel Time = [Accel Time 1 or 2] + [S Curve Time], and Decel Time = [Decel Time 1 or 2] + [S Curve Time] Accel Time Decel Time Time 1 or 2 1 or 2 Case 2 [S Curve Time] ≥ [Accel Time 1 or 2], and [S Curve Time] ≥ [Decel Time 1 or 2], then Case 2 Accel Time = 2 x [Accel Time 1 or 2], and Decel Time = 2 x [Decel Time 1 or 2] Speed Note: If [S Curve Time] ≥ programmed accel/decel times Accel Time Decel Time any further increase in [S Curve Time] will have no effect 1 or 2 1 or 2 on the total accel/decel times. Time Parameter Number 47 [Language] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the language for the HIM display. Factory Default “English” Units Display Drive To return to the default language (English) after an alter- nate language has been inadvertently selected: “English” 0 “FRANCAIS” 1 a) Cycle drive power “ESPANOL” 2 b) Press the Increment key 5 times “Italiano” 3 c) Press Enter “Deutsch” 4 d) Press the Increment key 2 times “Japanese” 5 Not available with v5.001 & later e) Press Enter “Portuguese” 6 “Nederlands” 7 Parameter Number 155 [Flying Start En] Parameter Type Read and Write This value enables the flying start function and chooses Factory Default “Disabled” the method to be used. The drive will first search from the Units Display Drive direction it was last running. “Disabled” 0 Firmware 5.001 & later – When restarting high inertia “Speed Search” 1 Freq. sweep -see [FStart For./Rev.] loads, use the longer speed searches to match load speed. “Use Encoder” 2 Requires feedback encoder This may minimize Overvolatge and Overcurrent faults. B Frame & Up drives Only “Track Volts” 3 Read back EMF from sync. pm motor Firmware 5.001 & later “Speed Srch 10s” 4 Frequency sweep takes 10 seconds Firmware 5.001 & later “Speed Srch 20s” 5 Frequency sweep takes 20 seconds Firmware 5.001 & later “Speed Srch 40s” 6 Frequency sweep takes 40 seconds ATTENTION: The “Speed Search” selection should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be demagnetized ! during braking. 6–22 Programming Feature Select Parameter Number 156 [FStart Forward] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the frequency at which the forward speed Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz search begins. If this value exceeds [Maximum Freq], Factory Default 60 Hz speed search will begin at [Maximum Freq]. Forward Minimum Value 0 Hz search ends at zero Hertz or when motor speed is found. Maximum Value 400 Hz Parameter Number 157 [FStart Reverse] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the frequency at which the reverse speed Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz search begins. If this value exceeds [Maximum Freq], Factory Default 0 Hz speed search will begin at [Maximum Freq]. Reverse Minimum Value 0 Hz Maximum Value 400 Hz search ends at zero Hertz or when motor speed is found. Parameter Number 228 [LLoss Restart] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the reconnect mode after recovery Factory Default “Track Volts” from a line loss condition. Units Display Drive “Speed Search” 1 Frequency sweep “Use Encoder” 2 Read feedback “Track Volts” 3 Read motor volts Firmware 5.001 & later “Speed Srch 10s” 4 Frequency sweep takes 10 seconds Firmware 5.001 & later “Speed Srch 20s” 5 Frequency sweep takes 20 seconds Firmware 5.001 & later “Speed Srch 40s” 6 Frequency sweep takes 40 second Drive Units=“4” Firmware 4.001 & before “Last Speed” 7 Start at last output Parameter Number 256 [Line Loss Mode] Parameter Type Read/Write This parameter sets the drive reaction to a loss of input Factory Default “LoBus>Off” voltage and is often referred to as Inertia Ride Through. Units Display Drive If the drive is used to determine loss of AC input (as op- “LoBus>Off” 0 Turn off output on –15% Vbus posed to an external device), it will monitor the falling DC “Input>Off” 1 Not functional at time of printing. bus voltage. When Vbus falls below 85% of nominal, a Turns off output on “line loss” condition is issued and an alarm bit is set. High Speed Input = True The line loss mode selected, along with [Line Loss Fault] “LoBus>Decel” 2 Regulates Vbus using deceleration Active on –15% Vbus and [Low Bus Fault] will determine the drives response to a loss of input. “Input>Decel” 3 Not functional at time of printing. Regulates Vbus using deceleration  With this parameter set to “LoBus>Off” and . . . Active on High Speed Input = True [Line Loss Fault] is . . . - Enabled a fault is issued 0.5 seconds after a “line loss” condition. - Disabled a fault will not be issued. [Low Bus Fault] is . . . - Enabled a fault is issued at the bus undervoltage trip level. - Disabled a fault will not be issued.  With this parameter set to “LoBus>Decel” and [Line Loss Fault] & [Low Bus Fault] are disabled – the drive will decelerate the output frequency following motor speed to create a regenerative condition that maintains Vbus at 85% nominal. The amount of available me- chanical energy determines the length of “ride through.” If this parameter = “LoBus>Off,” then [LLoss Restart] de- termines the reconnect scheme for the motor. If this parameter is set to “LoBus>Decel,” no reconnect scheme is required. Programming 6–23 Feature Select Power Loss Ride-Thru [DC Bus Memory] Important: The drive has the ability to ride through short power interruptions. However, power loss ride-thru requires [DC Bus Memory] – [Loss Recover] careful system design to guard against problems associated with rapid return of the AC line voltage after a line voltage [DC Bus Memory] – [Line Loss Volts] Line Loss Fault [Ride Thru Volts] dip. Consult the factory with your application details before [Min Bus Volts] attempting to program your drive to ride through an AC line voltage dip of more than 15% below the nominal voltage. Undervoltage Fault 6 parameters are associated with the line loss functionality. [Line Loss Mode] selects the method of detecting a power line loss and the response to a line loss. T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 [Line Loss Volts] adjusts the level at which a line loss is recognized when [Line Loss Mode] is set to “LoBus>Off” or T1 = Loss of Power “LoBus>Decel.” T2 = Line Loss Recognized by Drive [Loss Recover] adjusts the level at which the drive T3 = Power Returned recognizes the input power has returned when [Line Loss T4 = Recovery from Line Loss Initiated by Drive Mode] is set to “LoBus>Off’ or “LoBus>Decel.” T5 = Minimum Bus Voltage Level, Undervoltage Fault Point [Ride Thru Volts] sets the bus voltage that the inertia ride T6 = 500 ms Time Out, Line Loss Fault thru function will attempt to regulate. If [Line Loss Mode] is set to “LoBus>Decel,” a line loss condition activates the inertia ride thru function. The load is then decelerated such that the energy absorbed from the mechanical load balances the losses, and bus voltage is maintained. [Min Bus Volts] sets the bus voltage below which the drive will disable firing of the output devices. [Line Loss Restart] selects the timing and method of reconnecting the motor after power returns. Operation when [Line Loss Mode] is set to “LoBus>Off.” If a power interruption occurs (T1) the drive will continue to operate from stored DC bus energy until the bus voltage drops to the level set by [DC Bus Memory] – [Line Loss Volts] (T2). At this point, the drive output is turned off and a 500 ms timer is started. One of the following conditions will then occur: 1. The bus voltage will fall below the level set by [Min Bus Volts] (T5) before the timer expires. This will generate a bus Undervoltage Fault if [Low Bus Fault] is set to ”enabled.” 2. The bus voltage will remain below [DC Bus Memory] – [Loss Recover], but above [Min Bus Voltage] and the timer expires (T6). If [Line Loss Fault] is set to “enabled,” a Line Loss Fault will be issued. 3. The input power is restored (T3) and the bus voltage rises above [DC Bus Memory] – [Loss Recover] (T4) before the timer expires. This allows the drive to turn its output on and resume running according to the selection programmed in [Line Loss Restart]. Operation when [Line Loss Mode] is set to “LoBus>Decel.” Operation in this mode is similar to above, except that the drive will attempt to maintain the bus voltage at the level programmed in [Ride Thru Volts]. If a power interruption occurs (T1) the drive will continue to operate from stored DC bus energy until the bus voltage drops to the level set by [DC Bus Memory] – [Line Loss Volts] (T2). At this point, the drive will start a 500 ms timer and attempt to regulate the bus voltage at the level set by [Ride Thru Volts]. One of the following conditions will then occur: 1. The drive is unable to extract enough energy from the mechanical load, and the bus voltage will fall below the level set by [Min Bus Volts] (T5) before the timer expires. This will generate a bus Undervoltage Fault if [Low Bus Fault] is set to ”enabled.” 2. The bus voltage will be maintained at the level programmed in [Ride Thru Volts] and the timer expires. If [Line Loss Fault] is set to “enabled,” a Line Loss Fault will be issued. Important: [Ride Thru Volts] should be set below the level set by [DC Bus Memory] – [Loss Recover], below the level set by [DC Bus Memory] – [Line Loss Volts], and above the level set by [Min Bus Voltage]. If [Ride Thru Volts] is set above the recovery level, the drive will oscillate in and out of line loss. If [Ride Thru Volts] is set above the line loss level, as soon as a line loss is detected, the drive will immediately decelerate as quickly as the decel setting allows until the bus voltage increases to the ride-thru level. If [Ride Thru Volts] is set below [Min Bus Voltage], the bus voltage will be allowed to drop below the minimum required and the drive output will be turned off. 3. The input power is restored (T3) and the bus voltage rises above [DC Bus Memory] – [Loss Recover] (T4) before the timer expires. The drive will then accelerate back to the commanded speed using the programmed acceleration rate. Operation when [Line Loss Mode] is set to “Input>Off” or “Input>Decel.” When operating in either of these modes, the line loss condition is detected by an external source. The drive is then signaled through the Pulse input that a loss of power has occurred. Drive operation is the same as when [Line Loss Mode] is set to “LoBus>Off” or “LoBus>Decel,” except for the following: If an inertia ride-thru is initiated, the drive attempts to regulate the bus at the value in [DC Bus Memory] rather than the value in [Ride Thru Volts]. 6–24 Programming Feature Select Parameter Number 320 [Line Loss Volts] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the bus voltage below which the drive recognizes a Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts line loss. Specifically: If [DC Bus Voltage] drops below Factory Default 59/117/146 Volts [DC Bus Memory] – [Line Loss Volts] and if [Line Loss Minimum Value 40/80/100 Volts Mode] is set to 0 or 2, the [Drive Alarm 1]. Line Loss bit Maximum Value 200/400/500 Volts will be set and the drive will take the selected line loss action. Parameter Number 321 [Loss Recover] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the bus voltage above which the drive recognizes a Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts line loss recovery. Specifically: If [DC Bus Voltage] rises Factory Default 29/59/73 Volts above [DC Bus Memory] – [Loss Recover] and if [Line Minimum Value 20/40/50 Volts Maximum Value 200/400/500 Volts Loss Mode] is set to 0 or 2, the “Line Loss” bit of [Drive Alarm 1] is cleared and the drive recovers from line loss. This parameter should be set lower than [Line Loss Volts] (i.e. for a higher bus voltage), otherwise the drive will cycle in and out of line loss. Parameter Number 322 [Ride Thru Volts] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the bus voltage that the inertia ride thru function will Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts attempt to regulate. If [Line Loss Mode] = “LoBus>Decel,” Factory Default 29/59/73 Volts a line loss condition activates the inertia ride thru function. Minimum Value 40/80/100 Volts The load is decelerated such that the energy absorbed Maximum Value 200/400/500 Volts from the mechanical load balances the losses – bus voltage is maintained. This parameter should be set greater than [Loss Recover] (i.e. for a lower bus voltage). Otherwise the drive will cycle in and out of line loss. NOTE: If [Line Loss Mode] = “Input>Decel,” line loss operation is similar but the inertia ride thru function regulates the bus to the value in [DC Bus Memory]. Parameter Number 323 [Min Bus Volts] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the bus voltage below which the drive will disable Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts firing. The “Line Loss” flag in [Drive Alarm 1] is always set. Factory Default 194/388/485 Volts If [Low Bus Fault] = “Enabled” the drive faults with an F04 Minimum Value 100/200/250 Volts Maximum Value 200/400/500 Volts “Undervolt Fault.” This means that even if [Line Loss Mode] = “Input>Decel” dropping below minimum bus disables firing and signals a line loss.: ATTENTION: To guard against possible drive damage, this parameter MUST To check the minimum safe value for [Minimum Bus]: be set such that firing is disabled at a bus voltage higher than the bus voltage ! - Set [Low Bus Fault] = “Disabled”. at which the power supply for the gate drive circuits is lost. See the procedure - Set [Line Loss Fault] = “Disabled”. at left to check the minimum value for this parameter. - Select [DC Bus Voltage] on the HIM. - With the drive stopped, disconnect power from the drive. - Watch the HIM display for the lowest voltage reading before the HIM loses power. Parameter Number 78 [Traverse Inc] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the time period of increasing frequency. Setting this Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Second / Seconds x 100 parameter to zero disables the P Jump function. Factory Default 0.00 Sec Minimum Value 0.00 Sec Maximum Value 30.00 Sec Programming 6–25 Feature Select Parameter Number 304 [Traverse Dec] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the time period of decreasing frequency. Setting this Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Second / Seconds x 100 parameter to zero disables the traverse function. Factory Default 0.00 Sec Minimum Value 0.00 Sec Maximum Value 30.00 Sec Traverse Function Traverse Period P-Jump (+) 40 Maximum Traverse (+) Output P-Jump (–) Reference Maximum Traverse (–) 20 Traverse 0 P-Jump –20 10 20 30 40 50 60 Seconds Parameter Number 79 [Max Traverse] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the peak amplitude of speed modulation. Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = [Maximum Freq] Factory Default 0.00 Hz Minimum Value 0.00 Hz Maximum Value 50% of [Maximum Freq] Parameter Number 80 [P Jump] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the slip or inertia compensation amplitude Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = [Maximum Freq] of speed modulation. Factory Default 0.00 Hz Minimum Value 0.00 Hz Maximum Value 25% of [Maximum Freq] Parameter Number 288 [Bus Regulation] Parameter Type Read and Write Enabling this parameter causes the drive to adjust output Factory Default “Disabled” frequency based on the DC bus voltage. If the drive senses Display Drive Units rising bus voltage, it will increase the output frequency to “Disabled” 0 reduce the regenerative energy from the motor that is “Enabled” 1 [Bus Limit En] must also be “Enabled” causing the bus voltage to rise. This will reduce the risk of an overhauling load causing an Overvolt Fault. Parameter Number 290 [Load Loss Detect] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables the function that detects an Factory Default “Disabled” indicated loss of load on the motor. A fault (F20) or alarm Units Display Drive condition will occur if [Torque Current] falls below [Load “Disabled” 0 Loss Level] for a time period greater than [Load Loss “Alarm” 1 Requires a value in [Load Loss Time] Time]. “Fault” 2 Requires a value in [Load Loss Time] Generates an F20 fault Hertz 6–26 Programming Feature Select Parameter Number 291 [Load Loss Level] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the torque current level below which a load loss fault/ Display Units / Drive Units 1 % / 4096 = 100% warning will occur. The value is expressed as a Factory Default 50% percentage of programmed [Motor NP Amps]. Minimum Value 20% 0% Firmware 6.001 & later Maximum Value 100% Parameter Number 292 [Load Loss Time] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the amount of time the drive [Torque Current] is Display Units / Units 1 Second / Seconds below [Load Loss Level], before the action set in [Load Factory Default 0 Sec Loss Detect] is taken. Minimum Value 0 Sec Maximum Value 30 Sec Parameter Number 325 [Bus Reg Level] – Firmware 4.001 & later Parameter Type Read and Write [Max Bus Volts] Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts Factory Default 358/716/895 Volts When this parameter is set to the minimum value, the Minimum Value 358/716/895 Volts drive DC bus voltage is limited to 110% of nominal voltage. Maximum Value 403/807/1009 Volts [Bus Limit En] must be “Enabled” for the drive to limit the bus voltage. This setting is used to move the trigger point for regulation above the turn-on point for dynamic brake or regeneration packages. Programming 6–27 This group of parameters contains the programming options for digital drive inputs/outputs. Digital I/O Parameter Number 241 [Input Mode] Parameter Type Read and Write Selects the functions of inputs 1 & 2 at TB3 when an op- Display Units / Drive Units Mode Number / Selection tional interface card is installed. Refer to Input Mode Factory Default “Status” Selection in Chapter 2. This parameter cannot be changed Units Display Drive while the drive is running. Power to the drive must be cycled “Status” 1 before any changes will affect drive operation. “2WR-PWR “3 Wire” 2 DIP” provides a delay to the Start command. Drive will then “2 Wire” 3 start if Run & Stop commands are applied at the same time. “2WR-PWR DIP” 4 Parameter Number 242-247 [TB3 Term 22 Sel] Parameter Type Read and Write [TB3 Term 23 Sel] Factory Default “Rev/For” Input 3 (terminal 22) [TB3 Term 24 Sel] “Jog” Input 4 (terminal 23) “Aux Fault” Input 5 (terminal 24) [TB3 Term 26 Sel] “Speed Sel 3" Input 6 (terminal 26) [TB3 Term 27 Sel] “Speed Sel 2" Input 7 (terminal 27) “Speed Sel 1" Input 8 (terminal 28) [TB3 Term 28 Sel] Units Display Drive This parameter selects the functionality of the input at TB3, “Unused” 0 terminals 22-28. “Jog” 1 In most cases, if multiple inputs are programmed with the “Speed Sel 1-3” 2-4 same function, they will be logically “OR’d.” “1st Accel” 5 “2nd Accel” 6 Selections that use one input for multiple functions (A) can (A) “2 Acc/1 Acc” 7 2 Acc = Closed, 1 Acc = Open have only one terminal select for that option. If multiple “1st Decel” 8 terminals are selected with these options, a “Mult Prog “2nd Decel” 9 Input” fault (F61) will occur. (A) “2 Dec/1 Dec” 10 2 Dec = Closed, 1 Dec = Open Only one input can select “Run Reverse” and it can only “Clear Fault” 11 be selected if [Input Mode] is set to “2 Wire.” Multiple inputs “Aux Fault” 12 will cause a “Mult Prog Input” fault (F61) and selecting “3 “Local Ctrl” 13 Wire” will cause a “Ill Prog Input” fault (F62). “Traverse” 14 If the drive has direction control from a bipolar analog input, “Sync” 15 no direction control functions (B) can be selected. An “Ill “PI Enable” 16 Prog Input” fault (F62) will be generated. See Chapter 7 “PI Reset” 17 for fault information. “Dig Pot Up” 18 Firmware 5.001 & later – “DC Bus Drop” is used to allow “Dig Pot Dn” 19 enabling and disabling the line loss level set in [Line Loss (A) “Stop Type” 20 Volts]. If this input is set, the line loss level will be set at (B) “Forward” 21 default (82% DC Bus Level). When the input is off, the (B) “Reverse” 22 value set in [Line Loss Volts] is used. The [Line Loss Mode] (A/B) “Rev/For” 23 Rev = Closed, For = Open must be set at default (“LoBus>Off”) to turn the drive off “Run Reverse” 24 when low bus levels occur. “CB Precharge” 25 Firmware 5.001 & later “DC Bus Drop” 26 Firmware 5.001 & later “SL Input 1” 27 Firmware 5.001 & later “SL Input 2” 28 Parameter Number 55 [Input Status] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the on/off status of inputs 1-8 at Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TB3 if an optional interface card is installed. Input 1 - TB3-19 A Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1 (ex- Input 2 - TB3-20 cept Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Input 4 - TB3-23 Input 3 - TB3-22 Input 5 - TB3-24 Input 6 - TB3-26 Input 8 - TB3-28 Input 7 - TB3-27 6–28 Programming Digital I/O Parameter Number 158, 174-176 [CR1 Out Select] Parameter Type Read and Write [CR2 Out Select] Factory Default “At speed” CR1 [CR3 Out Select] “Running” CR2 “Fault” CR3 [CR4 Out Select] “Alarm” CR4 This parameter sets the condition that changes the state Units Display Drive of the output contacts at TB2 terminals 10 & 11 (CR1), 11 “Fault” 0 Any fault & 12 (CR2), 13, 14, 15 (CR3) and 16, 17, 18 (CR4). “Alarm” 1 Any unmasked alarm A change of state may mean energize or de-energize the “Running” 2 Outputting frequency relay, since some relays may energize on power-up and “At Speed” 3 Output = command de-energize when the selected condition occurs. “At Freq” 4 Requires value in [Dig Out Freq] “At Current” 5 Requires value in [Dig Out Curr] A red LED located on the Main Control Board indicates the “At Torque” 6 Requires value in [Dig Out Torque] status of the CR3 contact. The LED will illuminate when “Current Lmt” 7 In overload the contacts at terminals 13 & 14 of TB2 are closed and “Mtr Overload” 8 At present levels O.L. will occur terminals 14 & 15 are open. “Line Loss” 9 Line loss in progress “Drive Power” 10 Full input volts present, bus charged “Drive Ready” 11 All necessary commands present “Forward Run” 12 Forward direction “Reverse Run” 13 Reverse direction “Braking” 14 DC brake mode (stopping or holding) “Economize” 15 Auto economizer active “Auto Reset” 16 Attempt to reset fault & restart drive “At Temp” 17 Requires value in [Dig At Temp] “PI Max Error” 18 Requires value in [PI Max Error] “Remote” 19 Set by [Remote CR Output] Firmware 5.001 & later “Step Logic” 20 Set by [SLx Step Setting] SL Output Parameter Number 159 [Dig Out Freq] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the trip point for any digital output relay Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Max Freq (CR1-4 – see above) that is programmed to “At Factory Default 0.00 Hz Frequency”. The relay will be energized when the value is Minimum Value 0.00 Hz exceeded. Maximum Value Programmed [Maximum Freq] Parameter Number 160 [Dig Out Current] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the trip point for any digital output relay Display Units / Drive Units 0% / 4096 = 100% of Drive Rated Amps (CR1-4 – see above) that is programmed to “At Current”. Factory Default 0 % The relay will be energized when the value is exceeded. Minimum Value 0 % Maximum Value 200 % Parameter Number 161 [Dig Out Torque] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the trip point for any digital output relay Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Amps / 4096 = Rated Torque Amps (CR1-4 – see above) that is programmed to “At Torque”. Factory Default 0.0 Amps The relay will be energized when the value is exceeded. Minimum Value 0.0 Amps Maximum Value 200% of [Rated Amps] Parameter Number 267 [Dig At Temp] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the heatsink temperature trip point for Display Units / Drive Units 1° C / Deg. C any digital output relay (CR1-4 – see above) that is Factory Default 120° C programmed to “At Temp.” The relay will be energized Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255° C when this value is exceeded. See also [Drive Status 2], bit 13 and [Drive Alarm 1], bit 10. Programming 6–29 Digital I/O Parameter Number 293 [PI Max Error] Parameter Type Read and Write Used with the process PI loop and sets the PI error value Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward which activates CR1-4 (if selected).The relay(s) will be ac- Factory Default Maximum Freq Forward tivated when [PI Error] exceeds this value. Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value 400.00 Hz Parameter Number 280 [Pulse Out Select] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the source value that drives pulse Factory Default “Output Freq” output. Units Display Drive Range “Output Freq” 0 See [Output Freq] “Encoder Freq” 1 See [Encoder Freq] “Acc/Dec Freq” 2 NOTE: Output frequency command of the drive directly at the output of the accel/decel ramp generator. It does not include any modification due to selected speed regulation mode via [Speed Control]. Parameter Number 281 [Pulse Out Scale] Parameter Type Read and Write Provides a scaling factor for pulse output. Display Units / Drive Units Factor / Factor Factory Default 1 Pulse Output Rate = Hz x [Pulse Out Scale] Minimum Value 1 The pulse output will not provide a rate lower than 21 Hz. Maximum Value 64 A command less than 21 Hz will generate 0 Hz output. To Example: provide smooth operation across a wide speed range, se- [Pulse Out Select] is set to “Output Freq” and drive is programmed for [Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz. lect the maximum scale factor possible. When the drive output is 60 Hz, the Pulse Output Rate is adjustable from 60 Hz (60 x 1) to 3840 Hz (60 x 64). Parameter Number 264 [Pulse In Scale] Parameter Type Read and Write Provides a scaling factor for the pulse input. Display Units / Drive Units Factor / Pulses per Rev Factory Default 64 PPR Scale Incoming Pulse Rate (Hz) Minimum Value 1 = Factor Desired Command Freq. Maximum Value 4096 Example: 4 Pole Motor, 60 Hz = Max. Speed. The 1336-MOD-N1 option outputs 64 Hz/Hz. At full analog reference, the pulse input to the drive will be 60 Hz x 64 Hz/Hz = 3840 pulses/sec. 3840 Hz Scale Factor = = 64 60 Hz Parameter Number 327 [At Time] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the delay time for the activation of the CR1-4 relays. Display Units / Units 0.01 Second / Seconds x 100 The relay is activated at Start + [At Time] seconds. This Factory Default 0.00 Sec delay affects all relays. Minimum Value 0.00 Sec Maximum Value 360.00 Sec Parameter Number 326 [Remote CR Output] Parameter Type Read and Write Individual bits control relay outputs when selected with Factory Default xxxx0000 [CR1-4 Out Select]. 1 = Energize Coil. This parameter is Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 reset to the default on power-up. CR1 Output Example: CR2 Output If [CR2 Out Select] is set to “Remote,” bit 1 of this parameter CR3 Output will control CR2. CR4 Output A Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1 Not Used (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0). 6–30 Programming This group of parameters contains the programming options for analog drive inputs/outputs. Analog I/O Parameter Number 237, 239, 248 [Anlg In 0 Lo] Parameter Type Read and Write [Anlg In 1 Lo] Display Units / Drive Units 0.1% / 920 = 100% Factory Default 0.0% [Anlg In 2 Lo] Minimum Value –300.0% Sets the percentage of voltage or current from Input 0, 1 Maximum Value +300.0% or 2 that represents [Minimum Freq]. Parameter Number 238, 240, 249 [Anlg In 0 Hi] Parameter Type Read and Write [Anlg In 1 Hi] Display Units / Drive Units 0.1% / 920 = 100% Factory Default 100.0% [Anlg In 2 Hi] Minimum Value –300.0% Sets the percentage of voltage or current from Input 0, 1 Maximum Value +300.0% or 2 that represents [Maximum Freq]. Parameter Number 90 [Analog Trim En] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables Analog In 0 as a trim input. Setting Factory Default “Disabled” this parameter to “Enable” creates a trim signal to the ac- Units Display Drive tive frequency source at Analog In 0. The trim value is “Disabled” 0 ±10% of [Maximum Freq]. “Enabled” 1 Minimum Input = –10% Trim Mid-Point Input = No Trim Maximum Input = +10% Trim Parameter Number 250 [Anlg Signal Loss] Parameter Type Read and Write Selects the drive reaction to a loss of analog input Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 signal. This signal could represent commanded fre- quency, PI feedback, or others. Input 0 Signal Loss for Pot – 1=Yes, 0=No Bits 0-2 define the input as a pot with wiper loss Input 1 Signal Loss for Pot – 1=Yes, 0=No detect and will generate an “Open Pot Fault” (F09). Input 2 Signal Loss for Pot – 1=Yes, 0=No Input 0 Signal Loss for 4-20mA/2-10V – 1=Yes, 0=No Bits 3-5 define the input as offset (4mA, 2V) with loss Input 1 Signal Loss for 4-20mA/2-10V – 1=Yes, 0=No detect below that value (see below). Input 2 Signal Loss for 4-20mA/2-10V – 1=Yes, 0=No Not Used Not Used Parameter Number 150 [4-20mA Loss Sel] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the drives response to a loss of Factory Default “Min/Alarm” analog input signal (input below 2V or 4mA). Requires that Units Display Drive Action the loss selection bits for [Anlg Signal Loss] be set to “1.” “Min/Alarm” 0 Freq - Drive outputs [Minimum Freq] and issues an alarm. This function is active only when the input is configured PI - Alarm issued. in [Freq Select 1/2], [PI Ref Select], [PI Fdbk Select]. “Stop/Fault” 1 Freq - Drive stops and issues “Hertz Err Fault”. Important: Depending on the type of input configuration PI - Drive stops and issues “Hertz Err Fault”. (i.e. Frequency or PI), the resultant action will vary (see “Hold/Alarm” 2 Freq - Drive maintains last output freq & issues an alarm. “Action” column at right). PI - Alarm issued. “Max/Alarm” 3 Freq - Drive outputs [Maximum Freq] and issues an alarm. When configured in [PI Ref Select] or [PI Fdbk Select], only PI - Alarm issued. the alarm and fault conditions will occur. The drive will not “Pre1/Alarm” 4 Freq - Drive outputs [Preset Freq 1] and issues an alarm. perform a speed change. PI - Alarm issued. Programming 6–31 Analog I/O Parameter Number 25, 274 [Anlg Out 0 Sel] Parameter Type Read and Write [Anlg Out 1 Sel] Factory Default “Frequency” Out 0 “Current” Out 1 This parameter selects the source value that will drive the Units Display Drive Range analog output. This output is intended for metering only and should not be used as process control feedback. “Frequency” 0 Zero to programmed [Maximum Freq] “Current” 1 Zero to 200% of Drive Rated “Torque” 2 Zero to 200% of Drive Rated “Power” 3 Zero to 200% of Drive Rated “Voltage” 4 Zero to 200% of Drive Rated “% Motor OL” 5 Zero to 200% of Drive Rated “% Drive OL” 6 Zero to 200% of Drive Rated “Encoder” 7 See [Encoder Freq] “Speed Error” 8 See [Speed Error] “PI Reference” 9 See [PI Reference] “PI Feedback” 10 See [PI Feedback] “PI Error” 11 See [PI Error] “PI Output” 12 See [PI Output] Parameter Number 154, 278 [Anlg Out 0 Offset] Parameter Type Read and Write [Anlg Out 1 Offset] Factory Default “Disabled” Units Display Drive This parameter enables the voltage or current offset for the analog output. This internal value offsets 0-20mA to 4- “Disabled” 0 20mA and 0-10V to 2-10V. “Enabled” 1 Parameter Number 233, 277 [Anlg Out 0 Abs] Parameter Type Read and Write [Anlg Out 1 Abs] Factory Default “Enabled” Units Display Drive This parameter selects whether a signed value or absolute value is used for analog out. “Disabled” 0 “Enabled” 1 Parameter Number 234, 275 [Anlg Out 0 Lo] Parameter Type Read and Write [Anlg Out 1 Lo] Display Units / Drive Units 0.1% / 4096 = 100% Factory Default 0.0% Sets the percentage of voltage or current output that rep- Minimum Value –300.0% resents the low end of the “Range” listed in [Anlg Out Sel]. Maximum Value +300.0% Parameter Number 235, 276 [Anlg Out 0 Hi] Parameter Type Read and Write [Anlg Out 1 Hi] Display Units / Drive Units 0.1% / 4096 = 100% Factory Default 100.0% Sets the percentage of voltage or current output that rep- Minimum Value –300.0% resents the high end of the “Range” listed in [Anlg Out Maximum Value +300.0% Sel].Example: To get 150% of current to equal 10V/20mA, set this parameter to 150%. Parameter Number 252, 253 [Slot A Option] Parameter Type Read Only [Slot B Option] Factory Default “Standard” Units Display Drive Displays the catalog number of the analog I/O option board currently installed in slots A and/or B. “Standard” 0 “LA1” 1 “LA2” 2 “LA3” 3 “LA4” 4 “LA5” 5 “LA6” 6 “LA7” 7 “Undefined” 8 Board not recognized 6–32 Programming This group of parameters allows configuring, viewing and clearing drive faults. Faults Parameter Number 86-89 [Fault Buffer 0] Parameter Type Read and Write [Fault Buffer 1] Factory Default None [Fault Buffer 2] Units Display Drive “0” 0 Last Fault [Fault Buffer 3] “1” 1 Fault from Buffer 0 These parameters store the last (4) faults that occur. “2” 2 Fault from Buffer 1 “3” 3 Fault from Buffer 2 Parameter Number 51 [Clear Fault] Parameter Type Read and Write Selecting “Clear Fault” and pressing Enter will clear any Factory Default “Ready” faults and return the drive to ready status. Units Display Drive “Ready” 0 “Clear Fault” 1 Parameter Number 82 [Cur Lim Trip En] Parameter Type Read and Write This setting determines the drive response when the hard- Factory Default “Disabled” ware current limit is exceeded. The current limit is Units Display Drive approximately 180% of [Rated VT Amps] for B Frame “Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated - C.L. Activated drives & up, and approximately 250% of [Rated VT Amps] “Enabled” 1 Diag C Lim Flt Generated for A Frame drives. Parameter Number 226 [Shear Pin Fault] Parameter Type Read and Write Enabling this parameter allows the drive to generate a Factory Default “Disabled” Shear Pin Fault (F63) if the output amps exceed the pro- Units Display Drive grammed software current limit value in [Current Limit]. “Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated When set to “Not Accel” the fault will not be enabled until “Enabled” 1 Fault Generated, All Conditions the drive is “at speed.” “Not Accel” 2 No Fault Generated during Accel Parameter Number 201 [Motor OL Fault] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables or disables the motor overload Factory Default “Enabled” protection feature of the drive. Units Display Drive “Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated “Enabled” 1 Fault Generated Parameter Number 268 [Motor Therm Flt] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables or disables the motor thermal pro- Factory Default “Enabled” tection feature of the drive. The LA6 option board must be Units Display Drive installed. “Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated “Enabled” 1 Fault Generated Parameter Number 40 [Line Loss Fault] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables or disables a Power Loss Fault Factory Default “Disabled” (F03), 0.5 seconds after a Line Loss in Progress alarm. Units Display Drive “Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated “Enabled” 1 Power Loss Fault Generated Programming 6–33 Faults Parameter Number 81 [Blwn Fuse Flt] Parameter Type Read and Write Enabling this parameter will allow monitoring of the bus Factory Default “Enabled” fuse (in 30 kW/40 HP and up drives) and cause a “Blwn Units Display Drive Fuse Flt” (F58). “Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated “Enabled” 1 Blwn Fuse Flt Generated Parameter Number 91 [Low Bus Fault] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter enables or disables the drive fault condition Factory Default “Enabled” for bus voltage below the Bus Undervoltage Trip value set Units Display Drive by [Min Bus Volts]. “Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated “Enabled” 1 Undervolt Fault Generated Parameter Number 207 [Fault Data] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter displays fault related parameter numbers Display Units / Drive Units Parameter # / Parameter # or bit array information. Certain faults generate additional Factory Default None information to aid fault diagnosis. See Chapter 7 for further Minimum Value 1 information. Maximum Value 255 Parameter Number 143 [Flt Motor Mode] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the motor mode active at the time Factory Default None of the last fault. Units Display Drive “1” 1 Power up sequence in progress “2” 2 Motor connected, drive off “3” 3 DC boost being applied “4” 4 Motor running at [Dwell Frequency] “5” 5 Motor accelerating “6” 6 Motor at command speed “7” 7 Motor decelerating “8” 8 Motor coasting “9” 9 Motor under DC braking “10” 10 Waiting for fault reset - returns to 0 “11” 11 Start mode “12” 12 Flying start search enable “13” 13 Flying start w/encoder in process Parameter Number 144 [Flt Power Mode] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the power mode active at the time Factory Default None of the last fault. These values can be helpful in trouble- Units Display Drive shooting for a condition causing a fault. “1” 1 Power up sequence in progress “2” 2 Precharge in progress “3” 3 Bus voltage being stored in memory “4” 4 Ready for run cmnd. after powerup “5” 5 Power stage diagnostics running “6” 6 Line loss detection occurred “7” 7 Ready for run command after stop “8” 8 Drive running “9” 9 Motor flux decay delay “10” 10 DC braking in progress “11” 11 Drive fault occurred “12” 12 Flying start search enabled “13” 13 Deceleration in progress “14” 14 SCR wake mode “15” 15 SCR check mode “16” 16 SCR wait mode 6–34 Programming Faults Parameter Number 145 [Fault Frequency] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter stores and displays the last Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq. [Output Freq] prior to a fault. Factory Default None Minimum Value 0.00 Hz Maximum Value 400.00 Hz Parameter Number 146 [Fault Status 1] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter stores and displays the Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 last [Drive Status 1] prior to a fault. Bits 0-7 are displayed on lower half of Enabled Reference Local line 2 on HIM display, while, bits 8-15 are Running ID Adapter ID displayed on the upper half of line 2. Command Direction Reference 15 14 13 12 Local 11 10 9 0 = Reverse A Status description (bit ENUM) is dis- Freq Select 1 0 0 0 0 TB3 0 0 0 1 = Forward Preset Freq 1 0 0 0 1 played on line 1 (except Series A HIMs 1001 Actual Direction Preset Freq 2 0 0 1 0 2010 below version 3.0). Preset Freq 3 0 0 1 1 0 = Reverse 3011 1 = Forward Preset Freq 4 0 1 0 0 4100 Preset Freq 5 0 1 0 1 5101 Accelerating Preset Freq 6 0 1 1 0 6110 Decelerating Preset Freq 7 0 1 1 1 Unused 1 1 1 Alarm Freq Select 2 1 0 0 0 Faulted Adapter 1 1 0 0 1 At Speed Adapter 2 1 0 1 0 Adapter 3 1 0 1 1 Adapter 4 1 1 0 0 Adapter 5 1 1 0 1 Adapter 6 1 1 1 0 Jog Frequency 1 1 1 1 Parameter Number 286 [Fault Status 2] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter stores and displays the last [Drive Status 2] prior to a fault. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bits 0-7 are displayed on lower half of line 2 on HIM At Temp At Freq display, while, bits 8-15 are displayed on the upper Startup Auto Reset At Current half of line 2. Economize At Torque PI Max Error A Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line Braking Current Lmt 1 (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Reverse Run Mtr Overload Forward Run Line Loss Drive Ready Drive Power Parameter Number 173 [Fault Alarms 1] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter stores and displays the last alarm conditions present prior to a Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 fault. Refer to Chapter 7 for further alarm information. Auto Reset Bus Charging A Status description (bit ENUM) is Motor OL Trip Hardware Current Limit displayed on line 1 (except Series A 4-20 mA Loss Motoring Current Limit HIMs below version 3.0). Phase Loss Regenerating Current Limit Sync Loss Regenerating Voltage Limit Heatsink Temp Line Loss In Progress Auxiliary Input Mtr Overload Ground Warning Motor Stalled Programming 6–35 Faults Parameter Number 287 [Fault Alarms 2] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter stores and displays the last alarm conditions present prior to a Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 fault. Refer to Chapter 7 for further alarm information. Voltage Check Motor Therm Unused Load Loss Enc Cnt Max A Status description (bit ENUM) is Enc Cnt Set Encoder Loss displayed on line 1 (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Parameter Number 39 [Flt Clear Mode] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls the method for clearing faults. Factory Default “Enabled” Units Display Drive “Disabled” 0 Faults cleared only by cycling power “Enabled” 1 Faults cleared by issuing a valid stop command (only through TB3/HIM) or cycling power - see Bit 3 of the Logic Control Structure in Appendix A. Parameter Number 204 [Ground Warning] Parameter Type Read and Write Enables the Ground Warning fault (F57) when the drive Factory Default “Disabled” senses ground current in excess of 2 amperes (approxi- Units Display Drive mate). Refer to Chapter 7 for further information. “Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated “Enabled” 1 Ground Warning Generated Parameter Number 330 [Phase Loss Mode] Parameter Type Read and Write Enables the function that detects a phase loss or the Factory Default “Disabled” current rating has been exceeded in the drive if powered Units Display Drive on single-phase line. A fault (F49) or alarm condition will “Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated occur if the DC bus ripple voltage exceeds the level in “Alarm” 1 Generates a Phase Loss Alarm [Phase Loss Level]. “Fault” 2 Generated F49 Input Phase Fault Parameter Number 331 [Phase Loss Level] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the DC bus ripple voltage above which a phase loss Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Volts / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts fault/alarm will occur. The sensitivity for detecting a blown Factory Default 9.0/18.0/22.5 Volts fuse on a three-phase system can be increased by 12.4/24.7/30.9 Volts Firmware 6.001 & later Minimum Value 5.1/10.1/12.7 Volts lowering the setting for this parameter. Maximum Value 22.5/45.0/56.2 Volts 45.0/90.0/112.5 Volts Firmware 6.001 & later Parameter Number 332 [Precharge Fault] Parameter Type Read and Write Enables or disables the Precharge Fault, which indicates Factory Default “Enabled” insufficient DC bus charging 20 seconds after power-up. Units Display Drive “Disabled” 0 No Fault Generated “Enabled” 1 Precharge Fault Generated Parameter Number 379 [Motor OL Ret] – Firmware 6.001 & later Parameter Type Read and Write When enabled, the accumulated motor overload count will Factory Default “Disabled” be stored on power-down and restored on power-up. From Units Display Drive that point, normal overload operation continues. When the “Disabled” 0 Motor OL count not saved value is changed from enabled to disabled the motor “Enabled” 1 Motor OL count saved on power- overload count will be reset to 0. down and restored on power-up 6–36 Programming This group of parameters contains values that can be helpful in explaining the operation of the drive. Drive status, direction, control and alarm conditions as well as drive ratings are Diagnostics included. Parameter Number 59 [Drive Status 1] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the actual oper- Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 ating condition in binary format. Bits 0-7 are displayed on lower half of Enabled line 2 on HIM display, while, bits 8-15 are Reference Local Running ID Adapter ID displayed on the upper half of line 2. Command Direction Reference 15 14 13 12 Local 11 10 9 A Status description (bit ENUM) is dis- 0 = Reverse 1 = Forward Freq Select 10 00 0 TB3 0 0 0 played on line 1 (except Series A HIMs Preset Freq 1 0 0 0 1 1001 Actual Direction below version 3.0). Preset Freq 2 0 0 1 0 2010 0 = Reverse Preset Freq 3 0 0 1 1 3011 1 = Forward Preset Freq 4 0 1 0 0 4100 Accelerating Preset Freq 5 0 1 0 1 5101 Decelerating Preset Freq 6 0 1 1 0 6110 Alarm Preset Freq 7 0 1 1 1 Unused 1 1 1 Faulted Freq Select 21 00 0 At Speed Adapter 1 1 0 0 1 Adapter 2 1 0 1 0 Adapter 3 1 0 1 1 Adapter 4 1 1 0 0 Adapter 5 1 1 0 1 Adapter 6 1 1 1 0 Jog Frequency 1 1 1 1 Parameter Number 236 [Drive Status 2] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the actual operating con- dition in binary format. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bits 0-7 are displayed on lower half of line 2 on HIM At Temp At Freq display, while, bits 8-15 are displayed on the upper Startup Auto Reset At Current half of line 2. Economize At Torque PI Max Error A Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line Braking Current Lmt 1 (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Reverse Run Mtr Overload Forward Run Line Loss Drive Ready Drive Power Parameter Number 316 [Application Sts] Parameter Type Read Only Displays status of Speed Sync and Traverse functions. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Speed Sync – 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Traverse – 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Not Used Parameter Number 60 [Drive Alarm 1] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which alarm condition is present when bit 6 of [Drive Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Status 1] is high (set to 1). Refer to Chap- ter 7 for further alarm information. Auto Reset Bus Charging Motor OL Trip Hardware Current Limit A Status description (bit ENUM) is dis- 4-20 mA Loss Motoring Current Limit played on line 1 (except Series A HIMs Phase Loss Regenerating Current Limit below version 3.0). Sync Loss Regenerating Voltage Limit Heatsink Temp Line Loss In Progress Auxiliary Input Mtr Overload Ground Warning Motor Stalled Programming 6–37 Diagnostics Parameter Number 269 [Drive Alarm 2] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which alarm condition is present when bit 6 of [Drive Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Status 1] is high. Refer to Chapter 7 for further alarm information. Voltage Check Motor Therm Unused Load Loss Enc Cnt Max A Status description (bit ENUM) is Enc Cnt Set Encoder Loss displayed on line 1 (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Parameter Number 205 [Latched Alarms 1] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter “stores” the [Drive Alarm 1] indications (see above). Bits will re- Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 main set (high/1), even if the alarm condition no longer exists. The bit(s) Auto Reset Bus Charging must be programmed to zero to release Motor OL Trip Hardware Current Limit the stored indications. 4-20 mA Loss Motoring Current Limit Phase Loss Regenerating Current Limit A Status description (bit ENUM) is dis- Sync Loss Regenerating Voltage Limit played on line 1 (except Series A HIMs Heatsink Temp Line Loss In Progress below version 3.0). Auxiliary Input Mtr Overload Ground Warning Motor Stalled Parameter Number 270 [Latched Alarms 2] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter “stores” the [Drive Alarm 2] indications (see above). Bits will re- Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 main set (high/1), even if the alarm condition no longer exists. The bit(s) Voltage Check Motor Therm Unused must be programmed to zero to release Enc Cnt Max Load Loss the stored indications. Enc Cnt Set Encoder Loss A Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1 (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Parameter Number 55 [Input Status] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the on/off status of inputs 1-8 at Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TB3 if an optional interface card is installed. Input 1 - TB3-19 A Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1 (ex- Input 2 - TB3-20 cept Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Input 4 - TB3-23 Input 3 - TB3-22 Input 5 - TB3-24 Input 6 - TB3-26 Input 8 - TB3-28 Input 7 - TB3-27 6–38 Programming Diagnostics Parameter Number 62 [Freq Source] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency source currently Factory Default “Use Last” commanding the drive. Units Display Drive “Use Last” 0 “Analog In 0” 1 “Analog In 1” 2 “Analog In 2” 3 “Pulse Ref” 4 Refer to [Pulse In Scale] Value “MOP” 5 “Adapter 1-6” 6-11 “Preset 1-7” 12-18 “Encoder” 19 Refer to [Encoder PPR] Value Firmware 5.001 & later “Step Logic” 20 “Jog Sel” 20 “21” in Firmware 5.001 & later “AutoTune Ref” 21 “22” in Firmware 5.001 & later Parameter Number 65 [Freq Command] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency that the drive is Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward commanded to output. This command may come from any Factory Default None one of the frequency sources selected by [Freq Select 1] Minimum Value –400.00 Hz or [Freq Select 2]. Maximum Value +400.00 Hz Parameter Number 69 [Drive Direction] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter displays the commanded running Factory Default None direction. Units Display Drive “Forward” 0 “Reverse” 1 Parameter Number 26 [Stop Mode Used] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the active stop mode. Factory Default “Coast” Units Display Drive “Coast” 0 See [Stop Select 1] on page 6–9 “DC Brake” 1 See [Stop Select 1] on page 6–9 “Ramp” 2 See [Stop Select 1] on page 6–9 “S Curve” 3 See [Stop Select 1] on page 6–9 “Ramp to Hold” 4 See [Stop Select 1] on page 6–9 Parameter Number 141 [Motor Mode] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the motor mode. Factory Default None Units Display Drive “1” 1 Power up sequence in progress “2” 2 Motor connected, drive off “3” 3 DC boost being applied “4” 4 Motor running at [Dwell Frequency] “5” 5 Motor accelerating “6” 6 Motor at command speed “7” 7 Motor decelerating “8” 8 Motor coasting “9” 9 Motor under DC braking “10” 10 Waiting for fault reset - returns to 0 “11” 11 Start mode “12” 12 Flying start search enable “13” 13 Flying start w/encoder in process Programming 6–39 Diagnostics Parameter Number 142 [Power Mode] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the power mode. Factory Default None Units Display Drive “1” 1 Power up sequence in progress “2” 2 Precharge in progress “3” 3 Bus voltage being stored in memory “4” 4 Ready for run command after powerup “5” 5 Power stage diagnostics running “6” 6 Line loss detection occurred “7” 7 Ready for run command after stop “8” 8 Drive running “9” 9 Motor flux decay delay “10” 10 DC braking in progress “11” 11 Drive fault occurred “12” 12 Flying start search enabled “13” 13 Deceleration in progress “14” 14 SCR wake mode “15” 15 SCR check mode “16” 16 SCR wait mode Parameter Number 67 [Output Pulses] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the number of output cycles for Display Units / Drive Units 1 Pulse / Pulses the PWM waveform. The count rolls over at 65535. Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Parameter Number 72 [Current Angle] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the angle, in degrees, of displace- Display Units / Drive Units 1 Deg / 255 = 360 Deg ment between output voltage and output current. The Factory Default None cosine of this number is an approximation of output power factor. Parameter Number 70 [Heatsink Temp] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the heatsink temperature of the Display Units / Drive Units 1° C / Deg. C drive. Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255° C Parameter Number 64 [Set Defaults] Parameter Type Read and Write Setting this parameter to “Defaults Init” resets all parame- Factory Default “Ready” ters to their factory values. Units Display Drive “Ready” 0 Display after function complete. “Store to EE” 1 “Rcll frm EE” 2 “Default Init” 3 Resets all parameters to factory settings. 6–40 Programming Diagnostics Parameter Number 212 [DC Bus Memory] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the nominal DC bus voltage level. Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / Volts This value is used to determine line loss, overvoltage, de- Display Volts cel frequency and other points. Additionally, the Bus Limit Enable function, as well as the Line Loss Mode alarm and recovery points are determined from this value. Parameter Number 272 [Meas. Volts] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the measured output voltage Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts present at terminals U, V & W (T1, T2 & T3). Factory Default None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 200% Rated Drive Output Voltage Parameter Number 172 [EEPROM Cksum] Parameter Type Read Only The value of this parameter provides a checksum value Display Units / Drive Units None that indicates a change in drive programming has occurred. Programming 6–41 This group contains a number of “Read Only” parameters that display drive operating char- acteristics. Ratings Parameter Number 147 [Rated Volts] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated input voltage of the drive. Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / Volts Display Drive Rated Input Voltage Parameter Number 170 [Rated Amps] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated output current of the Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Amp / Amps x 10 drive based on the CT/VT selection. Display Drive Rated Output Amps Parameter Number 171 [Rated kW] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated kW of the drive based Display Units / Drive Units kW / kW x 100 on the CT/VT selection. Display Drive Rated Output kW Parameter Number 71 [Firmware Ver.] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the version number of the drive Display Units / Drive Units None / Version x 100 firmware. Display 0.00 Parameter Number 251 [Cntrl Board Rev] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the revision number of the drive Display Units / Drive Units None / Version x 100 Main Control Board. Display 0.00 Parameter Number 148 [Rated CT Amps] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated output current of the Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Amp / Amps x 10 drive. Display Drive Rated Output Amps Parameter Number 149 [Rated CT kW] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated CT kW of the drive. Display Units / Drive Units kW / kW x 100 Display Drive Rated Output kW Parameter Number 198 [Rated VT Amps] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated output current of the Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Amp / Amps x 10 drive. Display Drive Rated Amps Parameter Number 199 [Rated VT kW] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the rated VT kW of the drive. Display Units / Drive Units kW / kW x 100 Display Drive Rated kW 6–42 Programming Ratings Parameter Number 61 [Drive Type] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays a decimal number which can be Display 1336F- . . . Display 1336F- . . . Display 1336F- . . . Display 1336F- . . . translated into the drive catalog number by using the ad- 8449 AQF05 8710 BRF30 12841 BP400 13074 C100 jacent chart. Refer to Chapter 1 for an explanation of the 8450 AQF07 8711 BRF50 12842 BP450 13075 C125 catalog numbers. 8451 AQF10 8712 BRF75 12828 BX250 13076 C150 8452 AQF15 8713 BRF100 12829 B300 13077 C200 8453 AQF20 8714 BRF150 12822 B350 13083 C250 8454 AQF30 8715 BRF200 12830 B400 13091 CX300 8455 AQF50 12832 B450 13085 C300 12810 B015 8456 AQF75 12811 B020 12834 B500 13078 C350 12823 B600 13095 CP350 12552 A007 12812 B025 12843 B700 13086 C400 12553 A010 12813 B030 12836 B800 13096 CP400 12554 A015 12824 BX040 13088 C450 12555 A020 12814 B040 8963 CWF10 12556 A025 12815 B050 8965 CWF20 13097 CP450 13090 C500 12557 A030 12816 BX060 8966 CWF30 13098 CP500 12558 A040 12825 B060 8967 CWF50 13089 C600 12559 A050 12817 B075 8968 CWF75 13079 C650 12560 A060 12818 B100 8969 CWF100 12561 A075 12819 B125 8970 CWF150 13099 C700 13092 C800 12562 A100 12826 BX150 8971 CWF200 12563 A125 12820 B150 13068 C025 12821 B200 8705 BRF05 13069 C030 8706 BRF07 12827 B250 13070 C040 12838 BP250 8707 BRF10 13071 C050 8708 BRF15 12839 BP300 13072 C060 8709 BRF20 12840 BP350 13073 C075 Programming 6–43 This group of parameters contains binary masks for all control functions. The masks control which adapters can issue control commands. Masks Each mask contains a bit for each adapter. Individual bits Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Mask can be set to “Zero” to lockout control by an adapter or set TB3 to “1” to permit an adapter to have control. Adapter 1 A Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1 (ex- Adapter 2 cept Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Adapter 3 Adapter 4 Adapter 5 Adapter 6 LAx Parameter Number 94 [Direction Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can issue forward/ Factory Default 01111110 reverse commands. Units Display Drive If [Freq Select 1] or [Freq Select 2] is set to “Analog In 0” “0” 0 Deny Control and an Analog Option Board with bipolar input (LA6, LA7) “1” 1 Permit Control is installed, that input (designated “Analog In 0”) will have exclusive ownership of direction. Bit 7 of [Direction Mask] must not be set to “0” and no other device can have claimed ownership of direction (i.e. TB3 - Run Reverse). If either condition is true, a fault will be issued. Parameter Number 95 [Start Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can issue start Factory Default 01111111 commands. Units Display Drive “0” 0 Deny Control “1” 1 Permit Control Parameter Number 96 [Jog Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can issue jog Factory Default 01111111 commands. Units Display Drive “0” 0 Deny Control “1” 1 Permit Control Parameter Number 97 [Reference Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can select an al- Factory Default 01111111 ternate reference; [Frequency Sel 1], [Frequency Sel 2] or Units Display Drive preset speeds. “0” 0 Deny Control “1” 1 Permit Control Parameter Number 98 [Accel Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can select [Accel Factory Default 01111111 Time 1] and [Accel Time 2]. Units Display Drive “0” 0 Deny Control “1” 1 Permit Control 6–44 Programming Masks Parameter Number 99 [Decel Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can select [Decel Factory Default 01111111 Time 1] and [Decel Time 2] Units Display Drive “0” 0 Deny Control “1” 1 Permit Control Parameter Number 100 [Fault Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can reset a fault. Factory Default 01111111 Units Display Drive “0” 0 Deny Control “1” 1 Permit Control Parameter Number 101 [MOP Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters can issue MOP Factory Default 01111111 commands to the drive. Units Display Drive “0” 0 Deny Control “1” 1 Permit Control Parameter Number 305 [Traverse Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write Controls which SCANport adapters are permitted to Factory Default 01111111 enable the traverse function. Units Display Drive “0” 0 Deny Control “1” 1 Permit Control Parameter Number 308 [Sync Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write Controls which SCANport adapters are permitted to Factory Default 01111111 enable the sync function. Units Display Drive “0” 0 Deny Control “1” 1 Permit Control Parameter Number 92 [Logic Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write Determines which adapters can control the drive. If the bit Factory Default 01111111 for an adapter is set to “0,” the adapter will have no control Units Display Drive functions except for stop. In addition, the adapter can be “0” 0 Deny Control removed from the drive while power is applied without “1” 1 Permit Control causing a serial fault. Parameter Number 93 [Local Mask] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter controls which adapters are allowed to take Factory Default 01111111 exclusive control of drive logic commands (except stop). Units Display Drive Exclusive “local” control can only be taken while the drive “0” 0 Deny Control is stopped. “1” 1 Permit Control Programming 6–45 Masks Parameter Number 206 [Alarm Mask 1] Parameter Type Read and Write Controls which alarm conditions will ac- Factory Default 1111111111111111 tivate the alarm contact (refer to Chapter 2 - TB2) and set the alarm bit (bit 6) in Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 [Drive Status 1]. Auto Reset Bus Charging A Status description (bit ENUM) is dis- Motor OL Trip Hardware Current Limit played on line 1 (except Series A HIMs 4-20 mA Loss Motoring Current Limit below version 3.0). Phase Loss Regenerating Current Limit Sync Loss Regenerating Voltage Limit Heatsink Temp Line Loss In Progress Auxiliary Input Mtr Overload Ground Warning Motor Stalled Parameter Number 271 [Alarm Mask 2] Parameter Type Read and Write Controls which alarm conditions will ac- Factory Default 1111111111111111 tivate the alarm contact (refer to Chapter 2 - TB2) and set the alarm bit (bit 6) in Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 [Drive Status 1]. Voltage Check Motor Therm Setting the bit to “1” allows the alarm to Unused Load Loss Enc Cnt Max occur. Setting the bit to “0” causes the Encoder Loss Enc Cnt Set drive to ignore that alarm. A Status description (bit ENUM) is dis- played on line 1 (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0). 6–46 Programming This group of parameters contains binary information to display which group of adapters are issuing control commands. Owners Each Owner Parameter contains a bit for each adapter. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Owners Display The drive will set an adapter’s bit to “1” when that adapter TB3 is issuing a logic command and to “Zero” when no com- Adapter 1 mand is being issued. Adapter 2 A Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1 (ex- Adapter 3 cept Series A HIMs below version 3.0). Adapter 4 Adapter 5 Adapter 6 Not Used Parameter Number 102 [Stop Owner] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapters are presently is- Units Display Drive suing a valid stop command. “0” 0 Stop Input Not Present “1” 1 Stop Input Present Parameter Number 103 [Direction Owner] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter currently has ex- Units Display Drive clusive control of direction changes. “0” 0 Non-Owner If [Freq Select 1] or [Freq Select 2] is set to “Analog In 0” “1” 1 Current Owner and an Analog Option Board with bipolar input (LA6, LA7) is installed, that input (designated “Analog In 0”) will have exclusive ownership of direction. Bit 7 of [Direction Mask] must not be set to “0” and no other device can have claimed ownership of direction (i.e. TB3 - Run Reverse). If either condition is true, a fault will be issued. Parameter Number 104 [Start Owner] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapters are presently is- Units Display Drive suing a valid start command. “0” 0 Start Input Not Present “1” 1 Start Input Present Parameter Number 105 [Jog Owner] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapters are presently is- Units Display Drive suing a valid jog command. “0” 0 Jog Input Not Present “1” 1 Jog Input Present Parameter Number 106 [Reference Owner] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter currently has the Units Display Drive exclusive control of the selection of the command frequen- “0” 0 Non-Owner cy source. “1” 1 Current Owner Parameter Number 107 [Accel Owner] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter has exclusive con- Units Display Drive trol of selecting [Accel Time 1] or [Accel Time 2]. “0” 0 Non-Owner “1” 1 Current Owner Programming 6–47 Owners Parameter Number 108 [Decel Owner] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter has exclusive con- Units Display Drive trol of selecting [Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2]. “0” 0 Non-Owner “1” 1 Current Owner Parameter Number 109 [Fault Owner] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter is presently reset- Units Display Drive ting a fault. “0” 0 Non-Owner “1” 1 Current Owner Parameter Number 110 [MOP Owner] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapters are currently is- Units Display Drive suing increases or decreases in MOP Command “0” 0 Non-Owner Frequency. “1” 1 Current Owner Parameter Number 306 [Traverse Owner] Parameter Type Read Only Displays which SCANport adapter is presently enabling Units Display Drive the traverse function. “0” 0 Non-Owner “1” 1 Current Owner Parameter Number 309 [Sync Owner] Parameter Type Read Only Displays which SCANport adapter is presently enabling Units Display Drive the sync function. “0” 0 Non-Owner “1” 1 Current Owner Parameter Number 179 [Local Owner] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays which adapter has requested ex- Units Display Drive clusive control of all drive logic functions. If an adapter is “0” 0 Non-Owner in local lockout, all other functions (except stop) on all other “1” 1 Current Owner adapters are locked out and non-functional. Local control can only be obtained when the drive is not running. 6–48 Programming This group of parameters contains the parameters needed for an optional communications adapter to communicate with the drive. Adapter I/O These parameters determine the parameter number to Parameter Number 111-118 which PLC output data table or SCANport device image Parameter Type Read and Write information will be written. Refer to the A-B Single Point Display Units / Drive Units Parameter # / Parameter # Remote I/O Adapter manuals or other SCANport device 1336 PLUS II SCANport Device manual for data link information. [Data In A1] [Data In A2] [Data In B1] [Data In B2] [Data In C1] [Data In C2] [Data In D1] [Data In D2] These parameters determine the parameter number Parameter Number 119-126 Parameter Type Read and Write whose value will be read into the PLC input data table or Display Units / Drive Units Parameter # / Parameter # SCANport device image. Refer to the A-B Single Point Re- mote I/O Adapter manuals or other SCANport device 1336 PLUS II SCANport Device manual for data link information. [Data Out A1] [Data Out A2] [Data Out B1] [Data Out B2] [Data Out C1] [Data Out C2] [Data Out D1] [Data Out D2] Parameter Number 315 [Alt Type 2 Cmd] Parameter Type Read and Write When ENABLED, alternate functions are assigned to Factory Default “Disabled” some bits in the Logic Control Structure. See Appendix A Display Drive Units for further information. “Disabled” 0 “Enabled” 1 Programming 6–49 This group of parameters contains the parameters used to scale, in “User Units”, any drive Process parameter for display on the HIM. Two scaled parameter values can be simultaneously Display displayed when Process Mode is selected. Parameter Number 127 [Process 1 Par] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter should be set to the number of the param- Display Units / Drive Units Parameter # / Parameter # eter whose scaled value will be displayed on Line 1 of the Factory Default 1 HIM Display Panel. The maximum process value that can be displayed is 99,999.99. If this value is exceeded, a character string of asterisks (****) will appear on the display. Parameter Number 128 [Process 1 Scale] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the scaling multiplier for [Process 1 Par]. Display Units / Drive Units Numeric / Scale x 100 The displayed value will be: Factory Default +1.00 Minimum Value –327.68 [Process 1 Par] actual value Maximum Value +327.67 x [Process 1 Scale] value Displayed Value Parameter Number(s) 129-136 [Process 1 Txt 1-8] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the “User Units” description for the value determined Display Units / Drive Units ASCII Code / ASCII Code by [Process 1 Par] and [Process 1 Scale]. This 8 character Factory Default “Volts ” description will be shown on line 1 of the display. Refer to the Character Map in Appendix A. Parameter Number 180 [Process 2 Par] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter should be set to the number of the param- Display Units / Drive Units Parameter # / Parameter # eter whose scaled value will be displayed on Line 2 of the Factory Default 54 HIM Display Panel. The maximum process value that can be displayed is 99,999.99. If this value is exceeded, a character string of asterisks (****) will appear on the display. Parameter Number 181 [Process 2 Scale] Parameter Type Read and Write This value sets the scaling multiplier for Display Units / Drive Units Numeric / Scale x 100 [Process 2 Par]. The displayed value will be: Factory Default +1.00 Minimum Value –327.68 [Process 2 Par] actual value Maximum Value +327.67 x [Process 2 Scale] value Displayed Value Parameter Number(s) 182-189 [Process 2 Txt 1-8] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the “User Units” description for the value determined Display Units / Drive Units ASCII Code / ASCII Code by [Process 2 Par] and [Process 2 Scale]. This 8 character Factory Default “Amps ” description will be shown on line 2 of the display. Refer to the Character Map in Appendix A. 6–50 Programming This group of parameters contains all the parameters necessary to activate encoder feed- Encoder back for closed loop operation. Feedback Parameter Number 77 [Speed Control] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the type of speed modulation active Factory Default “Slip Comp” in the drive. Units Display Drive This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is “No Control” 0 Frequency regulation running. “Slip Comp” 1 Slip compensation “Speed Droop” 2 Negative slip compensation Important: “No Control” and “Phase Lock” are the only “Phase Lock” 3 Enable phase lock to pulse input available options for synchronous motors. “Encoder Fdbk” 4 Encoder feedback-closed loop If encoder feedback closed loop speed regulation is re- “Droop + Reg” 5 Enc. fdbk.-closed loop w/ active quired, “Encoder Fdbk” must be selected. droop “P Jump” 6 Traverse function “Process PI” 7 Closed loop PI control Parameter Number 152 [Encoder Type] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the feedback encoder signal type. Factory Default “Quadrature” The drive can accept single channel (Pulse) or dual chan- Units Display Drive nel (Quadrature) signals. “Pulse” 0 Single channel encoder This selection must match the type of encoder being used. “Quadrature” 1 Dual channel encoder If “Pulse” is selected and a dual channel encoder is wired (see page 2–30), the feedback indication will be incorrect by a factor of 2 and no direction indication will be offered. If “Quadrature” is selected and a single channel encoder is wired, the feedback value will always be zero. This cannot be changed while drive is running. Parameter Number 46 [Encoder PPR] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter contains the scaling factor for encoder Display Units / Drive Units Factor / Pulses per Rev feedback speed regulation. Enter the actual encoder puls- Factory Default 1024 PPR es per revolution Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 4096 Parameter Number 151 [Maximum Speed] Parameter Type Read and Write This Parameter sets the output frequency at full frequency Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 reference for: Factory Default 400 Hz Minimum Value 0 Hz 1.Encoder feedback speed regulation. Maximum Value 400 Hz 2.All analog inputs to TB2 (remote pot, 0-10V & 0-20 mA). NOTE: [Maximum Freq.] must be raised to allow operation or modulation above [Maximum Speed]. Parameter Number 153 [Motor Poles] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter contains the number of motor magnetic Display Units / Drive Units 1 Poles / Poles poles. This value translates output frequency into actual motor RPM during closed loop operation. It is calculated from [Motor NP Hertz] and [Motor NP RPM]. Programming 6–51 Encoder Feedback Parameter Number 165 [Speed KI] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter contains the integral gain value for the ve- Display Units / Drive Units Numeric / Gain x 100 locity loop during closed loop operation. Factory Default 100 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 20000 Parameter Number 164 [Speed KP] Parameter Type Read and Write Not functional at time of printing – will set the proportional Display Units / Drive Units Numeric / Gain x 100 gain for the speed loop. Factory Default 0 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 20000 Parameter Number 166 [Speed Error] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the difference between [Freq Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq. Command] and feedback speed. Factory Default None Minimum Value – 8.33% of [Base Frequency] Maximum Value +8.33% of [Base Frequency] Parameter Number 167 [Speed Integral] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the integral value from the speed Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq. loop. Factory Default None Minimum Value –8.33% of [Base Frequency] Maximum Value +8.33% of [Base Frequency] Parameter Number 168 [Speed Adder] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the amount of correction applied Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq. to the [Freq Command]. Factory Default None Minimum Value – 8.33% of [Base Frequency] Maximum Value +8.33% of [Base Frequency] Parameter Number 255 [Slip Adder] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the amount of correction added Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq. by slip comp or phase lock loop. Factory Default None Minimum Value –8.33% of [Base Frequency] Maximum Value +8.33% of [Base Frequency] Parameter Number 177 [Motor NP RPM] Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units / Drive Units 1 RPM / RPM x 10 RPM. Factory Default 1750 RPM Minimum Value 60 RPM This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Maximum Value 24000 RPM running. Parameter Number 178 [Motor NP Hertz] Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 frequency. Factory Default 60 Hz Minimum Value 1 Hz This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is Maximum Value 400 Hz running. 6–52 Programming Encoder Feedback Parameter Number 283 [Encoder Counts] Parameter Type Read and Write Displays the scaled encoder count value. The value is in- Display Units / Drive Units 1 Count / Counts cremented in the forward direction and decremented in the Factory Default 0 reverse direction. Requires a quadrature (dual channel) Minimum Value –32767 encoder and a value in [Enc Count Scale]. Maximum Value +32767 ATTENTION: To guard against possible machine damage and/or personal injury, be aware that the maximum encoder count value in either direction is ! ±32767. No roll-over will occur and the value will be frozen at this maximum value until manually reset or decremented below maximum (via opposite counts). Parameter Number 282 [Enc Count Scale] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the scale factor for the incoming encoder pulse count. Display Units / Drive Units Factory Default 1000 Number of Incoming Pulses [Encoder Counts] = Minimum Value 1 [Enc Count Scale] Maximum Value 4096 Parameter Number 284 [Encoder Loss Sel] Parameter Type Read and Write Selects the drive action when a missing or incorrect en- Factory Default “Disabled” coder signal is detected. Units Display Drive Important: Encoder loss detection requires the use of a “Disable” 0 After 200ms of encoder loss, a warning will be issued. 1336-L7E, L8E or L9E Interface Option Board and quadrature (dual channel) encoder wired differentially “Enable” 1 After 200ms of encoder loss, an alarm and an F60 fault will be (see page 2–30). In addition, selection of “Encoder” in issued. [Freq Select 1/2], [PI Reference], [PI Feedback] or “En- coder Fdbk” in [Speed Control] must be made. If a 1336-L4E, L5E or L6E board is used, a pulse (single channel) encoder is used or a dual channel encoder is wired single-ended, this feature will not operate. Parameter Number 63 [Encoder Freq] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the frequency command present Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq at encoder input terminals of TB3. This value is displayed Factory Default None whether or not this is the active frequency command. Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value +400.00 Hz Frequency Incoming Encoder Pulse Rate = Displayed [Encoder PPR] Parameter Number 328 [Max Enc Counts] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the trip point for the “Enc Cnt Max” alarm. The alarm Display Units / Drive Units 1 Count /Counts is high (1) when [Encoder Counts] has exceeded [Max Enc Factory Default 0 Counts]. Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Programming 6–53 This group of parameters configures the Process PI Regulator. Process PI PI Reference Select Integral Term = 0 pi reference PI Reference PI Error PI Feedback PI + Clamp Select + –1 √ pi feedback – Speed ∑ Process KI + ∑ Adder s PI Config.sqrt_fdbk + PI Feedback PI Config.reset_int PI Config.inv_error PI – Clamp Process KP PI Output Parameter 65 PI Enable +32767 Master Frequency Reference Freq Command + 0 Output Frequency +32767 + Speed Speed Compute Accel 0 ∑ Speed Command Control Ramp –32767 –32767 speed ramp>0 PI Config.zero_clamp Parameter Number 77 [Speed Control] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter selects the type of speed modulation active Factory Default “Slip Comp” in the drive. Units Display Drive This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is “No Control” 0 Frequency regulation running. “Slip Comp” 1 Slip compensation “Speed Droop” 2 Negative slip compensation Important: “No Control” and “Phase Lock” are the only “Phase Lock” 3 Enable phase lock to pulse input available options for synchronous motors. “Encoder Fdbk” 4 Encoder feedback-closed loop If encoder feedback closed loop speed regulation is re- “Droop + Reg” 5 Enc. fdbk.-closed loop w/ active quired, “Encoder Fdbk” must be selected. droop “P Jump” 6 Traverse function “Process PI” 7 Closed loop PI control Parameter Number 213 [PI Config] Parameter Type Read/Write This parameter sets and displays the configuration for the Factory Default 00000000 PI regulator. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Note: Reset Integrator (Int) is also available through a dig- Inv Error - Changes sign of PI Error ital input. See Input Mode Selection in Chapter 2. Reset Int - Holds KI at zero Zero Clamp - Prevents bidirectional operation Spare Sqrt Fdbk - Uses sq. root of PI feedback value Set Output 000011 Preload Int 001100 PI Enable 010101 Diagram 1 2 3 (Refer to Diagrams on next page) 6–54 Programming Process PI Diagram 1 Diagram 2 Diagram 3 Feed forward effect for more dynamic Output Preload Preload at Start Freq. Better response for well defined Preload Preload at Start Command PI Preload Output Preload Time02 3 6 9 12 15 18 214 27 3002 3 6 9 12 15 18 214 27 3002 3 6 9 12 15 18 214 27 30 Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable PI output integrates from zero – drive ramps Enable PI output steps to preload and integrates Enable PI output integrates from preload – drive to regulated frequency. from there – drive steps to preload and ramps from preload. ramps from there. Disable PI output is forced to zero – drive ramps to Disable PI output is held at preload - drive ramps to unregulated frequency. Disable PI output is forced to zero - drive ramps to unregulated speed (min. preload). unregulated frequency. Note: Drive will step output equal to preload on Parameter Number 214 [PI Status] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the status of the Process PI Factory Default None regulator. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Enabled Spares Parameter Number 215 [PI Ref Select] Parameter Type Read/Write The source of the PI reference is selected with this param- Factory Default “Preset 1” eter. The value from the selected reference is the “set Units Display Drive point” for the Process PI regulator. “Use Last” 0 The drive is capable of responding to a loss of the 4-20 “Analog In 0” 1 mA signal used as either a PI reference or PI feedback. “Analog In 1” 2 Response to loss of 4-20 mA signal is controlled by pro- “Analog In 2” 3 gramming and requires the following: “Pulse Ref” 4 Refer to [Pulse In Scale] Value a) [Speed Control] must be set to “Process PI” “MOP” 5 “Adapter 1-6” 6-11 and “Preset 1-7” 12-18 b) Either [PI Ref Select] or [PI Fdbk Select] must be set to “Encoder” 19 Refer to [Encoder PPR] Value “4-20 mA.” If both of the above conditions are met, the signal loss response is controlled by the setting of [4-20 mA Loss Sel]. If this parameter is set to “Stop/Fault,” loss of input will cause the drive to stop and issue a Hertz Err Fault. Loss of input while any other setting of [4-20 mA Loss Sel] is chosen will cause the drive to activate the alarm bit (bit 6 of [Drive Status] and bit 13 of [Drive Alarm]) and output programmed [Minimum Freq]. Signal loss protection is offered for the 2-10V input. Programming 6–55 Process PI Parameter Number 216 [PI Fdbk Select] Parameter Type Read/Write The source of the PI feedback is selected with this param- Factory Default “Analog In 1” eter. It identifies the input point for the process feedback Units Display Drive device. “Use Last” 0 “Analog In 0” 1 “Analog In 1” 2 “Analog In 2” 3 “Pulse Ref” 4 Refer to [Pulse In Scale] Value “MOP” 5 “Adapter 1-6” 6-11 “Preset 1-7” 12-18 “Encoder” 19 Refer to [Encoder PPR] Value Parameter Number 217 [PI Reference] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the current value of the reference Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward selected by [PI Ref Select]. Factory Default None Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value 400.00 Hz Parameter Number 218 [PI Feedback] Parameter Type Read Only This parameter displays the current value of the reference Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward selected by [PI Fdbk Select]. Factory Default None Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value 400.00 Hz Parameter Number 219 [PI Error] Parameter Type Read Only The value of the error calculated by the PI loop. This value Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward is the difference between [PI Reference] & [PI Feedback] Factory Default None and determines the PI output. Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value 400.00 Hz Parameter Number 220 [PI Output] Parameter Type Read Only The current output of the PI loop is displayed with this Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward parameter. This output is used as the speed command for Factory Default None process control or the speed adder for process trim. Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value 400.00 Hz Parameter Number 221 [KI Process] Parameter Type Read/Write This parameter sets the integral gain of the process PI Display Units / Drive Units NA / NA loop. Factory Default 128 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1024 6–56 Programming Process PI Parameter Number 222 [KP Process] Parameter Type Read/Write This parameter sets the proportional gain of the process Display Units / Drive Units NA / NA PI loop. Factory Default 256 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1024 Parameter Number 223 [PI Neg Limit] Parameter Type Read/Write This parameter sets the lower (negative) limit of the PI Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward output. Factory Default –8.33% of [Maximum Freq] Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value 400.00 Hz Parameter Number 224 [PI Pos Limit] Parameter Type Read/Write This parameter sets the upper (positive) limit of the PI Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward output. Factory Default +8.33% of [Maximum Freq] Minimum Value –400.00 Hz Maximum Value 400.00 Hz Parameter Number 225 [PI Preload] Parameter Type Read/Write Sets the value used to preload the PI integrator when “Set Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / ±32767 = Maximum Freq Output” or “Preload Int” bits equal “1” in [PI Config]. Factory Default 0.00 Hz Minimum Value – 8.33% of [Maximum Freq] Maximum Value +8.33% of [Maximum Freq] Programming 6–57 This group of parameters defines basic motor control. Motor Control Parameter Number 9 [Control Select] Parameter Type Read and Write Selects the motor control method for the drive. The default Factory Default “Sens Vector” setting provides full stator flux control that is suitable for Units Display Drive most applications. “Economize” 0 Stator Flux control with Economize Important: When using synchronous motors, [Control Se- “Sens Vector” 1 Stator Flux control lect] must be set to V/Hz operation (“Fixed Boost” or “Full “Fixed Boost” 2 V/Hz w/programmed accel/run boost Custom”). “Full Custom” 3 V/Hz with full configuration Additional selections are offered to optimally tune performance: • Two volts/Hertz modes are available; one using simple voltage boost and one for complete configurability. These may be required for special motors or unmatched multi-motor installations. • The Economize mode offers all the advantages of stator flux control plus the added feature of an “auto-econo- mizer.” If a motor remains lightly loaded, the drive will reduce output voltage (and therefore output kW) in or- der to reduce the energy (operating) costs of the lightly loaded motor. This can result in up to 20% kW savings. Default Fixed Base Voltage Motor Rated Base/Maximum Voltage Base Frequency and Base/Maximum Frequency Maximum Voltage Voltage B Start Boost Factory Default A Run Boost 0 0 0 Frequency 0 Frequency Motor Rated and Maximum Full Custom Base Voltage Maximum Maximum Voltage Base Frequency Maximum Frequency Motor Rated Voltage Break Voltage Break Frequency Start Boost Run Boost 0 0 Motor Rated Maximum Frequency Parameter Number 192 [Flux Amps Ref] Parameter Type Read and Write Used in “Economize” & “Sens Vector” modes - Sets the Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Amp / 4096 = Drive Rated Amps value of amps required to maintain full motor flux. If set to Factory Default 0.0 Amps zero, the drive will use an internal value based on [Motor Minimum Value 0.0 Amps NP Amps] and drive kW (HP). Refer to Chapter 5 for setup Maximum Value 75.0% of Drive VT Rated Amps information. 6–58 Programming Motor Control Parameter Number 194 [IR Drop Volts] Parameter Type Read and Write Used in “Economize” & “Sens Vector” modes - Sets the Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rated Volts value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor Factory Default Based on Drive Size & Type stator. If set to zero, the drive will use an internal value Minimum Value 0.0 Volts based on motor F.L.A. and rated voltage. Some motors Maximum Value 25% of Drive Rated Volts (i.e. 6 pole, special, etc.) may be particularly sensitive to the adjustment of this parameter. Refer to the tuning pro- cedure in Chapter 5 for further information. Parameter Number 200 [Flux Up Time] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the amount of time the drive will use to try and achieve Display Units / Drive Units 0.1 Sec / Sec x 10 full motor stator flux. When a Start command is issued, DC Factory Default 0.0 Sec current at current limit level is used to build stator flux be- Minimum Value 0.0 Sec Maximum Value 5.0 Sec fore accelerating. Parameter Number 48 [Start Boost] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the DC start boost level for accelera- Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts tion when [Control Select] is set to “Fixed Boost” or “Full Factory Default 0 Volts Custom.” Minimum Value 0 Volts Maximum Value 9.5% of Drive Rated Voltage Parameter Number 83 [Run Boost] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the DC boost level for constant speed Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts level when [Control Select] is set to “Fixed Boost” or “Full Factory Default 0 Volts Custom.” Minimum Value 0 Volts Maximum Value 9.5% of Drive Rated Voltage Parameter Number 169 [Boost Slope] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the slope of the volts/Hertz curve from [Start Boost] Display Units / Drive Units None and [Run Boost] to the intersect point (see Fixed boost Factory Default 1.5 diagram on previous page) when [Control Select] equals Minimum Value 1.0 fixed boost. The intersect is determined by multiplying: Maximum Value 8.0 Run Boost x Boost Slope = A Start Boost x Boost Slope = B. Parameter Number 50 [Break Voltage] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the voltage the drive will output at [Break Frequency]. Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts Combined with [Break Frequency], this parameter deter- Factory Default 25% of Drive Rated Voltage mines the volts-per-Hertz pattern between 0 and [Break Minimum Value 0 Volts Maximum Value 50% of Drive Rated Voltage Frequency]. Parameter Number 49 [Break Frequency] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets a midpoint frequency on a custom Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 volts-per-Hertz curve. Combined with [Break Voltage], this Factory Default 25% of [Maximum Freq] value determines the volts-per-Hertz ratio between 0 and Minimum Value 0 Hz [Break Frequency]. Maximum Value 120 Hz Parameter Number 18 [Base Voltage] Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts voltage. Factory Default Drive Rated Volts Minimum Value 25% of Drive Rated Voltage Maximum Value 120% of Drive Rated Voltage Programming 6–59 Motor Control Parameter Number 17 [Base Frequency] Parameter Type Read and Write This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated Display Units / Drive Units 1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 frequency. Factory Default 60 Hz Minimum Value 25 Hz Maximum Value 400 Hz Parameter Number 20 [Maximum Voltage] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter sets the highest voltage the drive will Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts output for “Fixed Boost” & “Full Custom.” Factory Default Drive Rated Volts Minimum Value 25% of Drive Rated Voltage Maximum Value 120% of Drive Rated Voltage Parameter Number 317 [Run/Accel Volts] Parameter Type Read and Write In “Fixed Boost” or “Full Custom” modes, the output Display Units / Drive Units 1% / 4096 = 100% voltage is reduced by the programmed amount while at Factory Default 100% frequency. Minimum Value 50% Maximum Value 100% This function is enabled if [Sync Loss Sel] is set to “Alarm” or “Fault”. Motor Sync Loss Detection for The motor sync loss detection attempts to sense when a synchronous motor has pulled out of sync. When Synchronous Motors this happens the motor will typically draw a high current and the power flow between the motor and the drive oscillates. Based on this, the detection algorithm looks for a large oscillation of the current (relative to voltage) angle while the current is high. When loss of sync is detected, the “Sync Loss” bit in [Drive Alarm 1] is set. Additionally, the drive will add an additional voltage set by [Sync Loss Comp] to the output voltage. This will increase the pull-in torque to allow the motor to re-synchronize. If [Sync Loss Sel] is set to “Fault,” the time the “Sync Loss” bit is set is timed. If it exceeds the time set by [Sync Loss Time], the drive faults with a F67 “Motor Sync Loss” fault indication. Parameter Number 310 [Sync Loss Sel] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter allows selection of various sync loss Factory Default “Disabled” modes. Units Display Drive Important: The motor must be connected to the drive “Disabled” 0 sync loss detection and recovery function is disabled when the sync loss function is enabled. “Alarm” 1 sync loss detection and recovery function is enabled “Fault” 2 sync loss detection and recovery function is enabled. If the sync loss continues for longer than the time set by [Sync Loss Time], the drive faults with a F67 “Motor Sync Loss” fault indication. Parameter Number 311 [Sync Loss Gain] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets a gain that controls the sensitivity of the sync loss Display Units / Drive Units Numeric / Gain x 100 detection function. Factory Default 40 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 6–60 Programming Motor Control Parameter Number 313 [Sync Loss Comp] Parameter Type Read and Write Sets the extra voltage to add when trying to get the motor Display Units / Drive Units 1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd. Volts to re-sync after a loss of sync is detected. Factory Default 0 Volts Minimum Value 0 Volts Maximum Value 25% of Drive Rtd. Volts Parameter Number 312 [Sync Loss Time] Parameter Type Read and Write For [Sync Loss Sel] = “Fault,” the sync loss detection and Display Units / Drive Units 1 Second / Seconds x 100 recovery function is enabled. If the sync loss continues Factory Default 5 Sec for longer than the time set by [Sync Loss Time], the drive Minimum Value 1 Sec faults with an F67 “Motor Sync Loss” fault indication. Maximum Value 30 Sec Parameter Number 333 [PWM Comp Time] – Firmware 4.001 & later Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter adjusts the PWM waveform dead time Display Units / Drive Units None compensation. This adjustment can improve the stability Factory Default 80 of lightly loaded motors at low speed. Only D Frame and Minimum Value 20 Maximum Value 90 larger drives will benefit from this adjustment. To tune the drive, first set [Break Freq], then lower [PWM Comp Time] until stable motor operation is achieved. [Stability Gain] can also be used to help achieve stable motor operation. Parameter Number 334 [Break Freq] – Firmware 4.001 Parameter Type Read and Write [PWM Break Freq] – Firmware 5.001 & later Display Units / Drive Units 0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward Factory Default 0 Hz This parameter can only be changed on D Frame & larger Minimum Value 0 Hz drives. This is the frequency where the dead time Maximum Value 30 Hz compensation returns to the default value of 80. If the motor has instability at low speeds, determine the point where the instability ends, and add 5 Hz. A good starting point is usually 10-15 Hz. Parameter Number 324 [Stability Gain] Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter adjusts the gain of the torque component Display Units / Drive Units None of current to adjust for possible current instability in certain Factory Default 0 motors caused by variations in design. Increasing this val- Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 16 ue to the correct setting for a particular motor will stabilize torque pulsations in the motor. Important: Setting this value too high may cause addition- al instability. It should be set for the lowest value that eliminates the instability. Programming 6–61 The Step Logic Parameters are only available with Firmware versions 5.001 and later. Step Logic StepLogic™ offers a degree of PLC functionality for simple applica- tions. It consists of 7 frequency steps which can be stepped through based on a number of factors. The frequency steps are programmed into the [Preset Freq x] parameters (x = Current Step + 1). Each step also has a time associated with it, [SLx Time]. The logic for each step is defined by four StepLogic parameters.  [SLx Logic Step] – if true, will move the program to the next step.  [SLx Logic Jump] – if true, will jump to the step defined in [SL Step Jump].  [SL Step Jump] – if both [SLx Logic Step] and [SLx Logic Jump] are true, the program will jump to the step defined in this parame- ter. [SLx Logic Jump] takes precedence over [SLx Logic Step].  [SLx Step Setting] – sets 4 functions of the step. Refer to the parameter description on page 6–63. A valid Start command will cause the program to run and continue to loop unless one of the steps causes the program to end, a Stop com- mand is given or the Enable is opened. When the Enable is opened in 2-wire control, the drive will stop. When closed, the drive will restart at the last step, if the Start is still closed. Note that in order to move to a different step based on digital inputs, at least one input must change state since the last step. See Example below and Figure 6.1. No. Parameter Setting No. Parameter Setting 5 Freq Select 1 Step Logic 351 SL2 Time 0.00 158 CR1 Out Select Step Logic 352 SL2 Encoder Cnts 0 242 TB3 Term 22 Sel SL Input 1 353 SL3 Logic Step Step on Time 243 TB3 Term 23 Sel SL Input 2 354 SL3 Logic Jump SL2 not SL1 27 Preset Freq 1 20 (SL0) 355 SL3 Step Jump End Fault 28 Preset Freq 2 10 (SL1) 356 SL3 Step Setting 0111 29 Preset Freq 3 20 (SL2) 357 SL3 Time 0.00 30 Preset Freq 4 30 (SL3) 358 SL3 Encoder Cnts -10 31 Preset Freq 5 40 (SL4) 359 SL4 Logic Step All SL True 32 Preset Freq 6 50 (SL5) 360 SL4 Logic Jump Do Not Step 33 Preset Freq 7 60 (SL6) 361 SL4 Step Jump Jump to 2 335 SL0 Logic Step SL1 In True 362 SL4 Step Setting 0001 336 SL0 Logic Jump SL2 In True 363 SL4 Time 0.00 337 SL0 Step Jump Jump to 2 364 SL4 Encoder Cnts 0 338 SL0 Step Setting 0000 365 SL5 Logic Step Time and SL1 339 SL0 Time 0.00 366 SL5 Logic Jump SL2 In True 340 SL0 Encoder Cnts 0 367 SL5 Step Jump End Stop 2 341 SL1 Logic Step SL1 In True 368 SL5 Step Setting 1110 342 SL1 Logic Jump Time and SL2 369 SL5 Time 0.00 343 SL1 Step Jump Jump to 3 370 SL5 Encoder Cnts 15 344 SL1 Step Setting 0100 371 SL6 Logic Step SL1 In True 345 SL1 Time 10.00 372 SL6 Logic Jump SL2 In False 346 SL1 Encoder Cnts 0 373 SL6 Step Jump End Stop 1 347 SL2 Logic Step All SL True 374 SL6 Step Setting 0000 348 SL2 Logic Jump SL2 In True 375 SL6 Time 0.00 349 SL2 Step Jump Jump to 6 376 SL6 Encoder Cnts 0 350 SL2 Step Setting 0001 6–62 Programming Step Logic Figure 6.1 Step Logic 0 1 3 4 5 6 End 60Hz 50Hz 10 Sec 40Hz 30Hz 20Hz 10Hz 0Hz -10Hz -20Hz -30Hz -40Hz -50Hz Start SL Input 1 SL Input 2 Step Logic Output 15 10 Encoder Counts 5 Since Start 0 of Step -5 -10 -15 20 Pulse Counts 15 Since Start 10 of Step 5 0 Parameter Number 335, 341, 347, 353, 359, 365, 371 [SL0 Logic Step] – Firmware 5.001 & later Parameter Type Read and Write [SL1 Logic Step] Factory Default “Step On Time” [SL2 Logic Step] Units Display Drive “Skip Step” 0 [SL3 Logic Step] “Step On Time” 1 [SL4 Logic Step] “SL1 In True” 2 [SL5 Logic Step] “SL2 In True” 3 “SL1 In False” 4 [SL6 Logic Step] “SL2 In False” 5 When the logic in this parameter is true, the program will “Any SL True” 6 move to the next step. The SL1 and SL2 inputs are desig- “All SL True” 7 nated in [TB3 Term xx Sel]. “No SL True” 8 The logic which refers to time is also for encoder or pulse “SL1 not SL2” 9 counts. Time can be replaced with counts when using the “SL2 not SL1” 10 encoder and pulse inputs. “Time and SL1” 11 “Time and SL2” 12 When using “Time and SLx” or “Time not SLx” the time or “Time not SL1” 13 counts need to elapse before the logic input will be “Time not SL2” 14 checked. “Do Not Step” 15 Programming 6–63 Step Logic Parameter Number 336, 342, 348, 354, 360, 366, 372 [SL0 Logic Jump] – Firmware 5.001 & later Parameter Type Read and Write [SL1 Logic Jump] Factory Default “Do Not Step” [SL2 Logic Jump] Units Display Drive “Skip Step” 0 [SL3 Logic Jump] “Step On Time” 1 [SL4 Logic Jump] “SL1 In True” 2 [SL5 Logic Jump] “SL2 In True” 3 “SL1 In False” 4 [SL6 Logic Jump] “SL2 In False” 5 When the logic in this parameter is true, the program will “Any SL True” 6 jump to the step specified by [SLx Step Jump]. The SL1 “All SL True” 7 and SL2 inputs are designated in [TB3 Term xx Sel]. “No SL True” 8 The logic which refers to time is also for encoder or pulse “SL1 not SL2” 9 counts. Time can be replaced with counts when using the “SL2 not SL1” 10 encoder and pulse inputs. “Time and SL1” 11 “Time and SL2” 12 When using “Time and SLx” or “Time not SLx” the time or “Time not SL1” 13 counts need to elapse before the logic input will be “Time not SL2” 14 checked. “Do Not Step” 15 Parameter Number 337, 343, 349, 355, 361, 367, 373 [SL0 Step Jump]– Firmware 5.001 & later Parameter Type Read and Write [SL1 Step Jump] Factory Default “Jump to 0” [SL2 Step Jump] Units Display Drive “Jump to 0” 0 [SL3 Step Jump] “Jump to 1” 1 [SL4 Step Jump] “Jump to 2” 2 [SL5 Step Jump] “Jump to 3” 3 “Jump to 4” 4 [SL6 Step Jump] “Jump to 5” 5 This parameter sets which step to jump to if [SLx Logic “Jump to 6” 6 Step] is true. “End Stop 1” uses the settings of [Stop Select “End Stop 1” 7 1]. “End Fault” causes the drive to stop with a F69 Step “End Stop 2” 8 Logic fault. “End Fault” 9 Parameter Number 338, 344, 350, 356, 362, 368, 374 [SL0 Step Setting]– Firmware 5.001 & later Parameter Type Read and Write [SL1 Step Setting] Factory Default xxxx0000 [SL2 Step Setting] Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 [SL3 Step Setting] Reverse [SL4 Step Setting] SL Output Acc/Dec 2 [SL5 Step Setting] Encoder/Puls [SL6 Step Setting] Not Used Not Used “Reverse” – when set, the drive will run in reverse during Not Used the step. Otherwise it runs forward. Not Used “SL Output” – when set, the associated [CRx Out Select] will turn on (if set to “Step Logic”). A Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1 (except Series A HIMs below version 3.0). “Acc/Dec 2” – when set, the drive will use [Accel Time 2] and [Decel Time 2] for speed changes during the step. “Encoder/Puls” – when bit is off, the Encoder input is used. When set, the Pulse input is used. For more information refer to [SLx Encoder Cnts]. To use Encoder/Pulse counts, the logic is set to one of the time functions. The [SLx Time] must be set to 0, then set the desired count difference in [SLx Encoder Cnts]. The counts are signed when used for the encoder. The absolute value of the counts is used for the pulse counts. 6–64 Programming Step Logic Parameter Number 339, 345, 351, 357, 363, 369, 375 [SL0 Time]– Firmware 5.001 & later Parameter Type Read and Write [SL1 Time] Display Units / Units 0.01 Second / Seconds x 100 Factory Default 0.00 Sec [SL2 Time] Minimum Value 0.00 Sec [SL3 Time] Maximum Value 600.00 Sec [SL4 Time] [SL5 Time] [SL6 Time] Sets the time to remain in each step if the corresponding Logic Step or Jump is set to “Step On Time”. To use the encoder or pulse counts this must be set to “0.00.” Parameter Number 340, 346, 352, 358, 364, 370, 376 [SL0 Encoder Cnts]– Firmware 5.001 & later Parameter Type Read and Write [SL1 Encoder Cnts] Display Units / Drive Units 1 Count / Counts Factory Default 0 [SL2 Encoder Cnts] Minimum Value –32767 [SL3 Encoder Cnts] Maximum Value +32767 [SL4 Encoder Cnts] [SL5 Encoder Cnts] [SL6 Encoder Cnts] Sets the number of encoder or pulse counts necessary to cause a step if the corresponding Logic Step or Jump is set to “Step On Time.” Current counts are stored when a step is initiated. The difference between the current and stored counts is compared to the parameter. The encoder counts are directional and stop at the Min and Max values. A F69 Step Logic fault will occur when using the encoder and [Encoder Counts] is at an end point. The pulse counts are only positive and will rollover internally. To use the encoder counts, set the Logic Step or Jump to “Step on Time,” “Time and SLx” or “Time not SLx.” The [SLx Time] must be set to “0.00.” Set the [SLx Step Setting] “Encoder/Puls” to “0.” To use pulse counts, connect an LA5 card to the drive. Set the [SLx Step Setting] “Encoder/Puls” to “1.” Parameter Number 377 [Current Step]– Firmware 5.001 & later Parameter Type Read and Write This parameter displays the current step the Step Logic Display Units /Drive Units None function is using. For example if [Current Step] is 2, the Factory Default 0 SL2 parameters are active. This parameter can be used Minimum Value 0 to force the drive to a giving step. Maximum Value 9 This group lists all the parameters currently installed in your drive in numerical order. Refer Linear to the Appendix at the back of this manual for an alpha/numeric listing of all parameters. List The following parameter appears only in the Linear List and is not documented elsewhere. Parameter Number 329 [Bidir In Offset] Parameter Type Read and Write Trims the offset of the bi-directional inputs on LA6 & LA7 Display Units / Drive Units None option cards. To provide an equal response to positive and Factory Default 270 negative signals, this parameter may need to be adjusted Minimum Value 0 for each board. With no voltage on input 0, monitor [Anlg Maximum Value 1024 In 0 Freq] and adjust [Bidir In Offset] until it is zero. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 provides information to guide the user in troubleshooting the 1336 PLUS. Included is a listing and description of the various drive faults (with possible solutions, when applicable) and alarms. Fault Descriptions Fault Display The LCD display is used to indicate a fault by showing a brief text statement relating to the fault (see figure below). The fault will be dis- played until “Clear Faults” is initiated or drive power is cycled. A Series A (version 3.0) or Series B & up HIM will display a fault when it occurs, no matter what state the display is in. In addition, a listing of past faults can be displayed by selecting “Fault queue” from the Con- trol Status menu (see Chapter 3 for more information). Refer to Table 7.A for a listing and description of the various faults. Table 7.C pro- vides a listing of faults by number. Clearing a Fault When a fault occurs, the cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. After corrective action has been taken, simply cycling drive power will clear the fault. Issuing a valid Stop command from the HIM or Control Interface option (TB3) will also clear a fault if the [Flt Clear Mode] parameter is set to “Enabled.” In addition, a “Clear Faults” command can be issued anytime from a serial device (if con- nected). Contact Description Refer to Figure 2.5 for a schematic representation of contacts CR1- CR4. Contacts in Figure 2.5 are shown in an unpowered state. When powered, the contacts will change state. For Example: During normal operating conditions (no faults present, drive running), the CR3 con- tacts (default firmware setting) at TB2-13 & 14 are open, and the con- tacts at TB2-14 & 15 are closed. When a fault occurs, the state of these contacts will change. 7–2 Troubleshooting Table 7.A 1336 PLUS II Fault Descriptions Name & Fault # Description Action Adptr Freq Err The SCANport adapter that was Correct the problem that is causing 65 the selected frequency reference the SCANport adapter to send the sent a frequency greater than illegal frequency reference to the 32767 to the drive. drive. Auxiliary Fault The auxiliary input interlock is If Control Interface option is installed, 02 open. check TB3 connections. If not installed, set [Input Mode] to “Status.” Bgnd 10ms Over Microprocessor loop fault. Occurs Replace Main Control Board or com- 51 if the 10ms background task plete drive as required. hasn’t been run in 15 ms. Bipolar Dir Flt 3 Wire – Bi-polar input is the a) Mask out direction control at bit 7 16 active frequency reference and of [Direction Mask]. b) Remove or direction control is not possible. mask other direction control sources. 2 Wire – Run Forward or Reverse Set bit 7 of [Direction Mask] to zero. commands attempt direction con- trol, but bi-polar input is not masked from direction control. Blwn Fuse Flt If the difference between the com- Locate cause, replace fuse. 58 manded voltage and the mea- sured voltage is greater than 1/8 of rated voltage for 0.5 seconds, then a fault will be issued indicat- ing that the bus fuse in 30 kW (40HP) & up drives has blown. C167 Watchdog Internal microprocessor fault. If there is only one occurrence, reset 17 the fault and continue. If the fault con- tinuously or frequently reoccurs, con- tact your local service representative or replace the Main Control Board. Diag C Lim Flt The drive output current has Check [Cur Lim Trip En]. Check for 36 exceeded the hardware current excess load, improper DC boost set- limit and the [Cur Lim Trip En] ting, DC brake volts set too high or parameter was enabled. other causes of excess current. Drive -> HIM Refer to Table 7.B. DSP Checksum There was a breakdown in com- Reset to factory defaults. Replace 37 munications between the DSP Main Control Board or Gate Driver and main processors. Board. DSP Comm Fault Refer to the “Description” and “Action” statements for C167 Watchdog 27 (F17) above. DSP Protected Flash download included a new Remove power from the drive. Install 46 DSP Main Block and J14 was not J14 per download kit instructions and installed when power was reapply power. When transfer is com- restored. plete, remove power and J14. DSP Queue Fault Refer to the “Description” and “Action” statements for C167 Watchdog 31 (F17) above. DSP Reset Fault Power-up has been attempted Check/verify wiring and contact oper- 22 with an Open Stop contact or ation. Closed Start contact. DSP Timeout Fault Refer to the “Description” and “Action” statements for C167 Watchdog 28 (F17) above. EE Init Read 1. Gate Drive Bd. replacement 1. Reset to factory defaults & cycle in- 53 (requires re-initialization). put power. 2. Trouble reading EEPROM dur- 2. Check all connections to Power/ ing initialization. Driver Board. Replace board or complete drive as needed. Troubleshooting 7–3 Name & Fault # Description Action EE Init Value Stored parameter value out of 1. Reset to factory defaults & cycle in- put power. 54 range on initialization. 2. Check all connections to the Pow- er/Driver Bd. Replace the board or complete drive as needed. EEprom Checksum The checksum read from the 1. Reset to factory defaults & cycle in- put power. 66 EEPROM does not match the checksum calculated from the 2. Check all wire and cable connec- tions to the Power Driver Board. EEPROM data. Replace Power Driver Board or complete drive as required. EEprom Fault EEPROM is being programmed Check all wire and cable connections 32 and will not write a new value. to the Main Control Board. Replace Main Control Board or complete drive as required. Encoder Loss The drive has detected an error in Check encoder and wiring. 60 the encoder signals at TB3, termi- nals 31-36. The error could be due to a: 1. Loss of 1 or more channels. 2. Loss of quadrature. 3. Loss of differential signal (A & A NOT or B & B NOT were high at the same time). Fgnd 10ms Over Microprocessor loop fault. Occurs Replace Main Control Board or com- 52 if a 10ms interrupt is pending plete drive as required. before the current interrupt is complete. Ground Fault A current path to earth ground in Check the motor and external wiring 13 excess of 100A has been to the drive output terminals for a detected at one or more of the grounded condition. drive output terminals. NOTE: If ground current exceeds 220% of drive rated current, “Overcurrent Flt” may occur instead of Ground Fault. Ground Warning A current path to earth ground in Check the motor and external wiring 57 excess of 2A has been detected to the drive output terminals for a at one or more of the drive output grounded condition. terminals. See [Ground Warning]. Hardware Trap Refer to the “Description” and “Action” statements for C167 Watchdog 18 (F17) on 7–2. Hertz Err Fault This fault indicates that there is 29 not a valid operating frequency. It can be caused by any of the fol- lowing: 1. [Maximum Freq] is less than 1. Check [Minimum Freq] and [Maxi- [Minimum Freq]. mum Freq] parameters. 2. Skip frequencies and skip 2. Check [Skip Freq 1], [Skip Freq 2], bandwidth eliminate all operat- [Skip Freq 3] and [Skip Freq Band] ing frequencies. parameters. 3. Analog input signal speed 3. Check for broken wires, loose con- reference has been lost. See nections or transducer loss at [Anlg Signal Loss] and analog inputs. [4-20mA Loss Sel]. 7–4 Troubleshooting Name & Fault # Description Action Hertz Sel Fault A frequency select parameter has Reprogram [Freq Select 1] and/or 30 been programmed with an out of [Freq Select 2] with a correct value. If range value. problem persists, replace Main Con- trol Board or complete drive. HIM -> Drive Refer to Table 7.B. Ill Prog Input [Fault Data] = 98 – “3 Wire” is Reprogram the digital inputs or select 62 selected as the [Input Mode] and “2 Wire” as the [Input Mode]. one or more digital inputs are pro- grammed to “Run Reverse” (2 wire action). Input Phase Flt The DC bus ripple has exceeded 1. If the drive is operated on single- phase, the load derating level has 49 the value in [Phase Loss Level]. been exceeded. 2. Check incoming power for a miss- ing phase/blown fuse. Load Loss Flt [Load Loss Detect] is set to 1. Verify connections between motor and load. 20 “Enabled” and the drive output torque current was below [Load 2. Verify level and time requirements or disable [Load Loss Detect]. Loss Level] for a time period greater than [Load Loss time]. Loop Overrn Flt An overrun of the 2.5ms control Check all connections to the Main 23 loop has occurred. Control Board. Replace the board or complete drive as needed. Max Retries Fault Drive unsuccessfully attempted to Check fault buffer for fault code 33 reset a fault and resume running requiring reset. Correct the cause of for the programmed number of the fault and manually clear by press- [Reset/Run Tries]. ing the local Stop key or cycling the TB3 Stop input. Motor Mode Flt A fault has been detected origi- Check all connections to the Control 24 nating from the Control Board. Board. Replace the board or com- plete drive as required. Motor Stall Fault Current remained over [Current If the motor is drawing excessive cur- 06 Limit] setting (parameter 36) for rent (over [Current Limit] setting), the more than 4 seconds. motor load is excessive and will not allow the drive to accelerate to set speed. A longer accel time or a reduced load may be required. Motor Thermistor An analog option board with ther- 1. Verify that thermistor is connected. 15 mistor input is installed and the 2. Motor is overheated. Reduce load. value at the terminals is less than 3. Thermistor is not present. Remove 60 ohms or greater than 3300 option board. ohms. Mult Prog Input A single source input function Reprogram one or more of the inputs 61 such as Reverse/Forward to a different value. st nd (open=1 function, closed=2 function) has been programmed to more than one input or more than one “Run Reverse” input. Neg Slope Fault Drive software detected a portion Check drive programming. 35 of the volts/hertz curve with a 1. [Base Voltage] parameter must be negative slope. greater than [Start Boost]. 2. If the [DC Boost Select] parameter is set to “Full Custom,” [Base Volt- age] must be greater than [Break Voltage] and [Break Voltage] must be greater than [Start Boost]. Troubleshooting 7–5 Name & Fault # Description Action Open Pot Fault An external pot is connected and Check the external potentiometer cir- 09 the common side of the pot is cuit at TB2 for an open circuit. open. The drive generates this fault when the voltage between pot leads is greater than 3.9V DC. Op Error Fault A SCANport device requests a Check programming. 11 Read or Write of a data type not supported. This will also occur if: 1. [Motor Type] is set to “Sync PM” and [Stop Mode Used] is set to “DC Brake”, or 2. [Motor Type] is set to “Sync Re- luc” or “Sync PM” and [Speed Control] is set to “Slip Comp”. Option Error A slot A analog option board has Remove or relocate to proper slot. 14 been installed in slot B or A slot B board has been installed in slot A Overcurrent Flt Overcurrent is detected in instan- Check for a short circuit at the drive 12 taneous overcurrent trip circuit. output or excessive load conditions at the motor. Overload Fault Internal electronic overload trip. An excessive motor load exists. It 07 must be reduced such that drive out- put current does not exceed the cur- rent set by the [Overload Amps] parameter. Overspeed Fault Not functional at time of printing. 25 Overtemp Fault Heat sink temperature exceeds a Check for blocked or dirty heat sink 08 predefined value of 90° C fins. Check that the ambient tempera- (195° F). ture has not exceeded 40° C (104° F). Check fan. Overvolt Fault DC bus voltage exceeded maxi- Monitor the AC line for high line volt- 05 mum value. age or transient conditions. Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration. Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option. Phase U Fault A phase to ground fault has been Check the wiring between the drive 38 detected between the drive and and motor. Check motor for grounded motor in this phase. phase. Phase V Fault A phase to ground fault has been Check the wiring between the drive 39 detected between the drive and and motor. Check motor for grounded motor in this phase. phase. Phase W Fault A phase to ground fault has been Check the wiring between the drive 40 detected between the drive and and motor. Check motor for grounded motor in this phase. phase. Poles Calc Flt Generated if the calculated value Check [Motor NP RPM] and [Motor 50 of [Motor Poles] is less than 2 or NP Hertz] programming. greater than 32. Power Loss Fault DC bus voltage remained below Monitor the incoming AC line for low 03 85% of nominal for longer than voltage or line power interruption. 500ms. [Line Loss Fault] parame- ter is set to “enabled.” Power Mode Fault The internal power mode variable Check all connections to the Control 26 received an incorrect value. Board. Replace the board or com- plete drive as required. 7–6 Troubleshooting Name & Fault # Description Action Power Overload The drive rating of 150% for 1 Reduce load. 64 minute has been exceeded. Precharge Fault The precharge device was open See Chapter 1 for frame definitions. 19 20ms after the end of a line loss 1. Frames A1, A2, A3 - Check the pre- condition or the bus charging charge circuit. Replace the drive. alarm remains on for 20 seconds 2. Frame B - Check the precharge cir- (precharge did not complete). cuit. Replace the Power Driver Bd. or complete drive as required. 3. All larger frames - Check the pre- charge circuit. Replace the input SCRs, SCR Firing Board, Power Driver Board or complete drive as needed. Precharge Open The precharge circuit was com- See page 1–1 for frame definitions. 56 manded to close, but was 1. Frames A1, A2, A3 - Check the pre- detected to be open. charge circuit. Replace the drive. 2. Frame B - Check the precharge cir- cuit. Replace the Power Driver Bd. or complete drive as required. 3. All larger frames - Check the pre- charge circuit. Replace the input SCRs, SCR Firing Board, Power Driver Board or complete drive as needed. Prm Access Flt A communication error occurred Record the value in [Fault Data], then 34 between the microprocessor and reset the fault. If this fault occurs the serial EEPROM or the DSP. repeatedly, contact factory. Reprogram Fault The drive was commanded to 1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive. 48 write default values to EEPROM. 2. Program the drive parameters as needed. Important: If [Input Mode] has been changed from its original value, power must be cycled before the new value will take affect. ROM or RAM Flt Internal power-up ROM or RAM Replace Control Board or complete 68 tests have not executed properly. drive as required. Serial Fault A SCANport adapter has been 1. If no adapter was intentionally dis- connected, check wiring to the 10 disconnected and the [Logic SCANport adapters. Replace wir- Mask] bit for that adapter is set to ing, SCANport expander, “1.” SCANport adapters, Main Control Board or complete drive as required. 2. If an adapter was intentionally dis- connected and the [Logic Mask] bit for that adapter is set to “1”, this fault will occur. To guard against this fault occurring, set the [Logic Mask] bit for the adapter to “0.” 3. Check HIM connection for proper seating. Shear Pin Fault Programmed [Current Limit] amps Check load requirements and [Cur- 63 has been exceeded and [Shear rent Limit] setting. Pin Fault] is enabled. Step Logic Flt 1. [SLx Step Jump] is set to “End 1. Check conditions that caused [SLx Fault.” Step Jump] to occur. 69 2. [Encoder Counts] has reached 2. Zero [Encoder Counts]. Change [Enc Count Scale]. the endpoint of ±32767. Troubleshooting 7–7 Name & Fault # Description Action Sync Loss Fault Not functional at time of printing. 67 Temp Sense Open Heat sink thermistor is open or Check thermistor and connections. 55 malfunctioning. Undervolt Fault DC Bus voltage fell below the Monitor the incoming AC line for low 04 minimum value (388V DC at 460V voltage or line power interruption. AC input). [Line Loss Fault] and [Low Bus Fault] set to “enabled.” UV Short Fault Excessive current has been Check the motor and external wiring 41 detected between these two out- to the drive output terminals for a put terminals. shorted condition. UW Short Fault Excessive current has been Check the motor and external wiring 42 detected between these two out- to the drive output terminals for a put terminals. shorted condition. VW Short Fault Excessive current has been Check the motor and external wiring 43 detected between these two out- to the drive output terminals for a put terminals. shorted condition. Xsistr Desat Flt One or more of the output transis- Check for damaged output transis- 47 tors were operating in the active tors. Replace output transistors, (Frame C & Above) region instead of desaturation. Power Driver Board or complete drive This can be caused by excessive as needed. transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage. Table 7.B HIM Upload/Download Errors Fault Name Error Displayed Probable Cause Action HIM -> Drive ERROR 1 The HIM calculated a checksum for the file to be Upload a valid, uncorrupted file from the downloaded, then checked the EEPROM source drive and then repeat the download. checksum of the download. The checksums did not match, indicating the file stored in the HIM is invalid and the download was not successful. ERROR 2 The number of parameters in the HIM file is Verify that the correct file is being different than the number of parameters in the downloaded to the correct drive, then press drive file. The smaller of the two numbers is the the Enter key. number of parameters downloaded. The last Manually reprogram parameters with num- downloaded parameter number is displayed. bers higher than the last number down- loaded or whose values were incorrect. ERROR 3 The file in the HIM is for a different type of drive None - Download not allowed. than the drive to which it is connected (i.e. 1336 PLUS file to 1336 IMPACT drive). Downloads can only occur between like drive types. ERROR 4 The value just transferred to the drive is an illegal Record the parameter number displayed value (out of range, too high or too low) for the and then press Enter to continue the parameter. download. Manually reprogram all recorded parameters after the download is complete. ERROR 5 The download was attempted while the drive was Stop the drive and repeat the download running. attempt. ERROR 6 The file in the HIM is for a different HP or voltage If the download is desired, press the Enter drive than the drive to which it is connected (i.e. key. If not desired, press the ESCape key to 1336 PLUS 10 HP file to 1336 PLUS 15 HP drive). end the download Drive -> HIM ERROR 1 The HIM calculated a checksum as the file was Repeat the Upload. uploaded and compared it to the HIM file checksum stored after the upload. The checksums did not match, indicating the upload was not successful and the HIM file is now corrupted. 7–8 Troubleshooting Table 7.C Fault Code Cross Reference Fault # Display Name Reset/Run Fault # Display Name Reset/Run 02 Auxiliary Fault Yes 56 Precharge Open No 03 Power Loss Fault Yes 57 Ground Warning No 04 Undervolt Fault Yes 58 Blwn Fuse Flt No 05 Overvolt Fault Yes 60 Encoder Loss No 06 Motor Stall Fault Yes 61 Mult Prog Input No 07 Overload Fault Yes 62 Ill Prog Input No 08 Overtemp Fault Yes 63 Shear Pin Fault No 09 Open Pot Fault No 64 Power Overload No 10 Serial Fault No 65 Adptr Freq Err No 11 Op Error Fault No 66 EEprom Checksum No 12 Overcurrent Flt Yes 67 Sync Loss Fault No 13 Ground Fault No 68 ROM or RAM Flt No 14 Option Error No 69 Step Logic Flt No 15 Motor Thermistor No Note: Fault Numbers not listed are reserved for future use. 16 Bipolar Dir Flt No 17 C167 Watchdog No 18 Hardware Trap No 19 Precharge Fault No 20 Load Loss Flt No 22 DSP Reset Fault Yes 23 Loop Overrn Flt Yes 24 Motor Mode Flt Yes 26 Power Mode Fault Yes 27 DSP Comm Fault No 28 DSP Timeout Fault No 29 Hertz Err Fault No 30 Hertz Sel Fault No 31 DSP Queue Fault No 32 EEprom Fault No 33 Max Retries Fault No 34 Prm Access Flt No 35 Neg Slope Fault No 36 Diag C Lim Flt No 37 DSP Checksum No 38 Phase U Fault No 39 Phase V Fault No 40 Phase W Fault No 41 UV Short Fault No 42 UW Short Fault No 43 VW Short Fault No 46 DSP Protected No 47 Xsistr Desat Flt No 48 Reprogram Fault No 49 Input Phase Flt No 50 Poles Calc Fault No 51 Bgnd 10ms Over Yes 52 Fgnd 10ms Over Yes 53 EE Init Read No 54 EE Init Value No 55 Temp Sense Open No Troubleshooting 7–9 Alarms Table 7.D presents a listing and description of the drive alarms. Alarm status can be viewed by selecting the [Drive Alarm 1/2] parameter. An active alarm will be indicated by its corresponding bit being set to high (1). Any high bit (1) can energize CR1-4 (if programmed). Parameter Name [Drive Alarm 1] Parameter Number 60 Parameter Type Read Only Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Auto Reset Bus Charging Motor OL Trip Hardware Current Limit 4-20 mA Loss Motoring Current Limit Phase Loss Regenerating Current Limit Sync Loss Regenerating Voltage Limit Heatsink Temp Line Loss In Progress Auxiliary Input Mtr Overload Ground Warning Motor Stalled Parameter Name [Drive Alarm 2] Parameter Number 269 Parameter Type Read Only Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Voltage Check Motor Therm Unused Enc Cnt Max Load Loss Enc Cnt Set Encoder Loss Table 7.D Alarm Conditions Alarm Bit Alarm Name Description [Drive 0 Bus Charging Precharge of DC bus capacitors is in progress. Alarm 1] 1 Hardware Current Limit An alarm will be issued when 220% of drive rated current is reached. 2 Motoring Current Limit The value programmed for [Current Limit] has been exceeded while in the motoring mode. 3 Regenerating Current Limit An alarm will be issued when the value set for [Current Limit] has been exceeded while the motor is regenerating. 4 Regenerating Voltage Limit Bus limiting is active. 5 Line Loss In Progress An alarm will be issued when the AC incoming voltage drops below 20% of input or a 150 volt drop takes place. 6 Mtr Overload At the present value of output amps, a motor overload trip will eventually occur. 7 Motor Stalled Drive output frequency folds to 0 Hz and current limit is still active or voltage limit will not allow decel. 8 Ground Warning Ground current exceeds 2 amperes. 9 Auxiliary Input Input circuit is open. 10 Heatsink Temp Temperature of drive heatsink has exceeded its limit. 11 Sync Loss Synchronous motor not at synchronous speed. 12 Phase Loss The DC bus ripple has exceeded the level in [Phase Loss Level]. 13 4-20mA Loss 4-20mA signal lost. 14 Motor OL Trip This bit will be high when the motor overload function has integrated high enough to cause a motor overload fault. This bit is active regardless of the [Motor Overload] state (enabled/disabled). 15 Auto Reset Drive is attempting to reset a fault using [Reset/Run Tries] & [Reset/Run Time]. 7–10 Troubleshooting Table 7.E (continued) Alarm Conditions Alarm Bit Alarm Name Description [Drive 0 Motor Therm The value at the thermistor terminals has been exceeded. This bit will be active only when [Motor Alarm 2] Therm Flt] is enabled and an analog option board with thermistor input is installed. 1 Load Loss [Load Loss Detect] is set to “Enabled” and the drive output torque current was below [Load Loss Level] for a time period greater than [Load Loss time]. 2 Encoder Loss Error has occurred in the encoder signals at TB3, terminals 31-36. 3 Enc Cnt Set [Encoder Counts] has reached the endpoint of ±32767. 4 Enc Cnt Max The value of [Encoder Counts] has exceeded [Max Enc Counts]. 5 Voltage Check Voltage at drive output terminals is equal to, or greater than 10% of drive rated volts (i.e. 46V for 460V drive) when Start command is issued and flying start is disabled. Drive will not start until terminal voltage falls below 10% of drive rating or flying start is enabled. I I 6 6 N N L L D D 6 6 5 5 C C O O Appendix A Specifications and Supplemental Information Specifications Protection 200-240V Drive 380-480V Drive 500-600V Drive AC Input Overvoltage Trip: 285V AC 570V AC 690V AC AC Input Undervoltage Trip: 138V AC 280V AC 343V AC Bus Overvoltage Trip: 405V DC 810V DC 1013V DC Bus Undervoltage Trip: 200V DC 400V DC 498V DC Nominal Bus Voltage: 324V DC 648V DC 810V DC Heat Sink Thermistor: Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip. Drive Overcurrent Trip Software Current Limit: 20 to 160% of VT rated current. Hardware Current Limit: 180 to 250% of VT rated current (dependent on drive rating). Instantaneous Current Limit: 220 to 300% of VT rated current (dependent on drive rating). Line transients: up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991. 2 Control Logic Noise Immunity: Showering arc transients up to 1500 volts peak . Power Ride-Thru: 15 milliseconds at full load. Logic Control Ride-Thru: 0.5 seconds minimum, 2 seconds typical. Ground Fault Trip: Phase-to-ground on drive output. Short Circuit Trip: Phase-to-phase on drive output. Environment Altitude: 1000 m (3300 ft) max. without derating. Ambient Operating Temperature IP00, Open: 0 to 50 degrees C (32 to 122 degrees F). IP20, NEMA Type 1 Enclosed: 0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F). IP54, NEMA Type 12 Enclosed: 0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F). IP65, NEMA Type 4 Enclosed: 0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F). Storage Temperature (all constructions): –40 to 70 degrees C (–40 to 158 degrees F). Atmosphere Important: Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas, vapors or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time, it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere. Relative Humidity: 5 to 95% non-condensing. Shock: 15G peak for 11ms duration (±1.0ms). Vibration: 0.006 inches (0.152 mm) displacement, 1G peak. Agency Certification: U.L. Listed   CSA Certified 1 Marked for all applicable directives Emissions EN 50081-1 EN 50081-2 EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class B EN 61800-3 Immunity EN 50082-1 EN 50082-2 IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 per EN 50082-1, 2 EN 61800-3 Low Voltage EN 60204-1 PREN 50178 1 Note: Installation guidelines called out in Appendix C must be adhered to. 2 Applied noise impulses may be counted in addition to the standard pulse train causing erroneously high [Pulse Freq] readings. D D N N E E T T T T S S E E I I Q Q L L A–2 Specifications and Supplemental Information Electrical Input Data Voltage Tolerance: –10% of minimum, +10% of maximum. Frequency Tolerance: 47-63 Hz. Input Phases: Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives. Single-phase operation is possible for A & B Frame drives at a derating of 50%. Displacement Power Factor A1-A3 Frame Drives: 0.80 standard, 0.95 with optional inductor. A4 Frame & Up Drives: 0.95 standard. Efficiency: 97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts. Max. Short Circuit Current Rating: Installations per U.S. NEC/UL/CSA Using Specified Fuses 200,000A Using Specified HMCP Breakers Per “Max. Short Circuit Amps” column in Table 2.A, specific to each rating. Using Specified HMCP Breakers with Current Limiter Option 200,000A IEC Installations per IEC947 Using Specified 140 Devices Per “Rated Service Short Circuit Capability” column in Table 2.A, specific to each rating. Control Method: Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency. Ratings apply to all drives (refer to the Derating Guidelines on page A–5). A & B Frame Drives 2-8 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz (see pg.1–1 for frame info). C & D Frame Drives 2-6 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz (see pg.1–1 for frame info). E Frame Drives & Up 2-6 kHz. Drive rating based on 2 kHz (see pg.1–1 for frame info). Output Voltage Range: 0 to rated voltage. Output Frequency Range: 0 to 400 Hz. Frequency Accuracy Digital Input: Within ±0.01% of set output frequency. Analog Input: Within ±0.4% of maximum output frequency. Selectable Motor Control: Sensorless Vector with full tuning. Standard V/Hz with full custom capability. Accel/Decel: Two independently programmable accel and decel times. Each time 1 may be programmed from 0 - 3600 seconds in 0.1 second increments . Intermittent Overload: Constant Torque - 150% of rated output for 1 minute. Variable Torque - 115% of rated output for 1 minute. Current Limit Capability: Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160% of rated output current. Independently programmable proportional and integral gain. Inverse Time Overload Cap. Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Investigated by U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430. U.L. File E59272, volume 4/6. 1 0.1 second increments using a HIM or 0.01 with serial communications. Input/Output Ratings Each 1336 PLUS II Drive has constant and variable torque capabil- ities. The listings on the next page provide input & output current and kVA ratings. Note: Drive ratings are at nominal values. See Derating Guidelines on page A–5. Specifications and Supplemental Information A–3 Constant Torque Variable Torque Variable Torque Cat. No. Input kVA Input Amps Output kVA Output Amps Input kVA Input Amps Output kVA Output Amps Input kVA Input Amps Output kVA Output Amps 200-240V DRIVES 240V DRIVES AQF05 1.1 2.8 0.9 2.3 1.1 2.8 0.9 2.3 AQF07 1.4 3.5 1.2 3.0 1.4 3.5 1.2 3.0 AQF10 2.2 5.4 1.8 4.5 2.2 5.4 1.8 4.5 AQF15 2.9 7.3 2.4 6.0 2.9 7.3 2.4 6.0 AQF20 3.9 9.7 3.2 8.0 3.9 9.7 3.2 8.0 AQF30 5.7 14.3 4.8 12 5.7 14.3 4.8 12 AQF50 8.5 21.3 7.2 18 8.5 21.3 7.2 18 AQF75 9.0 22.6 8.8 22 9.0 22.6 8.8 22 A007 8-10 23 8.8 22 10 23 8.8 22 A010 12-14 35 14 34 14 35 14 34 A015 17-20 49 19 48 20 49 19 48 A020 22-26 63 26 65 26 63 26 65 A025 26-31 75 31 77 31 75 31 77 A030 27-33 79 32 80 33 79 32 80 A040 41-49 119 48 120 49 119 48 120 A050 52-62 149 60 150 62 149 60 150 A060 62-74 178 72 180 74 178 72 180 A075 82-99 238 96 240 99 238 96 240 A100 100-120 289 116 291 120 289 116 291 A125 112-134 322 129 325 134 322 129 325 380-480V DRIVES 480V DRIVES 400V DRIVES BRF05 0.9-1.0 1.3 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.0 1.2 0.9 1.4 1.0 1.33 BRF07 1.3-1.6 2.0 1.3 1.6 1.7 2.1 1.4 1.7 1.4 2.1 1.4 1.89 BRF10 1.7-2.1 2.6 1.7 2.1 2.2 2.8 1.8 2.3 1.8 2.8 1.8 2.55 BRF15 2.2-2.6 3.3 2.2 2.8 2.8 3.5 2.4 3.0 2.3 3.5 2.4 3.33 BRF20 3.0-3.7 4.6 3.0 3.8 3.8 4.8 3.2 4.0 3.2 4.8 3.2 4.44 BRF30 4.2-5.1 6.4 4.2 5.3 5.7 7.2 4.8 6.0 4.7 7.2 4.8 6.66 BRF50 6.6-8.0 10.0 6.7 8.4 8.5 10.7 7.2 9.0 7.0 10.7 7.2 9.99 BRF75 8.9-11.3 13.6 10.6 13.3 13.0 15.7 12.3 15.4 10.3 15.7 12.3 19.43 BRF100 10.8-13.6 16.4 12.8 16.1 18.6 22.4 17.5 22 14.7 22.4 17.5 22.00 BRF150 16.1-20.4 24.5 19.1 24 20.4 24.5 19.1 24 16.1 24.5 19.1 24.00 BRF200 18.0-23.0 28 22 27 23 28 22 27 18 28 22 27.75 B015 16-21 25 19 24.2 23 28 22 27 18 28 22 29.97 B020 21-26 32 25 31 29 35 27 34 23 35 27 37.74 B025 26-33 40 31 39 36 43 33 42 28 43 33 46.62 B030 30-38 46 36 45 41 49 38 48 32 49 38 53.28 BX040 40-50 61 47 59 50 61 47 59 40 61 47 66.60 B040 38-48 58 48 60 52 63 52 65 41 63 52 72.15 B050 48-60 73 60 75 62 75 61 77 49 75 61 83.25 1 BX060 62 75 61 77 62 75 61 77 62 75 61 85.47 B060 54-68 82 68 85 77 93 76 96 61 93 76 106.56 B075 69-87 105 84 106 99 119 96 120 78 119 96 133.20 B100 90-114 137 110 138 124 149 120 150 98 149 120 166.50 B125 113-143 172 138 173 148 178 143 180 117 178 143 199.80 BX150 148 178 143 180 148 178 143 180 148 178 143 199.80 B150 130-164 197 159 199 198 238 191 240 157 238 191 266.40 B200 172-217 261 210 263 241 290 233 292 191 290 233 324.12 B250 212-268 322 259 325 268 322 259 325 212 322 259 360.75 BP/BPR250 212-268 322 259 325 297 357 287 360 235 357 287 399.60 BX250 212-268 322 259 325 297 357 287 360 228 347 279 399.60 B300 235-297 357 287 360 350 421 339 425 261 397 319 471.75 BP/BPR300 235-297 357 287 360 350 421 339 425 277 421 339 471.75 B350 277-350 421 339 425 392 471 378 475 294 446 359 527.25 BP/BPR350 277-350 421 339 425 392 471 378 475 310 471 378 527.25 B400 310-392 471 387 475 433 521 418 525 326 496 398 582.75 BP/BPR400 310-392 471 378 475 438 527 424 532 347 527 424 532.05 B450 343-433 521 418 525 486 585 470 590 372 565 454 654.90 BP/BPR450 347-438 527 424 532 438 527 424 532 347 527 424 532.00 B500 385-486 585 470 590 552 664 534 670 437 664 534 743.70 B600 437-552 664 534 670 552 664 534 670 437 664 534 743.70 500-600V DRIVES 600V DRIVES CWF10 2.1-2.5 2.4 2.1 2.0 2.5 2.4 2.1 2.0 CWF20 4.2-5.0 4.8 4.2 4.0 5.0 4.8 4.2 4.0 CWF30 6.2-7.5 7.2 6.2 6.0 7.5 7.2 6.2 6.0 CWF50 8.3-10.0 9.6 8.3 8.0 10.0 9.6 8.3 8.0 CWF75 9.0-11.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 11.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 CWF100 11.0-13.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 13.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 CWF150 17.0-20.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 20.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 CWF200 21.0-26.0 25.0 24.0 24.0 26.0 25.0 24.0 24.0 C025 27-32 31 30 30 32 31 30 30 C030 31-37 36 35 35 37 36 35 35 C040 38-45 44 45 45 45 44 45 45 C050 48-57 55 57 57 57 55 57 57 C060 52-62 60 62 62 62 60 62 62 C075 73-88 84 85 85 88 84 85 85 C100 94-112 108 109 109 112 108 109 109 C125 118-142 137 137 138 142 137 137 138 C150 144-173 167 167 168 173 167 167 168 C200 217-261 251 251 252 261 251 251 252 C250 244-293 282 283 284 293 282 283 284 CX300 256-307 295 297 298 307 295 297 298 C300 258-309 297 299 300 309 297 299 300 C350 301-361 347 349 350 361 347 349 350 CP/CPR350 301-361 347 349 350 361 347 349 350 C400 343-412 397 398 400 412 397 398 400 CP/CPR400 343-412 397 398 400 412 397 398 400 C450 386-464 446 448 450 464 446 448 450 C500 429-515 496 498 500 515 496 498 500 C600 515-618 595 598 600 618 595 598 600 1 480 Volts Only. A–4 Specifications and Supplemental Information User Supplied Enclosures 1336 PLUS II drives installed in user supplied enclosures may be mounted within an enclosure or may be mounted to allow the heat sink to extend outside the enclosure. Use the information below in combination with the enclosure manufacturer’s guidelines for sizing. Base Derate Derate Heat Dissipation Heat Sink Total 1 2, 3 2, 3, 4 2 2 Cat No. Amps Curve Drive Watts Watts Watts 200-240V DRIVES AQF05 2.3 Figure A 13 15 28 AQF07 3.0 Figure A 15 21 36 AQF10 4.5 Figure A 17 32 49 AQF15 6.0 Figure A 21 42 63 AQF20 8.0 Figure A 25 56 81 AQF30 12 Figure A 33 72 105 AQF50 18 Figure A 42 116 158 AQF75 22 Figure A 58 186 244 A007 27 No Derate 156 486 642 A010 34 Figure B 200 721 921 A015 48 Figure D 205 819 1024 A020 65 No Derate 210 933 1143 A025 77 No Derate 215 1110 1325 A030 80 No Derate 220 1110 1330 A040 120 Figure G 361 1708 2069 A050 150 Figure H 426 1944 2370 A060 180 Figure J 522 2664 3186 A075 240 Figure L 606 2769 3375 A100 291 Figure M 755 3700 4455 A125 325 Figure N 902 4100 5002 380-480V DRIVES BRF05 1.2 Figure A 12 9 21 BRF07 1.7 Figure A 13 15 28 BRF10 2.3 Figure A 15 20 35 BRF15 3.0 Figure A 16 27 43 BRF20 4.0 Figure A 19 36 55 BRF30 6.0 Figure A 23 54 77 BRF50 9.0 Figure A 29 84 113 BRF75 15.4 Figure A 58 186 244 BRF100 22.0 Figure A 68 232 300 BRF150 24.0 Figure A 88 332 420 BRF200 27.0 Figure A 96 356 452 B015 27 No Derate 117 486 603 B020 34 Figure B 140 628 768 B025 42 Figure C 141 720 861 B030 48 Figure D 141 820 961 BX040 59 Figure E 175 933 1108 B040 65 Figure E 175 933 1108 B050 77 Figure F 193 1110 1303 BX060 77 Figure F 193 1110 1303 B060 96 No Derate 361 1708 2069 B075 120 Figure G 361 1708 2069 B100 150 Figure H 426 1944 2370 B125 180 Figure J 522 2664 3186 BX150 180 Figure J 606 2769 3375 B150 240 Figure L 606 2769 3375 B200 292 Figure M 755 3700 4455 B250 325 Figure N 902 4100 5002 6 BP/BPR250 322 Figure O 491 4658 5149 BX250 360 No Derate 902 4100 5002 5 B300 425 No Derate 1005 4805 5810 6 BP/BPR300 357 Figure P 619 5342 5961 5 B350 475 No Derate 1055 5455 6510 6 BP/BPR350 421 Figure Q 733 6039 6772 5 B400 525 No Derate 1295 6175 7470 6 BP/BPR400 471 Figure R 793 6329 7122 5 B450 590 No Derate 1335 6875 8210 6 BP/BPR450 527 Figure S 931 7000 7931 5 B500 670 Figure T 1395 7525 8920 1 Base Derate Amps are based on nominal voltage 5 B600 670 Figure T 1485 8767 10252 (240, 480 or 600V). If input voltage exceeds Drive 500-600V DRIVES Rating, Drive Output must be derated. Refer to CWF10 2.4 Figure U 25 29 54 Figure AE. CWF20 4.8 Figure U 29 57 86 CWF30 7.2 Figure U 32 87 119 2 Rating is at 4 kHz (2 kHz for 224-448 kW/300-600 CWF50 9.6 Figure U 35 117 152 HP, 500-600V). If carrier frequencies above 4 kHz CWF75 10 Figure U 38 148 186 CWF100 12 Figure U 41 177 218 are selected, drive rating must be derated. See CWF150 19 Figure U 52 286 338 Figure A-AC. CWF200 24 Figure U 60 358 418 C025 30 No Derate 141 492 633 3 Drive Ambient Temperature Rating is 40° C. If C030 35 No Derate 141 526 667 ambient exceeds 40° C, the drive must be C040 45 No Derate 175 678 853 C050 57 No Derate 193 899 1092 derated. Refer to Figure A-AC. C060 62 No Derate 193 981 1174 4 Drive Rating is based on altitudes of 1,000 m C075 85 Figure G 361 1533 1894 C100 109 Figure I 426 1978 2404 (3,000 ft) or less. If installed at higher altitude, C125 138 Figure K 522 2162 2683 drive must be derated. Refer to Figure AD. C150 168 Figure V 606 2315 2921 5 C200 252 Figure W 755 3065 3820 Important: Two (2) 725 CFM fans are required if C250 284 Figure X 890 3625 4515 an open type drive is mounted in a user supplied CX300 300 Figure Y 940 3990 4930 5 C300 300 Figure AB & AC 926 5015 5941 enclosure. 5 C350 350 Figure AB & AC 1000 5935 6935 6 Important: 1336F-BPRxxx - two (2) 450 CFM CP/CPR350 350 Figure Z 580 6125 6705 5 C400 400 Figure AB & AC 1430 7120 8550 fans are required if an open type drive is mounted CP/CPR400 400 Figure AA 711 7000 7711 in a user supplied enclosure. 5 C450 450 Figure AB & AC 1465 8020 9485 5 C500 500 Figure AB & AC 1500 8925 10425 5 C600 600 Figure AB & AC 1610 10767 12377 Specifications and Supplemental Information A–5 Derating Guidelines Drive ratings can be affected by a number of factors. If more than one factor exists, derating percentages must be multiplied. For example, if a 42 Amp drive (B025) running at 8 kHz is installed at a 2,000 m (6,600 ft.) altitude and has a 2% high input line voltage, the actual amp rating will be: 42 x 94% Altitude Derate x 96% High Line Derate = 37.9 Amps Ambient Temperature / Carrier Frequency Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in . 40°C Ambient & Open Drive in 50°C Ambient. Ambient between 41°C & 50°C. Figure/Rating Derate Figure/Rating Derate 100% 100% Figure A Figure B AQF05-75 98% A010 98% BRF05-200 B020 96% 96% 94% 94% 92% 92% 90% 90% 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz 100% Figure C 100% Figure D 95% B025 A015 96% 90% B030 92% 85% 80% 88% 75% 84% 70% 65% 80% 8 2 4 6 2 4 6 8 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz 100% Figure E 100% Figure F 95% 98% B040 B050 96% 90% BX040 BX060 94% 85% 80% 92% 75% 90% 70% 88% 65% 86% 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure G Figure H 100% 100% 95% A040 A050 98% 90% B075 B100 96% 85% C075 80% 94% 75% 92% 70% 90% 65% 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure I Figure J 100% 100% 95% C100 98% A060 90% B125 96% 85% BX150 80% 94% 75% 92% 70% 90% 65% 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps A–6 Specifications and Supplemental Information Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in 40°C Ambient & Open Drive in 50°C Ambient. Ambient between 41°C & 50°C. Figure/Rating Derate Figure/Rating Derate Figure K Figure L 100% 100% 95% C125 A075, B150 96% 90% 92% 85% 80% 88% 75% 84% 70% 65% 80% 2 4 (40%) 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure M Figure N 100% 100% 95% 95% A100, B200 A125 90% 90% B250 85% 85% 80% 80% 75% 75% 70% 70% 65% 65% (60%) 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure O Figure P 100% 100% 95% BP250 BP300 96% 90% BPR250 BPR300 92% 85% 80% 88% 75% 84% 70% 80% 65% 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure Q Figure R 100% 100% BP350 BP400 90% 90% BPR350 BPR400 80% 80% 70% 70% 60% 60% 50% 50% 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure S Figure T Assumes two (2) 725 CFM cooling fans for 100% IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure BP450 B500 90% 100% BPR450 B600 80% 90% 60 Hz 80% 70% 70% 50 Hz 60% 60 Hz 60% 50% 50 Hz 2 4 6 50% Carrier Frequency in kHz 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure U Figure V 100% 100% 95% CWF10-200 C150 98% 90% 96% 85% Not 80% Recommended 94% 75% 92% 70% 90% 65% 2 4 6 2 4 6 8 10 12 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Specifications and Supplemental Information A–7 Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in 40°C Ambient & Open Drive in 50°C Ambient. Ambient between 41°C & 50°C. Figure/Rating Derate Figure/Rating Derate Figure W Figure X 100% 100% 90% C200 90% C250 80% 80% 70% 70% 60% 60% 50% 50% 40% 40% 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure Y 100% Figure Z 100% 90% CX300 CP350 90% CPR350 80% 80% 70% 70% 60% 60% 50% 50% 40% 2 4 6 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure AA 100% CP400 90% CPR400 80% 70% 60% 50% 2 4 6 Carrier Frequency in kHz Figure AB Assumes two (2) 725 CFM cooling fans for Figure AC Assumes two (2) 725 CFM cooling fans for IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure C300-C600 C300-C600 100% 100% C300/ Enclosed drive in Enclosed drive in C350 90% 40° C. ambient 41-50° C. ambient 90% C400 C300 80% 80% C450 C350 70% 70% C500 C400 60% 60% C450 C600 50% C500 50% C600 40% 40% 2 4 6 2 3 4 Carrier Frequency in kHz Carrier Frequency in kHz 6kHZ Data Not Available at Time of Printing Altitude and High Input Voltage Figure/Rating Derate 100% Figure AD Altitude - All 90% Ratings 80% 0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 m (3,300) (6,600) (9,900) (13,200) (ft) Altitude 100% Figure AE Required Only for the following drives: 1336F-x025 – 18.5 kW (25 HP) at 8 kHz High Input 1336F-x030 – 22 kW (30 HP) at 6 or 8 kHz 1336F-x060 – 45 kW (60 HP) at 6 kHz Voltage 90% 80% 240, 480 or 600V Nominal +2% +4% +6% +8% +10% Input Voltage % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive Rated Amps % of Drive Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps % of Drive % of Drive % of Drive Rated Amps Rated Amps Rated Amps A–8 Specifications and Supplemental Information Parameter Cross Reference - By Number No. Name Group No. Name Group No. Name Group 1 Output Voltage Metering 100 Fault Mask Masks 225 PI Preload Process PI 2 % Output Curr Metering 101 MOP Mask Masks 226 Shear Pin Fault Faults 3 % Output Power Metering 102 Stop Owner Owners 227 Adaptive I Lim Setup 4 Last Fault Metering 103 Direction Owner Owners 228 LLoss Restart Feature Select 5 Freq Select 1 Frequency Set + Setup 104 Start Owner Owners 229 Freq Ref SqRoot Frequency Set 6 Freq Select 2 Frequency Set 105 Jog Owner Owners 230 Save MOP Ref Frequency Set 7 Accel Time 1 Setup 106 Reference Owner Owners 231 Hold Level Sel Advanced Setup 8 Decel Time 1 Setup 107 Accel Owner Owners 232 Current Lmt Sel Setup 9 Control Select Motor Control 108 Decel Owner Owners 233 Anlg Out 0 Abs Analog I/O 10 Stop Select 1 Advanced Setup + Setup 109 Fault Owner Owners 234/235 Anlg Out 0 Lo/Hi Analog I/O 11 Bus Limit En Advanced Setup 110 MOP Owner Owners 236 Drive Status 2 Diagnostics 12 DC Hold Time Advanced Setup 111 -118 Data In A1-D2 Adapter I/O 237/238 Anlg In 0 Lo/Hi Analog I/O 13 DC Hold Level Advanced Setup 119 -126 Data Out A1-D2 Adapter I/O 239/240 Anlg In 1 Lo/Hi Analog I/O 14 Run On Power Up Feature Select 127 Process 1 Par Process Display 241 Input Mode Setup + Digital I/O 15 Reset/Run Time Feature Select 128 Process 1 Scale Process Display 242-247 TB3 Term Sel Digital I/O 16 Minimum Freq Advanced Setup + Setup 129-136 Process 1 Txt 1-8 Process Display 248/249 Anlg In 2 Lo/Hi Analog I/O 17 Base Frequency Motor Control 137 MOP Freq Metering 250 Anlg Signal Loss Analog I/O 18 Base Voltage Motor Control 138-140 Anlg In 0-2 Freq Metering 251 Cntrl Board Rev Ratings 19 Maximum Freq Advanced Setup + Setup 141 Motor Mode Diagnostics 252/253 Slot A/B Option Analog I/O 20 Maximum Voltage Motor Control 142 Power Mode Diagnostics 254 Pulse Freq Metering 22 MOP Increment Frequency Set 143 Flt Motor Mode Faults 255 Slip Adder Encoder Feedback 23 Output Power Metering 144 Flt Power Mode Faults 256 Line Loss Mode Feature Select 24 Jog Frequency Frequency Set 145 Fault Frequency Faults 264 Pulse In Scale Freq. Set + Digital I/O 25 Anlg Out 0 Sel Analog I/O 146 Fault Status 1 Faults 267 Dig At Temp Digital I/O 26 Stop Mode Used Diagnostics 147 Rated Volts Ratings 268 Motor Therm Flt Faults 27-29 Preset Freq 1-3 Frequency Set 148 Rated CT Amps Ratings 269 Drive Alarm 2 Diagnostics 30 Accel Time 2 Advanced Setup 149 Rated CT kW Ratings 270 Latched Alarms 2 Diagnostics 31 Decel Time 2 Advanced Setup 150 4-20mA Loss Sel Analog I/O 271 Alarm Mask 2 Masks 32-34 Skip Freq 1-3 Frequency Set 151 Maximum Speed Encoder Feedback 272 Meas. Volts Diagnostics 35 Skip Freq Band Frequency Set 152 Encoder Type Encoder Feedback 274 Anlg Out 1 Sel Analog I/O 36 Current Limit Setup 153 Motor Poles Encoder Feedback 275 Anlg Out 1 Lo Analog I/O 37 Overload Mode Setup 154 Anlg Out 0 Offst Analog I/O 276 Anlg Out 1 Hi Analog I/O 38 Overload Amps Setup 155 Flying Start En Feature Select 277 Anlg Out 1 Abs Analog I/O 39 Flt Clear Mode Faults 156 FStart Forward Feature Select 278 Anlg Out 1 Offst Analog I/O 40 Line Loss Fault Faults 157 FStart Reverse Feature Select 279 Elapsed Run Time Metering 41 Motor Type Advanced Setup 158 CR1 Out Select Digital I/O 280 Pulse Out Select Digital I/O 42 Slip @ F.L.A. Feature Select 159 Dig Out Freq Digital I/O 281 Pulse Out Scale Digital I/O 43 Dwell Frequency Feature Select 160 Dig Out Current Digital I/O 282 Enc Count Scale Encoder Feedback 44 Dwell Time Feature Select 161 Dig Out Torque Digital I/O 283 Encoder Counts Encoder Feedback 45 PWM Frequency Advanced Setup 162 Torque Current Metering 284 Encoder Loss Sel Encoder Feedback 46 Encoder PPR Freq. Set + Enc. Fdbk. 163 Flux Current Metering 286 Fault Status 2 Faults 47 Language Feature Select 164 Speed KP Encoder Feedback 287 Fault Alarms 2 Faults 48 Start Boost Motor Control 165 Speed KI Encoder Feedback 288 Bus Regulation Feature Select 49 Break Frequency Motor Control 166 Speed Error Encoder Feedback 290 Load Loss Detect Feature Select 50 Break Voltage Motor Control 167 Speed Integral Encoder Feedback 291 Load Loss Level Feature Select 51 Clear Fault Faults 168 Speed Adder Encoder Feedback 292 Load Loss Time Feature Select 52 Stop Select 2 Advanced Setup 169 Boost Slope Motor Control 293 PI Max Error Digital I/O 53 DC Bus Voltage Metering 170 Rated Amps Ratings 303 Current Limit En Setup 54 Output Current Metering 171 Rated kW Ratings 304 Traverse Dec Feature Select 55 Input Status Digital I/O + Diagnostics 172 EEPROM Cksum Diagnostics 305 Traverse Mask Masks 56 S Curve Time Feature Select 173 Fault Alarms 1 Faults 306 Traverse Owner Owners 57 S Curve Enable Feature Select 174-176 CR2-4 Out Select Digital I/O 307 Sync Time Advanced Setup 58 Common Bus Advanced Setup 177 Motor NP RPM Setup + Enc. Fdbk. 308 Sync Mask Masks 59 Drive Status 1 Diagnostics 178 Motor NP Hertz Setup + Enc. Fdbk. 309 Sync Owner Owners 60 Drive Alarm 1 Diagnostics 179 Local Owner Owners 310 Sync Loss Sel Motor Control 61 Drive Type Ratings 180 Process 2 Par Process Display 311 Sync Loss Gain Motor Control 62 Freq Source Diagnostics 181 Process 2 Scale Process Display 312 Sync Loss Time Motor Control 63 Encoder Freq Metering + Enc. Fdbk. 182-189 Process 2 Txt 1-8 Process Display 313 Sync Loss Comp Motor Control 64 Set Defaults Diagnostics 190 Motor NP Volts Setup 314 Braking Chopper Advanced Setup 65 Freq Command Metering + Diagnostics 191 Motor NP Amps Setup 315 Alt Type 2 Cmd Adapter I/O 66 Output Freq Metering 192 Flux Amps Ref Motor Control 316 Application Sts Diagnostics 67 Output Pulses Diagnostics 193 KP Amps Advanced Setup 317 Run/Accel Volts Motor Control 69 Drive Direction Diagnostics 194 IR Drop Volts Motor Control 319 Speed Brake En Advanced Setup 70 Heatsink Temp Metering + Diagnostics 195 Slip Comp Gain Feature Select 320 Line Loss Volts Feature Select 71 Firmware Ver. Ratings 198 Rated VT Amps Ratings 321 Loss Recover Feature Select 72 Current Angle Diagnostics 199 Rated VT kW Ratings 322 Ride Thru Volts Feature Select 73-76 Preset Freq 4-7 Frequency Set 200 Flux Up Time Motor Control 323 Min Bus Volts Feature Select 77 Speed Control Feature Select + Process 201 Motor OL Fault Faults 324 Stability Gain Motor Control PI + Encoder Feedback. 202 Motor OL Count Metering 325 Bus Reg Level Feature Select 78 Traverse Inc Feature Select 203 VT Scaling Setup Max Bus Volts Feature Select 79 Max Traverse Feature Select 204 Ground Warning Faults 326 Remote CR Output Digital I/O 80 P Jump Feature Select 205 Latched Alarms 1 Diagnostics 327 At Time Digital I/O 81 Blwn Fuse Flt Faults 206 Alarm Mask 1 Masks 328 Max Enc Counts Encoder Feedback 82 Cur Lim Trip En Faults 207 Fault Data Faults 329 Bidir In Offset Linear List 83 Run Boost Motor Control 212 DC Bus Memory Diagnostics 330 Phase Loss Mode Faults 84 Power OL Count Metering 213 PI Config Process PI 331 Phase Loss Level Faults 85 Reset/Run Tries Feature Select 214 PI Status Process PI 332 Precharge Fault Faults 86-89 Fault Buffer 0-3 Faults 215 PI Ref Select Process PI 333 PWM Comp Time Motor Control 90 Analog Trim En Analog I/O 216 PI Fdbk Select Process PI 334 Break Freq/PWM Motor Control 91 Low Bus Fault Faults 217 PI Reference Process PI 335-371 SLx Logic Step Step Logic 92 Logic Mask Masks 218 PI Feedback Process PI 336-372 SLx Logic Jump Step Logic 93 Local Mask Masks 219 PI Error Process PI 337-373 SLx Step Jump Step Logic 94 Direction Mask Masks 220 PI Output Process PI 338-374 SLx Step Setting Step Logic 95 Start Mask Masks 221 KI Process Process PI 339-375 SLx Time Step Logic 96 Jog Mask Masks 222 KP Process Process PI 340-376 SLx Encoder Cnts Step Logic 97 Reference Mask Masks 223 PI Neg Limit Process PI 377 Current Step Step Logic 98 Accel Mask Masks 224 PI Pos Limit Process PI 379 Motor OL Ret Faults 99 Decel Mask Masks Specifications and Supplemental Information A–9 Parameter Cross Reference - By Name Name No. Group Name No. Group Name No. Group % Output Curr 2 Metering Fault Alarms 2 287 Faults PI Feedback 218 Process PI % Output Power 3 Metering Fault Buffer 0-3 86-89 Faults PI Max Error 293 Digital I/O 4-20mA Loss Sel 150 Analog I/O Fault Data 207 Faults PI Neg Limit 223 Process PI Accel Mask 98 Masks Fault Frequency 145 Faults PI Output 220 Process PI Accel Owner 107 Owners Fault Mask 100 Masks PI Pos Limit 224 Process PI Accel Time 1 7 Setup Fault Owner 109 Owners PI Preload 225 Process PI Accel Time 2 30 Advanced Setup Fault Status 1 146 Faults PI Ref Select 215 Process PI Adaptive I Lim 227 Setup Fault Status 2 286 Faults PI Reference 217 Process PI Alarm Mask 1, 2 206, 271 Masks Firmware Ver. 71 Ratings PI Status 214 Process PI Alt Type 2 Cmd 315 Adapter I/O Flt Clear Mode 39 Faults Power Mode 142 Diagnostics Analog Trim En 90 Analog I/O Flt Motor Mode 143 Faults Power OL Count 84 Metering Anlg In 0 Freq 138-140 Metering Flt Power Mode 144 Faults Precharge Fault 332 Faults Anlg In 0 Hi 238-249 Analog I/O Flux Amps Ref 192 Motor Control Preset Freq 1-3 27-29 Frequency Set Anlg In 0 Lo 237-248 Analog I/O Flux Current 163 Metering Preset Freq 4-7 73-76 Frequency Set Anlg In 1 Freq 138-140 Metering Flux Up Time 200 Motor Control Process 1 Par 127 Process Display Anlg In 1 Hi 238-249 Analog I/O Flying Start En 155 Feature Select Process 1 Scale 128 Process Display Anlg In 1 Lo 237-248 Analog I/O Freq Command 65 Metering + Diagnostics Process 1 Txt 1-8 129-136 Process Display Anlg In 2 Freq 138-140 Metering Freq Ref SqRoot 229 Frequency Set Process 2 Par 180 Process Display Process 2 Scale 181 Process Display Anlg In 2 Hi 238-249 Analog I/O Freq Select 1 5 Frequency Set + Setup Anlg In 2 Lo 237-248 Analog I/O Freq Select 2 6 Frequency Set Process 2 Txt 1-8 182-189 Process Display Anlg Out 0 Abs 233 Analog I/O Freq Source 62 Diagnostics Pulse Freq 254 Metering Anlg Out 0 Hi 235 Analog I/O FStart Forward 156 Feature Select Pulse In Scale 264 Freq. Set + Digital I/O Anlg Out 0 Lo 234 Analog I/O FStart Reverse 157 Feature Select Pulse Out Scale 281 Digital I/O Anlg Out 0 Offst 154 Analog I/O Ground Warning 204 Faults Pulse Out Select 280 Digital I/O Anlg Out 0 Sel 25 Analog I/O Heatsink Temp 70 Metering + Diagnostics PWM Comp Time 333 Motor Control Anlg Out 1 Abs 277 Analog I/O Hold Level Sel 231 Advanced Setup PWM Frequency 45 Advanced Setup Anlg Out 1 Hi 276 Analog I/O Input Mode 241 Setup + Digital I/O Rated Amps 170 Ratings Anlg Out 1 Lo 275 Analog I/O Input Status 55 Digital I/O + Diagnostics Rated CT Amps 148 Ratings Anlg Out 1 Offst 278 Analog I/O IR Drop Volts 194 Motor Control Rated CT kW 149 Ratings Anlg Out 1 Sel 274 Analog I/O Jog Frequency 24 Frequency Set Rated kW 171 Ratings Anlg Signal Loss 250 Analog I/O Jog Mask 96 Masks Rated Volts 147 Ratings Application Sts 316 Diagnostics Jog Owner 105 Owners Rated VT Amps 198 Ratings At Time 327 Digital I/O KI Process 221 Process PI Rated VT kW 199 Ratings Base Frequency 17 Motor Control KP Amps 193 Advanced Setup Reference Mask 97 Masks Base Voltage 18 Motor Control KP Process 222 Process PI Reference Owner 106 Owners Bidir In Offset 329 Linear List Language 47 Feature Select Remote CR Output 326 Digital I/O Blwn Fuse Flt 81 Faults Last Fault 4 Metering Reset/Run Time 15 Feature Select Boost Slope 169 Motor Control Latched Alarms 1 205 Diagnostics Reset/Run Tries 85 Feature Select Braking Chopper 314 Advanced Setup Latched Alarms 2 270 Diagnostics Ride Thru Volts 322 Feature Select Break Freq 334 Motor Control Line Loss Volts 320 Feature Select Run/Accel Volts 317 Motor Control Break Frequency 49 Motor Control Line Loss Fault 40 Faults Run Boost 83 Motor Control Break Voltage 50 Motor Control Line Loss Mode 256 Feature Select Run On Power Up 14 Feature Select Bus Limit En 11 Advanced Setup LLoss Restart 228 Feature Select S Curve Enable 57 Feature Select Bus Reg Level 325 Feature Select Load Loss Detect 290 Feature Select S Curve Time 56 Feature Select Bus Regulation 288 Feature Select Load Loss Level 291 Feature Select Save MOP Ref 230 Frequency Set Clear Fault 51 Faults Load Loss Time 292 Feature Select Set Defaults 64 Diagnostics Cntrl Board Rev 251 Ratings Local Mask 93 Masks Shear Pin Fault 226 Faults Common Bus 58 Advanced Setup Local Owner 179 Owners Skip Freq 1-3 32-34 Frequency Set Control Select 9 Motor Control Logic Mask 92 Masks Skip Freq Band 35 Frequency Set CR1 Out Select 158 Digital I/O Loss Recover 321 Feature Select SLx Encoder Cnts 340-376 Step Logic CR2-4 Out Select 174-176 Digital I/O Low Bus Fault 91 Faults SLx Logic Jump 336-372 Step Logic Cur Lim Trip En 82 Faults Max Bus Volts 325 Feature Select SLx Logic Step 335-371 Step Logic Current Angle 72 Diagnostics Max Enc Counts 328 Encoder Feedback SLx Step Jump 337-373 Step Logic Current Limit 36 Setup Max Traverse 79 Feature Select SLx Step Setting 338-374 Step Logic Current Limit En 303 Setup Maximum Freq 19 Advanced Setup + Setup SLx Time 339-375 Step Logic Current Lmt Sel 232 Setup Maximum Speed 151 Encoder Feedback Slip Adder 255 Encoder Feedback Current Step 377 Step Logic Maximum Voltage 20 Motor Control Slip @ F.L.A. 42 Feature Select Data In A1-D2 111-118 Adapter I/O Meas. Volts 272 Diagnostics Slip Comp Gain 195 Feature Select Slot A-B Option 252-253 Analog I/O Data Out A1-D2 119126 Adapter I/O Min Bus Volts 323 Feature Select DC Bus Memory 212 Diagnostics Minimum Freq 16 Advanced Setup + Setup Speed Adder 168 Encoder Feedback DC Bus Voltage 53 Metering MOP Freq 137 Metering Speed Brake En 319 Advanced Setup DC Hold Level 13 Advanced Setup MOP Increment 22 Frequency Set Speed Control 77 Feature Select + Process PI + Encoder Feedback DC Hold Time 12 Advanced Setup MOP Mask 101 Masks Speed Error 166 Encoder Feedback Decel Mask 99 Masks MOP Owner 110 Owners Speed Integral 167 Encoder Feedback Decel Owner 108 Owners Motor Mode 141 Diagnostics Speed KI 165 Encoder Feedback Decel Time 1 8 Setup Motor NP Amps 191 Setup Speed KP 164 Encoder Feedback Decel Time 2 31 Advanced Setup Motor NP Hertz 178 Setup + Enc. Fdbk. Stability Gain 324 Motor Control Dig At Temp 267 Digital I/O Motor NP RPM 177 Setup + Enc. Fdbk. Start Boost 48 Motor Control Dig Out Current 160 Digital I/O Motor NP Volts 190 Setup Start Mask 95 Masks Dig Out Freq 159 Digital I/O Motor OL Count 202 Metering Start Owner 104 Owners Dig Out Torque 161 Digital I/O Motor OL Fault 201 Faults Direction Mask 94 Masks Motor OL Ret 379 Faults Stop Mode Used 26 Diagnostics Stop Owner 102 Owners Direction Owner 103 Owners Motor Poles 153 Encoder Feedback Stop Select 1 10 Advanced Setup + Setup Drive Alarm 1, 2 60, 269 Diagnostics Motor Therm Flt 268 Faults Stop Select 2 52 Advanced Setup Drive Direction 69 Diagnostics Motor Type 41 Advanced Setup Sync Loss Comp 313 Motor Control Drive Status 1, 2 59, 236 Diagnostics Output Current 54 Metering Sync Loss Gain 311 Motor Control Drive Type 61 Ratings Output Freq 66 Metering Sync Loss Sel 310 Motor Control Dwell Frequency 43 Feature Select Output Power 23 Metering Output Pulses 67 Diagnostics Sync Loss Time 312 Motor Control Dwell Time 44 Feature Select Sync Mask 308 Masks EEPROM Cksum 172 Diagnostics Output Voltage 1 Metering Sync Owner 309 Owners Elapsed Run Time 279 Metering Overload Amps 38 Setup Sync Time 307 Advanced Setup Enc Count Scale 282 Encoder Feedback Overload Mode 37 Setup TB3 Term Sel 242-247 Digital I/O Encoder Counts 283 Encoder Feedback P Jump 80 Feature Select Torque Current 162 Metering Encoder Freq 63 Metering + Enc. Fdbk. Phase Loss Level 331 Faults Traverse Dec 304 Feature Select Encoder Loss Sel 284 Encoder Feedback Phase Loss Mode 330 Faults Traverse Inc 78 Feature Select Encoder PPR 46 Freq. Set + Enc. Fdbk. PI Config 213 Process PI Traverse Mask 305 Masks Encoder Type 152 Encoder Feedback PI Error 219 Process PI Traverse Owner 306 Owners Fault Alarms 1 173 Faults PI Fdbk Select 216 Process PI VT Scaling 203 Setup A–10 Specifications and Supplemental Information HIM Character Map Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex 032 096 193 20 60 C1 033 097 194 21 61 C2 034 22 098 62 195 C3 035 23 099 63 196 C4 036 100 197 24 64 C5 037 25 101 65 198 C6 038 26 102 66 199 C7 039 103 200 27 67 C8 040 104 201 28 68 C9 041 29 105 69 202 CA 042 2A 106 6A 203 CB 043 107 204 2B 6B CC 044 2C 108 6C 205 CD 045 2D 109 6D 206 CE 046 110 207 2E 6E CF 047 111 208 2F 6F D0 048 30 112 70 209 D1 049 31 113 71 210 D2 050 114 211 32 72 D3 051 33 115 73 212 D4 052 34 116 74 213 D5 053 117 214 35 75 D6 054 118 215 36 76 D7 055 37 119 77 216 D8 056 38 120 78 217 D9 057 121 218 39 79 DA 058 3A 122 7A 219 DB 059 3B 123 7B 220 DC 060 124 221 3C 7C DD 061 125 222 3D 7D DE 062 3E 126 7E 223 DF 063 3F 127 7F 224 E0 064 161 225 40 A1 E1 065 41 162 A2 226 E2 066 42 163 A3 227 E3 067 164 228 43 A4 E4 068 165 229 44 A5 E5 069 45 166 A6 230 E6 070 46 167 A7 231 E7 071 168 232 47 A8 E8 072 48 169 233 A9 E9 073 49 170 AA 234 EA 074 171 235 4A AB EB 075 172 236 4B AC EC 076 4C 173 AD 237 ED 077 4D 174 AE 238 EE 078 175 239 4E AF EF 079 176 240 4F B0 F0 080 50 177 B1 241 F1 081 178 242 51 B2 F2 082 179 243 52 B3 F3 083 53 180 B4 244 F4 084 54 181 B5 245 F5 085 182 246 55 B6 F6 086 183 247 56 B7 F7 087 57 184 B8 248 F8 088 185 249 58 B9 F9 089 186 250 59 BA FA 090 5A 187 BB 251 FB 091 5B 188 BC 252 FC 092 189 253 5C BD FD 093 190 255 5D BE FF 094 5E 191 BF 095 192 5F C0 Specifications and Supplemental Information A–11 Communications Data Information Format Drive Status Structure Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 This provides the drive status informa- tion that will be sent to the logic Enabled 1 = Enabled controllers input image table when the Local Adapter Reference 0 = Not Enabled ID Communication Module is set to con- ID Running trol the drive. 1 = Running Reference 15 14 13 12 Local 11 10 9 0 = Not Running Freq Select 1 0 0 0 0 TB3 0 0 0 Preset Freq 1 0 0 0 1 1001 Command Direction Preset Freq 2 0 0 1 0 2010 1 = Forward Preset Freq 3 0 0 1 1 3011 0 = Reverse Preset Freq 4 0 1 0 0 4100 Rotating Direction Preset Freq 5 0 1 0 1 5101 1 = Forward Preset Freq 6 0 1 1 0 6110 0 = Reverse Preset Freq 7 0 1 1 1 Unused 1 1 1 Accelerating Freq Select 2 1 0 0 0 Adapter 1 1 0 0 1 1 = Accelerating 0 = Not Accelerating Adapter 2 1 0 1 0 Adapter 3 1 0 1 1 Decelerating Adapter 4 1 1 0 0 1 = Decelerating Adapter 5 1 1 0 1 0 = Not Decelerating Adapter 6 1 1 1 0 Jog Frequency 1 1 1 1 Alarm 1 = Alarm 0 = No Alarm Fault 1 = Faulted 0 = Not Faulted At Speed 1 = At Speed 0 = Not at Speed Logic Control Structure Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 This information provides the control logic information that is sent to the Stop 1 = Stop Reference Select Decel Time Accel Time drive through the logic controllers out- 0 = Not Stop put image table when the Start Reference 14 13 12 Communication Module is set to con- 1 = Start No Command 0 0 0 0 = Not Start trol the drive. Freq Select 1 0 0 1 Time 9/11 8/10 Freq Select 2 0 1 0 Jog No Command 0 0 Preset Freq 3 0 1 1 1 = Jog Time 1 0 1 Preset Freq 4 1 0 0 0 = Not Jog Time 2 1 0 Preset Freq 5 1 0 1 Clear Faults Hold Time 1 1 Preset Freq 6 1 1 0 1 = Clear Faults Preset Freq 7 1 1 1 0 = Not Clear Faults Direction 5 4 No Command 0 0 Forward 0 1 Reverse 1 0 MOP Decrement Hold Direction 1 1 1 = Decrement Local 0 = Not Decrement 1 = Local Lockout 0 = Not Local MOP Increment 1 = Increment 0 = Not Increment A–12 Specifications and Supplemental Information To allow convenient control of the Traverse and Sync functions through SCANport adapters, an alternate definition of the SCANport type 2 command can be selected. See also [Alt Type 2 Cmd]. Alternate Logic Control Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Structure Stop Reference Select Decel Time Accel Time 1 = Stop 0 = Not Stop Start Reference 14 13 12 1 = Start No Command 0 0 0 0 = Not Start Freq Select 1 0 0 1 Time 9/11 8/10 Freq Select 2 0 1 0 Jog No Command 0 0 Preset Freq 3 0 1 1 1 = Jog Time 1 0 1 Preset Freq 4 1 0 0 0 = Not Jog Time 2 1 0 Preset Freq 5 1 0 1 Clear Faults Hold Time 1 1 Preset Freq 6 1 1 0 1 = Clear Faults Preset Freq 7 1 1 1 0 = Not Clear Faults Direction 5 4 No Command 0 0 Forward 0 1 Reverse 1 0 Traverse Enable Hold Direction 1 1 1 = Enabled 0 = Not Enabled Local 1 = Local Lockout 0 = Not Local Sync Enable 1 = Enabled 0 = Not Enabled Typical Programmable Important: If block transfers are programmed to continuously write data to the drive, the EEPROM will quickly exceed its life Controller Communications cycle and malfunction. The 1336 PLUS II does not use Configurations RAM to temporarily store parameter data, but rather stores the data immediately to the EEPROM. Since the EEPROM has a defined number of “write” cycles available, continuous block transfers should not be programmed. 1 Using Datalink A Programmable Remote I/O Adjustable Frequency Controller Communication AC Drive I/O Image Table Module Output Image Block Transfer Logic Command Parameter/Number Analog Reference Datalink A WORD 3 Data In A1 111 WORD 4 Data In A2 112 WORD 5 Datalink A WORD 6 Data Out A1 119 WORD 7 Data Out A2 120 Input Image Block Transfer Logic Status Analog Feedback WORD 3 WORD 4 WORD 5 WORD 6 WORD 7 Specifications and Supplemental Information A–13 1 Without Block Transfer Programmable Remote I/O Adjustable Frequency Controller Communication AC Drive I/O Image Table Module Output Image Direct to Logic Command Drive Analog Reference Parameter/Number Logic WORD 2 Data In A1 111 WORD 3 Data In A2 112 Datalink A Data In B1 113 WORD 4 WORD 5 Data In B2 114 Data In C1 115 WORD 6 Data In C2 116 WORD 7 Datalink C Data In D1 117 Input Image Data In D2 118 Direct Logic Status from Drive Analog Feedback Parameter/Number Logic WORD 2 Data Out A1 119 WORD 3 Data Out A2 120 Datalink A WORD 4 Data Out B1 121 WORD 5 Data Out B2 122 WORD 6 Data Out C1 123 WORD 7 Data Out C2 124 Datalink C Data Out D1 125 Data Out D2 126 1 Refer to the 1203 User Manual for further information. Typical Serial Communications Configurations Master Device Serial to SCANport Adjustable Frequency Register Objects Communications Module AC Drive Output Output Direct WORD 1 WORD 1 to WORD 2 WORD 2 Drive Parameter/Number Logic Data In A1 111 WORD 3 WORD a Data In A2 112 WORD 4 WORD a+1 Datalink A WORD 5 WORD b Data In B1 113 Data In B2 114 WORD 6 WORD b+1 Datalink B WORD 7 WORD c Data In C1 115 WORD 8 WORD c+1 Data In C2 116 Datalink C Data In D1 117 WORD 9 WORD d WORD 10 WORD d+1 Data In D2 118 Datalink D Input Input Direct from WORD 1 WORD 1 Drive WORD 2 WORD 2 Parameter/Number Logic Data Out A1 119 WORD 3 WORD a Data Out A2 120 WORD 4 WORD a+1 Datalink A Data Out B1 121 WORD 5 WORD b Data Out B2 122 WORD 6 WORD b+1 Datalink B Data Out C1 123 WORD 7 WORD c Data Out C2 124 WORD 8 WORD c+1 Datalink C Data Out D1 125 WORD 9 WORD d Data Out D2 126 WORD 10 WORD d+1 Datalink D A–14 Specifications and Supplemental Information Encoder Interface Wiring Option L4/L4E & L7E Wiring Typical Typical Typical 0.1µf0.1µf 0.1µf 0.1µf 100 Typical 681 Current 173 5V Limit 10.7k 10.7k 681 10.7k 10.7k Feedback J1/J2 Isolated Isolated 0.5A 12V 5V +5V +5V 2200pf JP4 255 12V 470 470 470 470 0.1µf 0.1µf 0.001 90.9 Isolated Isolated 576 Ground Ground ENC ENC ENC ENC BAA B 12V RET AA 12V RET IGND IGND 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 TB3 TB3 L4/L4E L7E Option L4/L4E - Contact Closure Interface Board Requirements Contacts must be capable of operating at 10 mA current levels without signal degradation. Reed type input devices are recom- mended. The L4/L4E option is compatible with the following Allen-Bradley  PLC modules:  1771-OYL  1771-OZL Option L7E - Contact Closure Interface Board Requirements Circuits used with Option L7E must be capable of operating with low = true logic. In the low state, external circuits must be capable of a sinking current of approximately 10 mA to pull the terminal voltage low to 3.0V DC or less. In the high state, external circuits must let the terminal voltage rise to a voltage of 4.0-5.0V DC. Reed type input devices are recommended. The L7E option is compatible with the following Allen-Bradley  PLC modules:  1771-OYL  1771-OZL Specifications and Supplemental Information A–15 Option L5/L5E & L8E Wiring Typical 510 510 100 Typical 20k 140 681 Typical Typical Current 173 5V Limit 0.22µf 681 Feedback J1/J2 0.5A 1.87k 12V 5V 1.0 2200pf JP4 510 255 12V 280 0.001 1k 90.9 576 ENC ENC ENC ENC AA 12V RET B A B A 12V RET 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 TB3 TB3 Common Common User Supplied User Supplied 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC +24V +24V L5/L5E L8E Option L5/L5E & L8E - 24V AC/DC Interface Board Requirements Circuits used with these options must be capable of operating with high = true logic. DC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no more than 8V DC. Leakage current must be less than 1.5 mA into a 2.5k ohm load. AC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no more than 10V AC. Leakage current must be less than 2.5 mA into a 2.5k ohm load. Both AC and DC external circuits in the high state must generate a voltage of +20 to +26 volts and source a current of approximately 10 mA for each input. These options are compatible with the following Allen-Bradley PLC modules:  1771-OB  1771-OQ16  1771-OB16 1771-OBD 1771-OYL 1771-OBN 1771-OZL  1771-OQ  1771-OBB A–16 Specifications and Supplemental Information Option L6/L6E & L9E Wiring 100 100 20k Typical Typical 100 0.22µf Typical 140 681 Typical 0.15µf 173 Current 0.33µf 5V Limit 681 Feedback J1/J2 0.5A 1.87k 12V 5V 1.0 2200pf 499k JP4 255 12V 280 133 0.001 49 90.9 1 Meg 576 ENC ENC ENC ENC 12V RET AA 12V RET BA B A 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 TB3 TB3 Common Common Fuse User Supplied User Supplied Fuse 115V AC 115V AC Fuse Fuse 115V AC 115V AC L6/L6E L9E Option L6/L6E & L9E - 115V AC Interface Board Requirements Circuits used with these options must be capable of operating with high = true logic. In the low state, circuits must generate a voltage of no more than 30V AC. Leakage current must be less than 10 mA into a 6.5k ohm load. In the high state, circuits must generate a voltage of 60 Hz, 90-115V AC ±10% (50 Hz, 100-115V AC ±10%) and source a current of approximately 20 mA for each input. These options are compatible with the following Allen-Bradley PLC modules:  1771-OW  1771-OA 1771-OWN 1771-OAD Specifications and Supplemental Information A–17 Read/Write Parameter Record When using a compatible HIM (see Table 3.A), the parameters listed can be uploaded to the HIM for downloading to other drives. No. Name Setting No. Name Setting No. Name Setting No. Name Setting 5 Freq Select 1 ______ 81 Blwn Fuse Flt _______ 169 Boost Slope ______ 243 TB3 Term 23 Sel _____ 6 Freq Select 2 ______ 82 Cur Lim Trip En _______ 170 Rated Amps ______ 244 TB3 Term 24 Sel _____ 7 Accel Time 1 ______ 83 Run Boost _______ 171 Rated kW ______ 245 TB3 Term 26 Sel _____ 8 Decel Time 1 ______ 85 Reset/Run Tries _______ 172 EEPROM Cksum ______ 246 TB3 Term 27 Sel _____ 9 Control Select ______ 90 Analog Trim En _______ 173 Fault Alarms 1 ______ 247 TB3 Term 28 Sel _____ 10 Stop Select 1 ______ 91 Low Bus Fault _______ 174 CR2 Out Select ______ 248 Anlg In 2 Lo _____ 11 Bus Limit En ______ 92 Logic Mask _______ 175 CR3 Out Select ______ 249 Anlg In 2 Hi _____ 12 DC Hold Time ______ 93 Local Mask _______ 176 CR4 Out Select ______ 250 Anlg Signal Loss _____ 13 DC Hold Level ______ 94 Direction Mask _______ 177 Motor NP RPM ______ 256 Line Loss Mode _____ 14 Run On Power Up ______ 95 Start Mask _______ 178 Motor NP Hertz ______ 264 Pulse In Scale _____ 15 Reset/Run Time ______ 96 Jog Mask _______ 180 Process 2 Par ______ 267 Dig At Temp _____ 16 Minimum Freq ______ 97 Reference Mask _______ 181 Process 2 Scale ______ 268 Motor Therm Flt _____ 17 Base Frequency ______ 98 Accel Mask _______ 182 Process 2 Txt 1 ______ 271 Alarm Mask 2 _____ 18 Base Voltage ______ 99 Decel Mask _______ 183 Process 2 Txt 2 ______ 274 Anlg Out 1 Sel _____ 19 Maximum Freq ______ 100 Fault Mask _______ 184 Process 2 Txt 3 ______ 275 Anlg Out 1 Lo _____ 20 Maximum Voltage ______ 101 MOP Mask _______ 185 Process 2 Txt 4 ______ 276 Anlg Out 1 Hi _____ 22 MOP Increment ______ 111 Data In A1 _______ 186 Process 2 Txt 5 ______ 277 Anlg Out 1 Abs _____ 24 Jog Frequency ______ 112 Data In A2 _______ 187 Process 2 Txt 6 ______ 278 Anlg Out 1 Offst _____ 25 Anlg Out 0 Sel ______ 113 Data In B1 _______ 188 Process 2 Txt 7 ______ 280 Pulse Out Select _____ 27 Preset Freq 1 ______ 114 Data In B2 _______ 189 Process 2 Txt 8 ______ 281 Pulse Out Scale _____ 28 Preset Freq 2 ______ 115 Data In C1 _______ 190 Motor NP Volts ______ 282 Enc Count Scale _____ 29 Preset Freq 3 ______ 116 Data In C2 _______ 191 Motor NP Amps ______ 283 Encoder Counts _____ 30 Accel Time 2 ______ 117 Data In D1 _______ 192 Flux Amps Ref ______ 284 Encoder Loss Sel _____ 31 Decel Time 2 ______ 118 Data In D2 _______ 193 KP Amps ______ 288 Bus Regulation _____ 32 Skip Freq 1 ______ 119 Data Out A1 _______ 194 IR Drop Volts ______ 289 Phase Loss Det _____ 33 Skip Freq 2 ______ 120 Data Out A2 _______ 195 Slip Comp Gain ______ 290 Load Loss Detect _____ 34 Skip Freq 3 ______ 121 Data Out B1 _______ 200 Flux Up Time ______ 291 Load Loss Level _____ 35 Skip Freq Band ______ 122 Data Out B2 _______ 201 Motor OL Fault ______ 292 Load Loss Time _____ 36 Current Limit ______ 123 Data Out C1 _______ 203 VT Scaling ______ 303 Current Lmt En ______ 37 Overload Mode ______ 124 Data Out C2 _______ 204 Ground Warning ______ 304 Traverse Dec _____ 38 Overload Amps ______ 125 Data Out D1 _______ 206 Alarm Mask 1 ______ 305 Traverse Mask _____ 39 Flt Clear Mode ______ 126 Data Out D2 _______ 213 PI Config ______ 307 Sync Time _____ 40 Line Loss Fault ______ 127 Process 1 Par _______ 215 PI Ref Select ______ 308 Sync Mask _____ 41 Motor Type ______ 128 Process 1 Scale _______ 216 PI Fdbk Select ______ 310 Sync Loss Sel _____ 42 Slip @ F.L.A. ______ 129 Process 1 Txt 1 _______ 221 KI Process ______ 311 Sync Loss Gain _____ 43 Dwell Frequency ______ 130 Process 1 Txt 2 _______ 222 KP Process ______ 312 Sync Loss Time _____ 44 Dwell Time ______ 131 Process 1 Txt 3 _______ 223 PI Neg Limit ______ 313 Sync Loss Comp _____ 45 PWM Frequency ______ 132 Process 1 Txt 4 _______ 224 PI Pos Limit ______ 315 Alt Type 2 Cmd _____ 46 Encoder PPR ______ 133 Process 1 Txt 5 _______ 225 PI Preload ______ 317 Run/Accel Volts _____ 47 Language ______ 134 Process 1 Txt 6 _______ 226 Shear Pin Fault ______ 319 Speed Brake En ______ 48 Start Boost ______ 135 Process 1 Txt 7 _______ 227 Adaptive I Lim ______ 320 Line Loss Volts _____ 49 Break Frequency ______ 136 Process 1 Txt 8 _______ 228 LLoss Restart ______ 321 Loss Recover _____ 50 Break Voltage ______ 150 4-20mA Loss Sel _______ 229 Freq Ref SqRoot ______ 322 Ride Thru Volts _____ 52 Stop Select 2 ______ 151 Maximum Speed _______ 230 Save MOP Ref ______ 323 Min Bus Volts _____ 56 S Curve Time ______ 152 Encoder Type _______ 231 Hold Level Sel ______ 324 Stability Gain ______ 57 S Curve Enable ______ 154 Anlg Out 0 Offst _______ 232 Current Lmt Sel ______ 325 Bus Reg/Max Bus ______ 58 Common Bus ______ 155 Flying Start En _______ 233 Anlg Out 0 Abs ______ 326 Remote CR Output ______ 73 Preset Freq 4 ______ 156 FStart Forward _______ 234 Anlg Out 0 Lo ______ 327 At Time ______ 74 Preset Freq 5 ______ 157 FStart Reverse _______ 235 Anlg Out 0 Hi ______ 328 Max Enc Counts ______ 75 Preset Freq 6 ______ 158 CR1 Out Select _______ 237 Anlg In 0 Lo ______ 329 Bidir In Offset ______ 76 Preset Freq 7 ______ 159 Dig Out Freq _______ 238 Anlg In 0 Hi ______ 330 Phase Loss Mode ______ 77 Speed Control ______ 160 Dig Out Current _______ 239 Anlg In 1 Lo ______ 331 Phase Loss Level ______ 78 Traverse Inc ______ 161 Dig Out Torque _______ 240 Anlg In 1 Hi ______ 332 Precharge Fault ______ 79 Max Traverse ______ 164 Speed KP _______ 241 Input Mode ______ 333 PWM Comp Time ______ 80 P Jump ______ 165 Speed KI _______ 242 TB3 Term 22 Sel ______ 334 Break Freq/PWM ______ A–18 Specifications and Supplemental Information Read/Write Parameter Record (continued) No. Name Setting 335 SL0 Logic Step ______ 336 SL0 Logic Jump ______ 337 SL0 Step Jump ______ 338 SL0 Step Setting ______ 339 SL0 Time ______ 340 SL0 Encoder Cnts ______ 341 SL1 Logic Step ______ 342 SL1 Logic Jump ______ 343 SL1 Step Jump ______ 344 SL1 Step Setting ______ 345 SL1 Time ______ 346 SL1 Encoder Cnts ______ 347 SL2 Logic Step ______ 348 SL2 Logic Jump ______ 349 SL2 Step Jump ______ 350 SL2 Step Setting ______ 351 SL2 Time ______ 352 SL2 Encoder Cnts ______ 353 SL3 Logic Step ______ 354 SL3 Logic Jump ______ 355 SL3 Step Jump ______ 356 SL3 Step Setting ______ 357 SL3 Time ______ 358 SL3 Encoder Cnts ______ 359 SL4 Logic Step ______ 360 SL4 Logic Jump ______ 361 SL4 Step Jump ______ 362 SL4 Step Setting ______ 363 SL4 Time ______ 364 SL4 Encoder Cnts ______ 365 SL5 Logic Step ______ 366 SL5 Logic Jump ______ 367 SL5 Step Jump ______ 368 SL5 Step Setting ______ 369 SL5 Time ______ 370 SL5 Encoder Cnts ______ 371 SL6 Logic Step ______ 372 SL6 Logic Jump ______ 373 SL6 Step Jump ______ 374 SL6 Step Setting ______ 375 SL6 Time ______ 376 SL6 Encoder Cnts ______ 377 Current Step ______ 379 Motor OL Ret ______ Appendix B Dimensions Appendix B provides detailed dimension information for the 1336 PLUS. Included are:  IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions.  IP65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12) Dimensions.  Heat Sink-through-the-Back Cutout Dimensions.  TB1 Terminal Block Dimensions for D, E & G Frame Drives.  Typical Mounting of F and G Frame Open Chassis Drives in a User Supplied Enclosure. Important: The dimensions given on the following drawings are for estimating purposes only. Contact your Allen-Bradley Sales Office if certified drawings are required. B–2 Dimensions IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions - Frames A1 through A4 A C Max. Z Y D G F AA E B Mounting Hole Detail 7.0 (0.28) 7.0 (0.28) 12.7 (0.50) BB 12.7 (0.50) CC 1, 2 Frame Three-Phase Rating Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail 380-480V 500-600V Reference 200-240V 0.37-1.2 kW – A1 0.37-0.75 kW 0.5-1.5 HP 0.5-1 HP Bottom View Will Vary with HP – See Bottom View Dimensions 1.2-1.5 kW 1.5-2.2 kW – A2 1.5-2 HP 2-3 HP 2.2-3.7 kW 3.7 kW – A3 3-5 HP 5 HP 0.75-15 kW A4 5.5 kW 5.5-15 kW * 7.5-20 HP 1-20 HP 7.5 HP 11-22 kW * – B1/B2 5.5-11 kW 15-30 HP 7.5-15 HP 15-22 kW 30-45 kW 18.5-45 kW C 20-30 HP 40-60 HP 25-60 HP 30-45 kW 45-112 kW 56-93 kW D 40-60 HP 60-150 HP 75-125 HP 112-224 kW E 56-93 kW 112-187 kW 150-250 HP 150-300 HP 75-125 HP 187-336 kW 261-298 kW F – 250-450 HP 350-400 HP – 187-448 kW 224-448 kW G 250-600 HP 300-600 HP All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) * Use care when choosing Frame Reference - Some ratings may All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds) exist in another frame size. G Frame Shipping Reference A B C Max. D E F Encl. Open Y Z AA BB CC Weights A1 215.9 290.0 160.0 185.2 275.0 50.8 105.4 105.4 15.35 7.5 130.0 76.2 85.3 4.31 kg (8.50) (11.42) (6.30) (7.29) (10.83) (2.00) (4.15) (4.15) (0.60) (0.30) (5.12) (3.00) (3.36) (9.5 lbs.) A2 215.9 290.0 180.5 185.2 275.0 71.4 105.4 105.4 15.35 7.5 130.0 76.2 85.3 5.49 kg (8.50) (11.42) (7.10) (7.29) (10.83) (2.81) (4.15) (4.15) (0.60) (0.30) (5.12) (3.00) (3.36) (12.1 lbs.) A3 215.9 290.0 207.0 185.2 275.0 98.8 105.4 105.4 15.35 7.5 130.0 76.2 85.3 6.71 kg (8.50) (11.42) (8.15) (7.29) (10.83) (3.85) (4.15) (4.15) (0.60) (0.30) (5.12) (3.00) (3.36) (14.8 lbs.) 260.0 350.0 212.0 230.0 320.0 90.0 117.0 117.0 15.35 15.35 130.0 133.0 86.0 A4 15.90 kg (10.24) (13.78) (8.35) (9.06) (12.60) (3.54 ) (4.61) (4.61) (0.60) (0.60) (5.12) (5.23) (3.39) (35.0 lbs.) 1 2 Refer to Chapter 1 for catalog numbers and Appendix for derating info. kW/HP are constant torque (CT) ratings. Dimensions B–3 IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions - Frames B, C, D A C Max. Z Y D G F Mounting Hole Detail (Frames B & C) 7.1 (0.28) 7.1 (0.28) 12.7 (0.50) 12.7 (0.50) AA E B Mounting Hole Detail (Frame D) 10.4 (0.41) Dia. BB 14.7 (0.58) 19.0 (0.75) Dia. CC Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail Frame D Frames B & C Bottom View Will Vary with HP See Bottom View Dimensions All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds) Frame G Shipping Reference A B C Max. D E F Encl. Open Y Z AA BB CC Weight B1/B2 276.4 476.3 225.0 212.6 461.0 131.6 93.5 88.9 32.00 7.6 131.1 180.8 71.9 22.7 kg (10.88) (18.75) (8.86) (8.37) (18.15) (5.18) (3.68) (3.50) (1.26) (0.30) (5.16) (7.12) (2.83) (50 lbs.) C 301.8 701.0 225.0 238.0 685.8 131.6 93.5 88.9 32.00 7.6 131.1 374.7 71.9 38.6 kg (11.88) (27.60) (8.86) (9.37) (27.00) (5.18) (3.68) (3.50) (1.26) (0.30) (5.16) (14.75) (2.83) (85 lbs.) D 381.5 1240.0 270.8 325.9 1216.2 81.3 189.5 184.9 27.94 11.94 131.1 688.6 83.6 108.9 kg (15.02) (48.82) (10.66) (12.83) (47.88) (3.20) (7.46) (7.28) (1.10) (0.47) (5.16) (27.11) (3.29) (240 lbs.) B–4 Dimensions IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions - Frame E C Max. A Z 133.4 Y D (5.25) 37.9 (1.49) Mounting Hole Detail AA 10.4 (0.41) Dia. 17.0 (0.67) E B 19.0 (0.75) Dia. BB See Bottom View Dimensions for Details CC Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds) Frame Shipping Reference A B C Max. D E Y Z AA BB CC Weight E – Enclosed 511.0 1498.6 424.4 477.5 1447.8 16.8 40.1 195.0 901.4 151.9 186 kg (20.12) (59.00) (16.71) (18.80) (57.00) (0.66) (1.61) (7.68) (35.49) (5.98) (410 lbs.) E – Open 511.0 1498.6 372.6 477.5 1447.8 16.8 40.1 138.4 680.0 126.3 163 kg (20.12) (59.00) (14.67) (18.80) (57.00) (0.66) (1.61) (5.45) (26.77) (4.97) (360 lbs.) Dimensions B–5 IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions - Frame F 635.0 (25.00) Removable Lifting Angle Open Chassis 487.7 (19.20) 63.5 (2.50) 762.0 (30.00) 252.7 (9.95) 2286.0 37.9 (90.00) (1.49) 193.0 (7.60) 501.7 1219.2 (19.75) (48.00) Fan Vertical 527.1 C L (20.75) 711.2 (28.00) 19.1 (0.75) 158.8 (6.25) 274.8 196.9 (10.82) (7.75) 108.0 (4.25) x 158.8 (6.25) Fan Horiz. C L Removable Plate for 82.6 (3.25) 726.9 20.6 Cable Access (1 each side) (28.62) (0.81) 295.4 Bottom View (11.63) 15.7 (0.62) Dia. All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) 4 Places See page 2–1 for Mounting Information. Approximate Shipping Weight (drive & pallet): 38.1 415.0 kg (915 lbs.) 12.7 (0. 50) Dia. (1.50) 2 Places 681.5 38.1 (26.83) (1.50) B–6 Dimensions Open Dimensions - Frame F “Roll-In” Chassis All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) 635.0 (25.00) 1543.3 DANGER (60.76) DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER TE R-L1 T-L3 PE U-M1 W-M3 S-L2 V-M2 717.6 463.6 (28.25) (18.25) Notes: 1 Enclosure dimensions needed to accommodate the drive are 2286 (H) x 889 (W) x 508 (D) mm (90 x 35 x 20 in.), nominal. 2 A 1200 CFM (minimum) enclosure ventilating fan must be user supplied and installed. 3 Refer to pages B–20 and B–21 for drive and inductor mounting information. Dimensions B–7 IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions - Frame G 63.5 (2.50) Removable Lifting Angle Open Chassis Dimensions Depth = 508.3 (20.01) Weight = 453.6 kg (1000 lbs.) 117.3 (4.62) 2324.1 (91.50) 1524.0 (60.00) 648.0 762.0 635.0 (25.51) (30.00) (25.00) 19.3 (0.76) Important: Two (2) 725 CFM fans are required if an open type drive is mounted in a user supplied Conduit enclosure. Access Area All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) See Bottom View Dimensions for Details B–8 Dimensions IP 65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12) Dimensions See Detail A A C 12.4 (0.49) F D G H See Detail B EB 7.9 (0.31) 12.7 (0.50) 7.1 (0.28) Dia. 12.7 (0.50) 14.3 (0.56) Dia. Typical Top and Bottom Detail A 12.7 (0.50) Dia. Drive Heatsink 19.1 (0.75) 19.1 (0.75) Dia. All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) Detail B Approx. Ship Frame Reference A B C D E F G H Weight 430.0 525.0 350.0 500.1 250.0 N/A N/A 16.8 kg A1 404.9 (16.93) (20.67) (13.78) (15.94) (19.69) (9.84) (37.0 lbs.) 430.0 525.0 350.0 500.1 250.0 N/A N/A 17.9 kg A2 404.9 (16.93) (20.67) (13.78) (15.94) (19.69) (9.84) (39.4 lbs.) A3 430.0 525.0 350.0 404.9 500.1 250.0 N/A N/A 18.6 kg (16.93) (20.67) (13.78) (19.69) (9.84) (41.0 lbs.) (15.94) A4 655.0 650.0 425.0 629.9 625.1 293.0 63.5 76.2 39.5 kg (25.79) (25.59) (16.74) (24.61) (11.54) (2.50) (3.00) (87.0 lbs.) (24.80) 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) at 200-240V AC B1 655.0 650.0 425.0 629.9 625.1 293.0 63.5 76.2 44.7 kg 11 kW (15 HP) at 380-480V AC (25.79) (25.59) (16.74) (24.80) (24.61) (11.54) (2.50) (3.00) (98.5 lbs.) 7.5-11 kW (10-15 HP) at 200-240V AC 655.0 900.0 425.0 875.0 293.0 63.5 76.2 56.5 kg B2 629.9 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) at 380-480V AC (25.79) (35.43) (16.74) (24.80) (34.45) (11.54) (2.50) (3.00) (124.5 lbs.) 655.0 1200.0 425.0 1174.5 293.0 63.5 76.2 80.7 kg C 629.9 (25.79) (47.24) (16.74) (24.80) (46.22) (11.54) (2.50) (3.00) (178.0 lbs.) Dimensions B–9 IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Bottom View Dimensions - Frames A through C Frames A1 through A4 S R Fans are present on these drives Q 22.2 (0.88) Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc. P Input Catalog kW/HP Voltage Frame Number Rating 22.2/28.6 (0.88/1.13) 230 A4 F75 5.5 (7.5) Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs. 460 A4 F75 5.5 (7.5) F100 7.5 (10) F150 11 (15) F200 15 (20) 575 A4 F30 2.2 (3) F50 3.7 (5) N M L F75 5.5 (7.5) F100 7.5 (10) F150 11 (15) F200 15 (20) Fans may be present (see table) Frame L M N P Q R S Reference 111.8 105.4 86.3 31.0 69.1 102.1 135.4 A1 (4.40) (4.15) (3.40) (1.22) (2.72) (4.02) (5.33) 132.3 126.0 106.9 31.0 69.1 102.1 135.4 A2 (5.21) (4.96) (4.21) (1.22) (2.72) (4.02) (5.33) 158.8 152.4 133.4 31.0 69.1 102.1 135.4 A3 (6.25) (6.00) (5.25) (1.22) (2.72) (4.02) (5.33) 164.0 164.0 139.0 27.0 65.0 97.0 128.7 A4 (6.45) (6.45) (5.47) (1.06) (2.56) (3.82) (5.07) Frames B and C S R Q 28.6/34.9 (1.13/1.38) P Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs. 22.2 (0.88) Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc. All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) M L Frame Reference L M P Q R S B1/B2 181.6 167.1 112.8 163.6 214.4 249.9 (7.15) (6.58) (4.44) (6.44) (8.44) (9.84) C 181.6 167.1 119.1 182.6 233.4 275.3 (7.15) (6.58) (4.69) (7.19) (9.19) (10.84) B–10 Dimensions IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Bottom View Dimensions - Frames D-G All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) Frame D 62.7/76.2 (2.47/3.00) Conduit Knockout - 2 Plcs. 343.9 (13.54) 261.4 (10.29) 34.9 (1.38) 144.0 (5.67) Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs. 52.1 (2.05) 34.9/50.0 (1.38/1.97) Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc. 198.1 (7.80) 204.5 169.4 (8.05) (6.67) 153.7 131.6 (6.05) (5.18) Frame E 432.3 (17.02) 305.3 (12.02) 178.3 (7.02) 88.9/101.6 (3.50/4.00) Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs. 50.8 (2.0) 38.6 (1.52) 12.7 (0.50) Conduit Knockout - 6 Plcs. 311.2 (12.25) 260.4 (10.25) 209.6 (8.25) Frame G 431.8 29.0 (1.14) 660.4 (26.00) 50.8 (2.00) (17.00) Conduit 254.0 431.8 (10.00) Access Area 547.6 (17.00) (21.56) Conduit Access Area 298.5 (11.75) 381.0 (Top) 15.9 (0.63) Dia. - 2 Mtg. Holes 42.9 (15.00) (1.69) (Bottom) Dimensions B–11 Knockout Locations for Optional Junction Boxes - Frames B & C Only on CE Versions (for fixed connection to filter) B Frame - 28.6 (1.13), C Frame - 34.9 (1.38) 50.8 (2.00) 1 O 1 N S R Q 2 P 28.6/34.9 (1.13/1.38) Conduit Knockout - 2 or 3 Plcs. 22.2 (0.88) Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc. M L All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) Frame 1 1 2 Reference L M N O P Q R S B1/B2 181.6 167.1 NA NA 106.4 155.2 206.0 249.9 (7.15) (6.58) (4.19) (6.11) (8.11) (9.84) B1/B2 (CE) 181.6 167.1 114.1 20.6 NA 155.2 206.0 249.9 (7.15) (6.58) (4.49) (0.81) (6.11) (8.11) (9.84) C 181.6 167.1 NA NA 112.8 174.5 227.8 275.3 (7.15) (6.58) (4.44) (6.87) (8.97) (10.84) C (CE) 181.6 167.1 120.7 25.4 NA 174.5 227.8 275.3 (7.15) (6.58) (4.75) (1.00) (6.87) (8.97) (10.84) 1 Only present on CE version Junction Boxes. 2 Not present on CE Junction Boxes. B–12 Dimensions Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting - Frames A1 through A3 1 210.0 (8.25) 196.0 (7.72) 98.0 (3.86) 182.1 78.1 (7.17) (3.076) 234.2 (9.2204) 220.0 78.2 Cutout (8.66) (3.080) 1 249.7 (9.83) All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) 10 Required 4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10-32 x 12.7 (0.5) Self-Tap – 4.0 (0.159) for 10-32 x 12.7 (0.5) Threaded Back of Enclosure Drive A1 = 50.8 (2.00) A2 = 71.4 (2.81) A3 = 98.8 (3.85) 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure. Dimensions B–13 Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting - Frame A4 1 257.0 (10.12) 241.3 (9.50) 160.9 (6.33) 120.7 (4.75) 80.4 (3.17) 225.0 301.2 (8.86) (11.86) 225.9 (8.89) 1 285.0 317.0 Cutout (11.22) (12.48) 150.6 (5.93) 75.3 (2.96) All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) 14 Required 4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10-32 x 12.7 (0.5) Self-Tap – 4.0 (0.159) for 10-32 x 12.7 (0.5) Threaded Back of Enclosure Drive 90.0 (3.54) 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure. B–14 Dimensions Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting - Frame B1/B2 1 267.2 (10.52) 257.1 (10.12) 6.35 (0.25) 244.4 2.54 1 435.4 (9.62) (0.10) (17.14) 415.3 410.2 (16.35) (16.15) 308.6 Cutout as Viewed (12.15) from INSIDE Enclosure 283.2 (11.15) 127.0 (5.00) All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) 8 Required 4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10-32 x 12.7 (0.5) Self-Tap – 4.0 (0.159) for 10-32 x 12.7 (0.5) Threaded Back of Enclosure Drive 129.3 (5.09) 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure. Dimensions B–15 Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting - Frame C 1 303.8 (11.96) 282.5 (11.12) 4.8 (0.19) 273.1 4.8 (10.75) (0.19) 635.0 Cutout (25.00) 644.7 (25.38) 508.0 (20.00) 1 660.4 381.0 (26.00) (15.00) 254.0 (10.00) 12 Required 4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10-32 x 12.7 (0.5) Self-Tap 127.0 4.0 (0.159) for 10-32 x 12.7 (0.5) Threaded (5.00) All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) Drive Back of Enclosure 1 Shading indicates approximate size 129.3 (5.09) of drive inside enclosure. B–16 Dimensions Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting - Frame D 1 Detail 9.9 (0.39) 375.2 (14.77) 362.2 (14.26) 356.1 (14.02) 4.6 (0.18) 6.1 (0.24) See Detail 26.7 1118.6 (1.05) (44.04) 1054.4 1145.3 (41.51) (45.09) 962.7 (37.90) 867.4 (34.15) 806.7 773.9 (31.76) (30.47) 680.5 (26.79) 1 1178.1 650.8 Cutout as Viewed (46.38) (25.62) from INSIDE Enclosure 587.0 (23.11) 494.5 (19.47) 338.6 (13.33) 182.6 (7.19) All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) 16 Required 26.7 4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10-32 x 9.7 (0.38) Self-Tap (1.05) 4.0 (0.159) for 10-32 x 9.7 (0.38) Threaded Drive 1 Shading indicates approximate size Back of Enclosure of drive inside enclosure. * Minimum dimension allowed – More space will 84.1 (3.31) * improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation. Dimensions B–17 Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting - Frame E 1 508.0 (20.00) 489.0 (19.25) 127.0 5.8 54.1 (5.00) (0.23) (2.13) 477.3 (18.79) Cutout 1084.1 (42.68) 1 1422.4 (56.00) 1095.8 (43.14) 127.0 (5.00) All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) 26 Required 4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10-32 x 9.7 (0.38) Self-Tap 75.4 4.0 (0.159) for 10-32 x 9.7 (0.38) Threaded 5.8 (2.97) (0.23) Back of Enclosure Drive 1 Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure. * Minimum dimension allowed – More space will improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation. 132.33 (5.21) * 67.0 (2.64) 31.5 (1.24) B–18 Dimensions TB1 Dimensions for D & E Frame Drives 35.0 31.0 27.0 (1.38) (1.22) (1.10) 61.5 (2.42) 93.0 42.0 (3.66) (1.65) M10 Stud (Approximate 0.375 in.) - 2 Places Recommended Torque - 10 N-m (87 lb.-in.) Recommended Wrench - 17 mm 75 x 31 (2.95 x 1.22) Removable Bar Also applies to TB1 on D Frame Drives 18.0 28.0 23.0 (0.71) (1.10) (0.91) 63.5 (2.50) 32.0 69.0 35.0 (1.26) (2.72) (1.38) M8 Stud (Approximate 0.313 in.) - 2 Places Recommended Torque - 6 N-m (52 lb.-in.) Recommended Wrench - 13 mm 50.8 x 24 (2.00 x 0.95) Removable Bar Dimensions B–19 TB1 Dimensions for G Frame Drives 6.3 (0.25) 117.3 (4.62) 206.2 (8.12) 41.7 (1.64) 50.8 25.4 (1.00) (2.00) 31.8 (1.25) 10.2 (0.40) Dia. 19.1 9.7 (0.38) Typical - 15 Plcs. (0.75) 16.0 (0.63) 31.8 70.0 (1.25) (2.75) 16.0 (0.63) B–20 Dimensions DC Bus Inductor Dimensions for F Frame “Roll-In” Drives All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) 16.0 ±0.4 (0.63 ±0.016) 19.1 ±0.3 (0.75 ±0.01) 9.7 (0.38) L2 L1 228.6 (9.0 Max.) 179.8 ±0.3 217.9 ±0.8 (7.08 ±0.01) (8.58 ±0.03) L3 L4 370.8 ±3.3 13.2 ±3.3 (0.52 ±0.13) (14.6 ±0.13) 396.2 ±3.3 (15.6 ±0.13) 208.3 (8.2 Max.) Weight = 45.36 kg (100 lbs.) Dimensions B–21 Typical F Frame “Roll-In” Mounting in User Supplied Enclosure Suggested Anchoring Point Important: This information represents the method used to (M10 Hardware Required) factory mount an open (roll-in) type Frame F in an enclosure Typical Bracket specifically designed by Allen-Bradley. Illustrations are only (May require additional anchoring for shipping) intended to identify structural mounting points and hardware Alternate Fan Locations shapes. You must design and fabricate steel components Typical Fan Location based on the actual mounting configuration, calculated (2 Places - 1 Each Door) loads and enclosure specifications. Minimum thickness of all parts = 4.6 (0.18). Typical Rail Detail 107.4 Length = (4.23) 465.8 (18.34) 58.9 (2.32) Cable Access Plate (2 Places) Typical Air Inlet (2 Places - 1 Each Door) Enclosure Front 203.2-355.6 Suggested Anti-Roll (8.00-14.00) Anchoring Point 108.0 x 158.8 19.1 Typical (4.25 x 6.25) (0.75) Pre-Wired DC Bus Inductor Must be Mounted Separately - Typical Placement Shown Refer to Figure 2.2 for Wiring Details 196.9 (7.75) B–22 Dimensions Typical G Frame Mounting in User Supplied Enclosure 14.2 (0.56) 11.1 x 19.1 (0.44 x 0.75) 41.1 (1.62) 82.6 (3.25) 134.1 (5.28) 55.1 (2.17) Bracket Important: This information represents the method used to factory mount an open type Frame G in an enclosure specifically designed by Allen-Bradley. Illustrations are only intended to identify structural mounting points and hardware shapes. You must design and fabricate steel components based on the actual mounting configuration, calculated loads and enclosure specifications. Minimum thickness of all parts = 4.6 (0.18). 154.2 (6.07) 188.0 2 Plcs. (7.40) Each End Length = 549.4 (21.63) 57.2 (2.25) Rail Brace 25.4 (1.00) 50.8 (2.00) 14.5 (0.57) 682.2 (26.86) 0.75 (19.1) 711.2 (28.00) Appendix C CE Conformity Low Voltage Directive The following low voltage directives apply:  EN 60204-1  PREN 50178 EMC Directive This apparatus is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) using a technical construction file and the following standards:  EN 50081-1, -2 - Generic Emission Standard  EN 50082-1, -2 - Generic Immunity Standard Declarations of Conformity to the European Union Directives are available. Please contact your Allen-Bradley Sales Representative. 1 Marked for all applicable directives Emissions EN 50081-1 EN 50081-2 EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class B EN 61800-3 Immunity EN 50082-1 EN 50082-2 IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 per EN 50082-1, 2 EN 61800-3 Low Voltage EN 60204-1 PREN 50178 1 Note: Installation guidelines stated below must be adhered to. Important: The conformity of the drive and filter to any standard does not guarantee that the entire installation will conform. Many other factors can influence the total installation and only direct measurements can verify total conformity. C–2 CE Conformity Requirements for The following six items are required for CE conformance: Conforming Installation 1. Standard 1336 PLUS II Drive 0.37-448kW (0.5-600HP) CE com- patible (Series D or higher). 2. Factory installed EMC enclosure (-AE option) or field installed EMC Enclosure Kit (1336x-AEx - see page C–3). 3. Filter as called out below. 4. Grounding as shown on page C–4. 5. Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive & drive to motor) wiring must be braided, shielded cable with a cov- erage of 75% or better, metal conduit or other with equivalent or better attenuation, mounted with appropriate connectors. For shielded cable it is recommended to use a compact strain relief connector with double saddle clamp for filter and drive input and compact strain relief connector with EMI protection for motor output. 6. Control (I/O) and signal wiring must be in conduit or have shield- ing with equivalent attenuation. Filter Filter Selection Filter Catalog Filter Power Three-Phase Frame Mounting Number Series See . . . Dissipation Volts Used with . . . Reference 1336-RFB-7-AA A Figure C.1 4.5 Watts 200-240V 1336F-AQF05 - AQF10 A1 380-480V 1336F-BRF05 - BRF20 A1-A2 1336-RFB-7-A B Figure C.1 or 2 Watts 200-240V 1336F-AQF05 - AQF10 A1 Figure C.2 380-480V 1336F-BRF05 - BRF20 A1-A2 1336-RFB-16-AA A Figure C.1 9 Watts 200-240V 1336F-AQF15 - AQF20 A2 380-480V 1336F-BRF30 - BRF50 A2-A3 1336-RFB-16-A B Figure C.1 or 9.5 Watts 200-240V 1336F-AQF15 - AQF20 A2 Figure C.2 380-480V 1336F-BRF30 - BRF50 A2-A3 1336-RFB-30-A A Figure C.1 14 Watts 200-240V 1336F-AQF30 - AQF50 A3 1336-RFB-30-A4 A Figure C.2 35 Watts 380-480V 1336F-BRF75 - BRF200 A4 1336-RFB-27-B A Figure C.2 30 Watts 200-240V 1336F-A007 B 380-480V 1336F-B007 - B015 B 1336-RFB-48-B A Figure C.2 56 Watts 200-240V 1336F-A010 - A015 B 380-480V 1336F-B020 - B030 B 1336-RFB-80-C A Figure C.2 71 Watts 200-240V 1336F-A020 - A030 C 380-480V 1336F-BX040 - BX060 C 1336-RFB-150-D A Figure C.3 or 90 Watts 200-240V 1336F-A040 - A050 D Figure C.4 380-480V 1336F-B060 - B100 D 1336-RFB-180-D A Figure C.3 or 125 Watts 200-240V 1336F-A060 D Figure C.4 380-480V 1336F-B125 - BX150 D 1336-RFB-340-E A Figure C.3 or 60 Watts 200-240V 1336F-A075 - A125 E Figure C.4 380-480V 1336F-B150 - B250 E 1336-RFB-475-G A Figure C.5 61 Watts 380-480V 1336F-BP/BPR250 - BP/BPR350 F 1336F-BX250 - B350 G 1336-RFB-590-G A Figure C.5 94 Watts 380-480V 1336F-BP/BPR400 - BP/BPR450 F 1336F-B400 - B450 G 1336-RFB-670-G A Figure C.5 121 Watts 380-480V 1336F-B500 - B600 G CE Conformity C–3 EMC Enclosure Kit Selection Enclosure Kit Catalog Number Frame Reference 200-240V Rating 380-480V Rating 500-600V Rating A1, A2, A3 1336F-AE3 1336F-AE3 – A4 1336F-AE2 1336F-AE2 1336F-AE2 B 1336F-AE4 1336F-AE4 1336F-AE4 C 1336F-AE5 1336F-AE5 1336F-AE5 D 1336F-AE6 1336F-AE6 1336F-AE6 E 1336F-AE7 1336F-AE7 1336F-AE7 RFI Filter Installation Important: Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter for details. The RFI filter must be connected between the incoming AC supply line and the drive input terminals. RFI Filter Leakage Current The RFI filter may cause ground leakage currents. Therefore a solid ground connection must be provided as shown below. ATTENTION: To guard against possible equipment damage, RFI filters can only be used with AC supplies that ! are nominally balanced and grounded with respect to ground. In some installations, three-phase supplies are occasionally connected in a 3-wire configuration with one phase grounded (Grounded Delta). The filter must not be used in Grounded Delta supplies. Electrical Configuration Conduit/4-Wire Cable RFI Filter Line Load R (L1) L1 L1' ESC SEL S (L2) L2 L2' JOG T (L3) L3 L3' E E' PE Shield Terminated in Cable Clamp on A Frame Drives Nearest Building Structure Steel C–4 CE Conformity Grounding RFI Filter Grounding Important: Using the optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents. Surge suppression devices are also incorporated into the filter. Therefore, the filter must be permanently installed and solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the same building power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant ground connections. The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked. Mechanical Configuration Important: A positive electrical bond must be maintained between drive and filter at all 4 corners. Star washers can be eliminated if a positive electrical bond is 1 Three-Phase Input assured. Important: Drive and filter must be Star Washers mounted to a common back plane with a positive electrical bond and in close proximity to one another. Flat Washer Three-Phase 1 Bolt Access Input Panel Bolt 1 To Motor 1 Cable Supplied with Filter 1 Conduit 1 To Motor Figure C.1 (Side-by-Side) Figure C.2 (One Assembly) 1336 PLUS II 1336 PLUS II 2 2 Frames A1 - A3 Frames A4, B & C 1 Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive and drive to motor) wiring must be in conduit or have shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation. Shielding/ armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate. See requirements 5 & 6 on page C–2. 2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C–2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers. CE Conformity C–5 Filter Mounting (continued) Important: Drive and filter must be mounted to a common back plane with a positive electrical bond. Spacing is determined by Conduit Box. Three-Phase Three-Phase 1 1 Input Input Access Panel and Input Terminal Block Lower Access Panel 1 To Motor 1 To Motor 1 Conduit Box 1 Conduit Box Nipple/Fitting Figure C.3 Figure C.4 1336 PLUS II 1336 PLUS II (Through-the-Wall Mounting) (Conventional Mounting) 2 2 Frames D & E Frames D & E 1 Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive and drive to motor) wiring must be in conduit or have shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation. Shielding/ armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate. See requirements 5 & 6 on page C–2. 2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C–2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers. C–6 CE Conformity Filter Mounting (continued) Important: A positive electrical bond must be maintained All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) between the enclosure and filter (including brackets), fans, and drive. To assure a positive electrical bond, any paint near all mounting points must be removed. Important: Cooling fans are required for proper drive operation. Fans and air intake openings must be EMI shielded. Refer Appendix A for CFM recommendations. 75.0 (2.95) to Drive Input Terminals Mounting Brackets AC Input Terminals 831.0 (32.72) Important: This information represents the method used to mount 1336-RFB-475, 590 & 670 filters in an Allen-Bradley supplied EMC enclosure. User supplied EMC enclosures must Typical Drive Placement follow all of the guidelines shown. Illustrations are only intended to identify structural mounting points and hardware shapes. You must design and fabricate steel components based on the actual mounting configuration, calculated loads Typical Bracket and enclosure specifications. for Stability (G Frame Only - Mount between PE Terminals & Enclosure) Figure C.5 1336 PLUS II (Typical Filter Mounting) 1, 2 Frames F & G 1 Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive and drive to motor) wiring must be in conduit or have shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation. Shielding/ armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate. See requirements 5 & 6 on page C–2. 2 Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C–2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers. CE Conformity C–7 Required Knockout Assignments Dimensions are in Millimeters and (Inches) Frames A1 through A4 Frames B and C Control I/O Filter Input Motor Output Motor Output Control I/O Filter Input SCANport SCANport 22.2 (0.88) - 1 Plc. 22.2/28.6 (0.88/1.13) - 3 Plcs. 22.2 (0.88) - 1 Plc. 28.6/34.9 (1.13/1.38) - 3 Plcs. Frame E Frame D SCANport Control I/O (Side of Drive) Filter Input Motor Output Filter Input Motor Output Control I/O SCANport 34.9/50.0 (1.38/1.97) - 1 Plc. 34.9 (1.38) - 3 Plcs. 12.7 (0.50) 88.9/104.8 (3.50/4.13) 3 Plcs. 2 Plcs. 62.7/76.2 (2.47/3.00) - 2 Plcs. C–8 CE Conformity Filter Dimensions TB Cover = 50.0 (1.97) x 41.0 (1.61) x 66.0 (2.60) B E H 6.5 (0.26) Braided Shield A D 100.0 (3.94) 10.0 (0.39) F 10.0 (0.39) C 1.0 (0.04) All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) Catalog Weight Number A B C D E F H kg (lbs.) 1336-RFB-7-AA 50.0 255.0 126.0 25.0 240.0 180.0 225.0 1.1 (1.97) (10.04) (4.96) (0.98) (9.45) (7.09) (8.86) (2.4) 1336-RFB-16-AA 55.0 305.0 142.0 30.0 290.0 230.0 275.0 1.7 (2.17) (12.00) (5.59) (1.18) (11.42) (9.06) (10.83) (3.8) 1336-RFB-30-A 60.0 335.0 160.0 35.0 320.0 280.0 305.0 1.8 (2.36) (13.19) (6.30) (1.38) (12.60) (11.02) (12.00) (4.0) B E H 6.5 (0.26) 2 2.1 mm (14 AWG) C D 40.0 (1.57) 280.0 (11.02) F G 6.3 (0.25) Dia. 4 Places A I 70.0 (2.76) All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) Catalog B C D E F G H I Number A 390.0 58.0 30.0 375.0 275.0 7.5 360.0 185.2 1336-RFB-7-A & 16-A 215.9 (15.35) (2.28) (1.18) (14.76) (10.83) (0.30) (14.17) (7.29) Series B (8.50) CE Conformity C–9 Filter Dimensions (continued) Conduit Fitting C H A D H EG F B Catalog Weight Number A B C D E F G H kg (lbs.) 1336-RFB-30-A4 260.1 413.7 58.0 230.1 320.0 15.0 70.0 15.0 4.9 (10.24) (16.29) (2.28) (9.06) (12.60) (0.59) (2.76) (0.59) (10.8) 1336-RFB-27-B 276.6 540.0 58.0 212.6 461.0 10.9 68.1 32.0 7.0 (10.89) (21.26) (2.28) (8.37) (18.15) (0.43) (2.68) (1.26) (15.4) 1336-RFB-48-B 276.6 540.0 68.1 212.6 461.0 10.9 68.1 32.0 8.5 (10.89) (21.26) (2.68) (8.37) (18.15) (0.43) (2.68) (1.26) (18.7) 1336-RFB-80-C 302.0 775.0 78.5 238.0 685.8 20.4 68.8 32.0 12.0 (11.89) (30.50) (3.09) (9.37) (27.00) (0.80) (2.70) (1.26) (26.5) Mounting Hole Detail B F E G Dia. 10.1 (0.41) H 14.8 (0.58) C Side View Dia. 18.8 (0.75) Top D A Front View All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches) Catalog Weight Number A B C D E F G H kg (lbs.) 1336-RFB-150-D, 270.0 1200.0 147.2 204.0 1159.4 20.3 20.3 1108.3 25.0 1336-RFB-180-D (10.63) (47.20) (5.80) (8.03) (45.65) (0.80) (0.80) (43.63) (55.1) 1336-RFB-340-E 377.0 1392.0 155.0 308.0 1346.1 23.0 23.0 1265 37.0 (14.84) (54.80) (6.10) (12.13) (53.00) (0.91) (0.91) (49.80) (81.6) C–10 CE Conformity Filter Dimensions (continued 122.0 (4.08) 122.0 (4.08) B H FE E E F C A D 5.0 (0.20) Dia. Ground Stud G Catalog Weight Number A B C D E F G H kg (lbs.) 1336-RFB-475-G 300.0 794.0 160.0 275.0 200.0 70.0 12.5 740.0 29.0 (11.81) (31.26) (6.30) (10.83) (7.87) (2.76) (0.49) (29.13) (63.9) 1336-RFB-590-G 1336-RFB-670-G Index A E AC Supply Source, 2–3 EEProm Mode, 3–5 Adapter Definitions, 2–41 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), 1–2 Alarms, 7–9 Engineering Unit, 6–4 Analog I/O Options, 2–34 ENUM, 6–4 Analog Option Board F Installation/Removal, 2–34 Setup, 2–34 Fan Voltage, Selecting/Verifying, 2–38 Armored Cable, 2–17 Fault Buffer History, 6–32 Auto Restart, 6–20 Faults Adptr Freq Err, 7–2 B Auxiliary, 7–2 Bgnd 10ms Over, 7–2 Bypass Contactors, 2–9 Bipolar Dir Flt, 7–2 C Blwn Fuse Flt, 7–2 C167 Watchdog, 7–2 Cable Termination, 2–37 Diag C Lim Flt, 7–2 Cables, Power Drive -> HIM, 7–2 Armored, 2–17 DSP Checksum, 7–2 Shielded, 2–17 DSP Comm Fault, 7–2 Unshielded, 2–17 DSP Protected, 7–2 Catalog Number Explanation, 1–2 DSP Queue Fault, 7–2 CE Conformity, 2–10, C–1 DSP Reset Fault, 7–2 Circuit Breakers, Input, 2–5 DSP Timeout Fault, 7–2 Common Mode Cores, 2–37 EE Init Read, 7–2 Contacts, Fault, 7–1 EE Init Value, 7–3 Control Interface Option EEprom Checksum, 7–3 Board Removal/Installation, 2–40 EEprom Fault, 7–3 L4/L4E, A–14 Encoder Loss, 7–3 L5/L5E, A–15 Fgnd 10ms Over, 7–3 L6/L6E, A–16 Ground Fault, 7–3 L7E, A–14 Ground Warning, 7–3 Hardware Trap, 7–3 Control Status Mode, 3–6 Hertz Err Fault, 7–3 Custom Volts/Hz, 6–57 Hertz Sel Fault, 7–4 HIM -> Drive, 7–4 D Ill Prog Input, 7–4 DC Brake to Stop, 6–13 Input Phase Flt, 7–4 Derate Guidelines, A–5 Load Loss Flt, 7–4 Dimensions Loop Overrn Flt, 7–4 F Frame, Roll-In, B–6 Max Retries Fault, 7–4 Filter, CE, C–8 Motor Mode Flt, 7–4 Frame F Mounting Hardware, B–21 Motor Stall Fault, 7–4 Frame G Mounting Hardware, B–22 Motor Thermistor, 7–4 Heat Sink Through the Back, B–12 Mult Prog Input, 7–4 Inductor, DC Bus - Frame F, B–20 Neg Slope Fault, 7–4 IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Op Error Fault, 7–5 Bottom Views, B–9 Open Pot Fault, 7–5 Front Views, B–2 Option Error, 7–5 IP 65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12) Overcurrent Flt, 7–5 Enclosure, B–8 Overload Fault, 7–5 Optional Junction Box, B–11 Overspeed Fault, 7–5 TB1 - Frame G, B–19 Overtemp Fault, 7–5 TB1 - Frames D & E, B–18 Overvolt Fault, 7–5 Display Mode, 3–5 Phase U Fault, 7–5 Distances Between Devices, 2–41 Phase V Fault, 7–5 Distribution Systems Phase W Fault, 7–5 Unbalanced, 2–3 Poles Calc Flt, 7–5 Ungrounded, 2–3 Power Loss Fault, 7–5 Drive Status Structure, A–11 Power Mode Fault, 7–5 Dwell, 6–19 Power Overload, 7–6 Precharge Fault, 7–6 I–2 Index Precharge Open, 7–6 P Prm Access Flt, 7–6 Parameter Cross Ref. Reprogram Fault, 7–6 By Name, A–9 ROM or RAM Fault, 7–6 By Number, A–8 Serial Fault, 7–6 Parameter Record, A–17 Shear Pin Fault, 7–6 Parameters Step Logic Flt, 7–6 % Output Curr, 6–7 Sync Loss Fault, 7–7 % Output Power, 6–7 Temp Sense Open, 7–7 4-20 mA Loss Sel, 6–30 Undervolt Fault, 7–7 Accel Mask, 6–43 UV Short Fault, 7–7 Accel Owner, 6–46 UW Short Fault, 7–7 Accel Time, 6–8, 6–12 VW Short Fault, 7–7 Adaptive I Lim, 6–10 Xsistr Desat Flt, 7–7 Alarm Mask, 6–45 Filtering, RFI, 2–10, 2–12, C–4 Alt Type 2 Cmd, 6–48 Flux Vector vs. V/Hz, 5–7, 5–11 Analog Trim En, 6–30 Frame References, 1–1 Anlg In Hi, 6–30 Frequency Select, 6–16 Anlg In Lo, 6–30 Function Index, 6–1 Anlg In x Freq, 6–5 Fusing, Input, 2–5 Anlg Out Abs, 6–31 Anlg Out Hi, 6–31 G Anlg Out Lo, 6–31 Anlg Out Offset, 6–31 Grounding, 2–11 Anlg Out Sel, 6–31 H Anlg Signal Loss, 6–30 Application Sts, 6–36 Human Interface Module (HIM) At Time, 6–29 Character Map, A–10 Base Frequency, 6–59 Description, 3–1 Base Voltage, 6–58 Key Descriptions, 3–2 Bidir In Offset, 6–64 Operation, 3–4 Blwn Fuse Flt, 6–33 Removal, 3–13 Boost Slope, 6–58 Braking Chopper, 6–14 I Break Freq, 6–60 Input Devices, 2–9 Break Frequency, 6–58 Input Power Conditioning, 2–4 Break Voltage, 6–58 Input/Output Rating, A–2 Bus Limit En, 6–14 Interference, EMI/RFI, 2–9 Bus Reg Level, 6–26 Isolation Transformer, 2–4 Bus Regulation, 6–25 Clear Fault, 6–32 L Cntrl Board Rev, 6–41 L4/L4E Option, A–14 Common Bus, 6–15 Control Select, 6–57 L5/L5E Option, A–15 CR Out Select, 6–28 L6/L6E Option, A–16 Cur Lim Trip En, 6–32 L7E Option, A–14 Current Angle, 6–39 Language, 6–21 Current Limit, 6–9 Logic Control Structure, A–11, A–12 Current Limit En, 6–10 Low Speed Operation, 5–10 Current Lmt Sel, 6–9 Lug Kits, 2–15 Current Step, 6–64 Data In, 6–48 M Data Out, 6–48 Min./Max. Frequency, 6–9 DC Bus Memory, 6–40 Motor Cable Length, 2–18 DC Bus Voltage, 6–5 DC Hold Level, 6–13 Motor Starting/Stopping, 2–9 DC Hold Time, 6–13 Mounting, 2–1 Decel Mask, 6–44 Decel Owner, 6–47 N Decel Time, 6–8, 6–12 Nameplate Location, 1–4 Dig At Temp, 6–28 Dig Out Current, 6–28 O Dig Out Freq, 6–28 Output Configuration, 6–28 Dig Out Torque, 6–28 Overload, 6–11 Direction Mask, 6–43 Index I–3 Direction Owner, 6–46 Max Traverse, 6–25 Drive Alarm, 6–36, 6–37 Maximum Freq, 6–9, 6–12 Drive Direction, 6–38 Maximum Speed, 6–50 Drive Status, 6–36 Maximum Voltage, 6–59 Drive Type, 6–42 Meas. Volts, 6–40 Dwell Frequency, 6–19 Min Bus Volts, 6–24 Dwell Time, 6–19 Minimum Freq, 6–9, 6–12 EEPROM Cksum, 6–40 MOP Freq, 6–6 Elapsed Run Time, 6–7 MOP Increment, 6–17 Enc Count Scale, 6–52 MOP Mask, 6–44 Encoder Counts, 6–52 MOP Owner, 6–47 Encoder Freq, 6–6, 6–52 Motor Mode, 6–38 Encoder Loss Sel, 6–52 Motor NP Amps, 6–11 Encoder PPR, 6–18, 6–50 Motor NP Hertz, 6–11, 6–51 Encoder Type, 6–50 Motor NP RPM, 6–11, 6–51 Fault Alarms, 6–34, 6–35 Motor NP Volts, 6–11 Fault Buffer, 6–32 Motor OL Count, 6–6 Fault Data, 6–33 Motor OL Fault, 6–32 Fault Frequency, 6–34 Motor OL Ret, 6–35 Fault Mask, 6–44 Motor Poles, 6–50 Fault Owner, 6–47 Motor Therm Flt, 6–32 Fault Status, 6–34 Motor Type, 6–15 Firmware Ver., 6–41 Output Current, 6–5 Flt Clear Mode, 6–35 Output Freq, 6–5 Flt Motor Mode, 6–33 Output Power, 6–5 Flt Power Mode, 6–33 Output Pulses, 6–39 Flux Amps Ref, 6–57 Output Voltage, 6–5 Flux Current, 6–7 Overload Amps, 6–11 Flux Up Time, 6–58 Overload Mode, 6–10 Flying Start En, 6–21 P Jump, 6–25 Freq Command, 6–5, 6–38 Phase Loss Level, 6–35 Freq Ref SqRoot, 6–17 Phase Loss Mode, 6–35 Freq Select, 6–8, 6–16 PI Config, 6–53 Freq Source, 6–38 PI Error, 6–55 FStart Forward, 6–22 PI Fdbk Select, 6–55 FStart Reverse, 6–22 PI Feedback, 6–55 Ground Warning, 6–35 PI Max Error, 6–29 Heatsink Temp, 6–6, 6–39 PI Neg Limit, 6–56 Hold Level Sel, 6–14 PI Output, 6–55 Input Mode, 6–8, 6–27 PI Pos Limit, 6–56 Input Status, 6–27, 6–37 PI Preload, 6–56 IR Drop Volts, 6–58 PI Ref Select, 6–54 Jog Frequency, 6–16 PI Reference, 6–55 Jog Mask, 6–43 PI Status, 6–54 Jog Owner, 6–46 Power Mode, 6–39 KI Process, 6–55 Power OL Count, 6–6 KP Amps, 6–15 Precharge Fault, 6–35 KP Process, 6–56 Preset Freq, 6–16 Language, 6–21 Process 1 Par, 6–49 Last Fault, 6–6 Process 1 Scale, 6–49 Latched Alarms, 6–37 Process 1 Txt, 6–49 Line Loss Fault, 6–32 Process 2 Par, 6–49 Line Loss Mode, 6–22 Process 2 Scale, 6–49 Line Loss Volts, 6–24 Process 2 Txt, 6–49 LLoss Restart, 6–22 Pulse Freq, 6–6 Load Loss Detect, 6–25 Pulse In Scale, 6–18, 6–29 Load Loss Level, 6–26 Pulse Out Scale, 6–29 Load Loss Time, 6–26 Pulse Out Select, 6–29 Local Mask, 6–44 PWM Break Freq, 6–60 Local Owner, 6–47 PWM Comp Time, 6–60 Logic Mask, 6–44 PWM Frequency, 6–12 Loss Recover, 6–24 Rated Amps, 6–41 Low Bus Fault, 6–33 Rated CT Amps, 6–41 Max Bus Volts, 6–26 Rated CT kW, 6–41 Max Enc Counts, 6–52 Rated kW, 6–41 I–4 Index Rated Volts, 6–41 Programming Flow Chart, 6–1 Rated VT Amps, 6–41 Pulse Input, 2–31 Rated VT kW, 6–41 Reference Mask, 6–43 R Reference Owner, 6–46 Reactors, 2–4 Remote CR Output, 6–29 Remote I/O, 6–48 Reset/Run Time, 6–20 Reset Defaults, 5–3, 5–5 Reset/Run Tries, 6–20 Ride Thru Volts, 6–24 S Run Boost, 6–58 S Curve, 6–21 Run On Power Up, 6–20 Search Mode, 3–5 Run/Accel Volts, 6–59 Shielded Cables S Curve Enable, 6–20 Power, 2–17 S Curve Time, 6–20 Save MOP Ref, 6–17 Skip Frequency, 6–17 Set Defaults, 6–39 Software Compatibility, 1–1 Shear Pin Fault, 6–32 Specification Skip Freq, 6–17 Analog I/O, 2–36 Skip Freq Band, 6–17 Specifications Slip Adder, 6–51 Control, A–2 Slip Comp Gain, 6–20 Electrical, A–2 Slip@F.L.A., 6–19 Environment, A–1 Slot A-B Option, 6–31 Input/Output Ratings, A–2 SLx Encoder Cnts, 6–64 Protection, A–1 SLx Logic Jump, 6–63 Speed Select Inputs, 2–28 SLx Logic Step, 6–62 Stability Gain, 6–60 SLx Step Jump, 6–63 Start Up Mode, 3–5 SLx Step Setting, 6–63 Status Display, 3–5 SLx Time, 6–64 Step Logic, 6–61 Speed Adder, 6–51 Speed Brake En, 6–15 T Speed Control, 6–19, 6–50, 6–53 TB3, Control Interface Board, 2–25 Speed Error, 6–51 Speed Integral, 6–51 Terminal Blocks Speed KI, 6–51 Auxiliary Output, 2–40 Speed KP, 6–51 Locations, 2–14 Stability Gain, 6–60 TB1, 2–15 Start Boost, 6–58 TB2, Analog I/O, 2–32 Start Mask, 6–43 TB2, Digital Outputs, 2–31 Start Owner, 6–46 TB4/TB6, 2–39 Stop Mode Used, 6–38 Traverse Function, 6–25 Stop Owner, 6–46 Troubleshooting Stop Select, 6–9, 6–13, 6–15 Clearing a Fault, 7–1 Sync Loss Comp, 6–60 Fault Code Cross Ref., 7–8 Sync Loss Gain, 6–59 Fault Descriptions, 7–1 Sync Loss Sel, 6–59 Fault Display, 7–1 Sync Loss Time, 6–60 HIM Upload/Download, 7–7 Sync Mask, 6–44 Sync Owner, 6–47 U Sync Time, 6–13 Unshielded Power Cables, 2–17 TB3 Term Sel, 6–27 Upload/Download Capability, 3–5 Torque Current, 6–7 User Supplied Enclosures, A–4 Traverse Dec, 6–25 Traverse Inc, 6–24 V Traverse Mask, 6–44 Volts/Hz Pattern, 6–57 Traverse Owner, 6–47 VT Scaling, 6–11 W Password Mode, 3–6 Wiring Potentiometer, Wiring, 2–33 Control and Signal, 2–24 Power Loss Ride-Thru, 6–23 Control Interface, 2–25 Preset Frequency, 6–16 Potentiometer, 2–33 Process Mode, 3–5 Power, 2–14 Program Mode, 3–5 Programmable Controller Config., A–12 www.rockwellautomation.com Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation, Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846 Publication 1336 PLUS-5.3 – September, 2005 P/N 184898 (07) Supersedes June, 2003 Copyright © 2005 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in USA